Solution manual - Digital Communications 4th Edition - Proakis

Solution manual - Digital Communications 4th Edition - Proakis

Info iconThis preview shows page 1. Sign up to view the full content.

View Full Document Right Arrow Icon
This is the end of the preview. Sign up to access the rest of the document.

Unformatted text preview: Corrections to Digital Communications, 4th Edition 1. Page 31, Equation (2.1-54) First line: yl instead of y2 Second line: gn instead of g1 2. Page 163, Equation (4.2-30) ∞ should be: s(t) = ao/2 + Σ k=1 3. Page 163, Equation (4.2-31) T should be: ak = (2/T) ∫ s(t) cos 2πkt/T dt , k>0 0 T bk = (2/T) ∫ s(t) sin 2πkt/T dt , k>1 0 4. Page 178, 7 lines from the top should be: sqrt (2ε) instead of ε sqrt (2) 5. Page 238, Equation (5.1-19) should be: h(T-τ ) instead of h(t-τ ) 6. Page 238, two lines below Equation (5.1-20) should be: y2 (T) instead of y2(t) n n 7. Page 244, Equation (5.1 – 45) should be: m = 1,2,…M 8. Page 245, Equation (5.1-48) should be: : sqrt (εb) instead of sqrt (εn) 9. Page 309, Equation (5.4-39) R1 sqrt (2εs/N0) instead of sqrt (2εsR1/N0) 10. Page 318, Equation (5.5-17) add the term: – (N0)dBW/Hz 11. Page 366, Equation (6.4-3) Replace + sign with – sign in the second term of the summation 12. Page 367, Equation (6.4-6) Replace + sign with – sign in the second term of the summation 13. Page 367, Equations (6.4-8) and (6.4-9) add the subscript L to the log-likelihood function 14. Page 422, lines 2 and 3 above Equation (8.1-14) delete the phrase “no more than” 15. Page 468, 12 lines from the top and 5 lines from the bottom should be: b < instead of b< 16. Page 491, Figure 8.2-15 solid line corresponds to soft-decision decoding broken line corresponds to hard-decision decoding 17. Page 500, Equation (8.2-41) In the denominator, Mk should be Mj and Mj should be MJ 18. Page 591, Figure P9.9 The lower shaping filter in the modulator and demodulator, q(t) should have a “hat” on it 19. Page 609, 6 lines above Equation (10.1-34) ε k+1– L-1 should be ε k+l – L-1 20. Page 646, Figure 10.3-5 delete the “hat” from I(z) 21. Page 651, 4 lines from the top replace “over” with “about” 22. Page 651, 2 lines above Section 10.6 “Turob” should be “Turbo” 23. Page 673, Figure 11.1-6 Lower delay line elements: z1 should be z-1 24. Page 750, Figure 13.2-8 Replace “adders” with “multipliers” 25. Page 752, Figure 13.2-9 Replace “adders” with multipliers” 26. Page 856, Equation (14.6-5) Replace K with k 27. Page 885, Figure 14.7-7 The “Input” should be 02310 28. Page 894, Problem 14.16 r1 = h1s1 + h2s2 + n1 r2 = h1s2* + h2s1* + n2 29. Page 895 Delete 2k from the expression on the error probability 30. Page 915, top of page (15.47) should be (15.3-47) 31. Page 925, 6 lines form top T0 should be Tp 32. Page 935 a) top of page: r1 = b1 sqrt(ε1) + b2ρ sqrt (ε2) + n1 r2 = b1ρ sqrt(ε1) + b2 sqrt (ε2) + n2 b) Problem 15.8, last equation delete factor of l/2 c) Problem 15.9, first equation delete comma after b2=1 33. Page 936, first equation at top of page, second term should be: ln cosh { [r2 sqrt (ε2) – b1ρ sqrt (ε1ε2)]/N0 } 34. Page 936, second equation from top of page divide each of the arguments in the cosh function by N0 35. Page 936, Problem 15.10 should be 2 [ ηk = 36. Page 936, Problem 15.11 the last term in the equation should be: (1/2) Q { ε + sqrt[ 1 ε -2‫׀‬ρ‫ ׀‬sqrt (ε ε ) 2 N0/2 12 } CHAPTER 2 Problem 2.1 : 3 P (Ai ) = Hence : j =1 P (Ai, Bj ), i = 1, 2, 3, 4 3 P (A1 ) = j =1 P (A1 , Bj ) = 0.1 + 0.08 + 0.13 = 0.31 3 P (A2 ) = j =1 P (A2 , Bj ) = 0.05 + 0.03 + 0.09 = 0.17 3 P (A3 ) = j =1 P (A3 , Bj ) = 0.05 + 0.12 + 0.14 = 0.31 3 P (A4 ) = Similarly : j =1 P (A4 , Bj ) = 0.11 + 0.04 + 0.06 = 0.21 4 P (B1 ) = i=1 P (Ai , B1 ) = 0.10 + 0.05 + 0.05 + 0.11 = 0.31 4 P (B2 ) = i=1 P (Ai , B2 ) = 0.08 + 0.03 + 0.12 + 0.04 = 0.27 4 P (B3 ) = i=1 P (Ai , B3 ) = 0.13 + 0.09 + 0.14 + 0.06 = 0.42 Problem 2.2 : The relationship holds for n = 2 (2-1-34) : p(x1 , x2 ) = p(x2 |x1 )p(x1 ) Suppose it holds for n = k, i.e : p(x1 , x2 , ..., xk ) = p(xk |xk−1 , ..., x1 )p(xk−1 |xk−2 , ..., x1 ) ...p(x1 ) Then for n = k + 1 : p(x1 , x2 , ..., xk , xk+1 ) = p(xk+1 |xk , xk−1 , ..., x1 )p(xk , xk−1 ..., x1 ) = p(xk+1 |xk , xk−1 , ..., x1 )p(xk |xk1 , ..., x1 )p(xk−1 |xk−2 , ..., x1 ) ...p(x1 ) Hence the relationship holds for n = k + 1, and by induction it holds for any n. 1 Problem 2.3 : Following the same procedure as in example 2-1-1, we prove : p Y (y ) = 1 pX |a| y−b a Problem 2.4 : Relationship (2-1-44) gives : y−b pX p Y (y ) = a 3a [(y − b) /a]2/3 1 1/3 X is a gaussian r.v. with zero mean and unit variance : pX (x) = √1 π e−x 2 Hence : 1 y −b 2/3 1 e− 2 ( a ) p Y (y ) = √ 3a 2π [(y − b) /a]2/3 pdf of Y 0.5 0.45 0.4 a=2 0.35 b=3 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.1 0.05 0 −10 −8 −6 −4 −2 0 y 2 4 6 8 10 Problem 2.5 : (a) Since (Xr , Xi ) are statistically independent : pX (xr , xi ) = pX (xr )pX (xi ) = 2 1 −(x2 +x2 )/2σ2 e ri 2πσ 2 2 /2 Also : Yr + jYi = (Xr + Xi )ejφ ⇒ Xr + Xi = (Yr + jYi ) e−jφ = Yr cos φ + Yi sin φ + j (−Yr sin φ + Yi cos φ) ⇒ Xr = Yr cos φ + Yi sin φ Xi = −Yr sin φ + Yi cos φ The Jacobian of the above transformation is : J= ∂ Xr ∂Yr ∂Xr ∂Yi ∂Xi ∂Yr ∂Xi ∂Yi cos φ − sin φ =1 sin φ cos φ = Hence, by (2-1-55) : pY (yr , yi) = pX ((Yr cos φ + Yi sin φ) , (−Yr sin φ + Yi cos φ)) 2 2 2 1 = 2πσ2 e−(yr +yi )/2σ (b) Y = AX and X = A−1 Y 2 Now, pX (x) = (2πσ1 )n/2 e−x x/2σ (the covariance matrix M of the random variables x1 , ..., xn is 2 2 M = σ I, since they are i.i.d) and J = 1/| det(A)|. Hence : p Y (y ) = 1 1 −1 −1 2 e−y (A ) A y/2σ 2 )n/2 | det(A)| (2πσ For the pdf’s of X and Y to be identical we require that : | det(A)| = 1 and (A−1 ) A−1 = I =⇒ A−1 = A Hence, A must be a unitary (orthogonal) matrix . Problem 2.6 : (a) ψY (jv ) = E ejvY = E ejv n i=1 xi n =E n ejvxi = i=1 i=1 E ejvX = ψX (ejv ) But, pX (x) = pδ (x − 1) + (1 − p)δ (x) ⇒ ψX (ejv ) = 1 + p + pejv ⇒ ψY (jv ) = 1 + p + pejv 3 n n (b) E (Y ) = −j dψY (jv ) |v=0 = −jn(1 − p + pejv )n−1 jpejv |v=0 = np dv and E (Y 2 ) = − d2 ψY (jv ) d |v=0 = − j n(1 − p + pejv )n−1 pejv 2v d dv v=0 = np + np(n − 1)p ⇒ E (Y 2 ) = n2 p2 + np(1 − p) Problem 2.7 : ψ (jv1 , jv2 , jv3 , jv4 ) = E ej (v1 x1 +v2 x2 +v3 x3 +v4 x4 ) ∂ 4 ψ (jv1 , jv2 , jv3 , jv4 ) |v1 =v2 =v3 =v4 =0 ∂v1 ∂v2 ∂v3 ∂v4 From (2-1-151) of the text, and the zero-mean property of the given rv’s : E (X1 X2 X3 X4 ) = (−j )4 1 ψ (j v) = e− 2 v Mv where v = [v1 , v2 , v3 , v4 ] , M = [µij ] . We obtain the desired result by bringing the exponent to a scalar form and then performing quadruple differentiation. We can simplify the procedure by noting that : 1 ∂ψ (j v) = −µi ve− 2 v Mv ∂vi where µi = [µi1 , µi2 , µi3, µi4 ] . Also note that : ∂µj v = µij = µji ∂vi Hence : ∂ 4 ψ (jv1 , jv2 , jv3 , jv4 ) |V=0 = µ12 µ34 + µ23 µ14 + µ24 µ13 ∂v1 ∂v2 ∂v3 ∂v4 Problem 2.8 : For the central chi-square with n degress of freedom : ψ (jv ) = 1 (1 − j 2vσ 2 )n/2 4 Now : jnσ 2 dψ (jv ) dψ (jv ) = |v=0 = nσ 2 ⇒ E (Y ) = −j n/2+1 dv dv (1 − j 2vσ 2) d2 ψ (jv ) −2nσ 4 (n/2 + 1) d2 ψ (jv ) = ⇒E Y2 =− |v=0 = n(n + 2)σ 2 2 )n/2+2 dv 2 dv 2 (1 − j 2vσ 2 The variance is σY = E (Y 2 ) − [E (Y )]2 = 2nσ 4 For the non-central chi-square with n degrees of freedom : ψ (jv ) = where by definition : s2 = n i=1 1 (1 − j 2vσ 2)n/2 2 2 ejvs /(1−j 2vσ ) m2 . i dψ (jv ) j nσ 2 2 2 js2 = + ejvs /(1−j 2vσ ) n/2+1 n/2+2 dv (1 − j 2vσ 2 ) (1 − j 2vσ 2) (jv Hence, E (Y ) = −j dψdv ) |v=0 = nσ 2 + s2 −s2 (n + 4)σ 2 − ns2 σ 2 −s4 d2 ψ (jv ) −nσ 4 (n + 2) 2 2 = + + ejvs /(1−j 2vσ ) n/2+2 n/2+3 n/2+4 2 dv (1 − j 2vσ 2 ) (1 − j 2vσ 2 ) (1 − j 2vσ 2 ) Hence, E Y2 =− and d2 ψ (jv ) |v=0 = 2nσ 4 + 4s2 σ 2 + nσ 2 + s2 dv 2 2 σY = E Y 2 − [E (Y )]2 = 2nσ 4 + 4σ 2 s2 Problem 2.9 : The Cauchy r.v. has : p(x) = a/π , −∞ x2 +a2 < x < ∞ (a) E (X ) = ∞ −∞ xp(x)dx = 0 since p(x) is an even function. E X2 = Note that for large x, x2 x2 +a2 ∞ −∞ x2 p(x)dx = a π ∞ −∞ x2 dx x2 + a2 → 1 (i.e non-zero value). Hence, E X 2 = ∞, σ 2 = ∞ 5 (b) ∞ a/π jvx a/π ejvx dx e dx = 2 + a2 −∞ x −∞ (x + ja) (x − ja) This integral can be evaluated by using the residue theorem in complex variable theory. Then, for v ≥ 0 : a/π jvx e ψ (jv ) = 2πj = e−av x + ja x=ja ψ (jv ) = E j vX = ∞ For v < 0 : ψ (jv ) = −2πj Therefore : a/π jvx e x − ja = eav v x=−ja ψ (jv ) = e−a|v| Note: an alternative way to find the characteristic function is to use the Fourier transform relationship between p(x), ψ (jv ) and the Fourier pair : e−b|t| ↔ c 1 , c = b/2π, f = 2πv 2 + f2 πc Problem 2.10 : (a) Y = 1 n n i=1 Xi , ψXi (jv ) = e−a|v| 1 ψY (jv ) = E ejv n n i=1 Xi n = v E ej n Xi = i=1 n i=1 ψXi (jv/n) = e−a|v|/n (b) Since ψY (jv ) = ψXi (jv ) ⇒ pY (y ) = pXi (xi ) ⇒ pY (y ) = n = e−a|v| a/π . y 2 +a2 a/π (c) As n → ∞, pY (y ) = y2 +a2 , which is not Gaussian ; hence, the central limit theorem does not hold. The reason is that the Cauchy distribution does not have a finite variance. Problem 2.11 : We assume that x(t), y (t), z (t) are real-valued stochastic processes. The treatment of complexvalued processes is similar. (a) φzz (τ ) = E {[x(t + τ ) + y (t + τ )] [x(t) + y (t)]} = φxx (τ ) + φxy (τ ) + φyx (τ ) + φyy (τ ) 6 (b) When x(t), y (t) are uncorrelated : φxy (τ ) = E [x(t + τ )y (t)] = E [x(t + τ )] E [y (t)] = mx my Similarly : φyx (τ ) = mx my Hence : φzz (τ ) = φxx (τ ) + φyy (τ ) + 2mx my (c) When x(t), y (t) are uncorrelated and have zero means : φzz (τ ) = φxx (τ ) + φyy (τ ) Problem 2.12 : The power spectral density of the random process x(t) is : Φxx (f ) = ∞ −∞ φxx (τ )e−j 2πf τ dτ = N0 /2. The power spectral density at the output of the filter will be : Φyy (f ) = Φxx (f )|H (f )|2 = N0 | H (f )| 2 2 Hence, the total power at the output of the filter will be : φyy (τ = 0) = ∞ −∞ Φyy (f )df = N0 2 ∞ −∞ |H (f )|2df = N0 (2B ) = N0 B 2 Problem 2.13 : X1 MX = E [(X − mx )(X − mx ) ] , X = X2 , mx is the corresponding vector of mean values. X3 7 Then : MY Hence : E [(Y − my )(Y − my ) ] E [A(X − mx )(A(X − mx )) ] E [A(X − mx )(X − mx ) A ] AE [(X − mx )(X − mx ) ] A AMx A = = = = = µ11 0 µ11 + µ13 0 4µ22 0 MY = µ11 + µ31 0 µ11 + µ13 + µ31 + µ33 Problem 2.14 : Y (t) = X 2 (t), φxx (τ ) = E [x(t + τ )x(t)] φyy (τ ) = E [y (t + τ )y (t)] = E x2 (t + τ )x2 (t) Let X1 = X2 = x(t), X3 = X4 = x(t + τ ). Then, from problem 2.7 : E (X1 X2 X3 X4 ) = E (X1 X2 ) E (X3 X4 ) + E (X1 X3 ) E (X2 X4 ) + E (X1 X4 ) E (X2 X3 ) Hence : φyy (τ ) = φ2 (0) + 2φ2 (τ ) xx xx Problem 2.15 : p R (r ) = 2 Γ(m) m Ω m r 2m−1 e−mr We know that : pX (x) = 2 /Ω , X= 1 √p 1/ Ω R x √ 1/ Ω 1 √R Ω . Hence : pX (x) = 1 √ 2 m 1/ Ω Γ(m) Ω m √ xΩ 2m−1 −m(x√Ω)2 /Ω e = 2 2 mm x2m−1 e−mx Γ(m) Problem 2.16 : The transfer function of the filter is : H (f ) = 1 1 1/jωC = = R + 1/jωC jωRC + 1 j 2πf RC + 1 8 (a) Φxx (f ) = σ 2 ⇒ Φyy (f ) = Φxx (f ) |H (f )|2 = (b) φyy (τ ) = F −1 {Φxx (f )} = σ2 RC 1 RC ∞ −∞ σ2 (2πRC )2 f 2 + 1 1 ( RC )2 + (2πf )2 ej 2πf τ df Let : a = RC, v = 2πf. Then : φyy (τ ) = σ2 2RC ∞ −∞ σ 2 −a|τ | σ 2 −|τ |/RC a/π jvτ e dv = = e e a2 + v 2 2RC 2RC where the last integral is evaluated in the same way as in problem P-2.9 . Finally : E Y 2 (t) = φyy (0) = σ2 2RC Problem 2.17 : If ΦX (f ) = 0 for |f | > W, then ΦX (f )e−j 2πf a is also bandlimited. The corresponding autocorrelation function can be represented as (remember that ΦX (f ) is deterministic) : sin 2πW τ − 2n n W φX ( φX (τ − a) = − a) n 2W 2πW τ − n=−∞ ∞ (1) 2W Let us define : ˆ X (t) = n n sin 2πW t − 2W X( ) 2W 2πW t − n n=−∞ ∞ 2W We must show that : or ˆ E |X (t) − X (t)|2 = 0 m m sin 2πW t 2W ˆ ) X( =0 E X (t) − X (t) X (t) − 2W 2πW t − m m=−∞ ∞ (2) 2W First we have : E n ∞ n − m sin 2πW t − 2W ˆ (t) X ( m ) = φX (t − m ) − ) X (t) − X φX ( 2W 2W 2W 2πW t − n n=−∞ 2W 9 But the right-hand-side of this equation is equal to zero by application of (1) with a = m/2W. ˆ ˆ Since this is true for any m, it follows that E X (t) − X (t) X (t) = 0. Also E ˆ X (t) − X (t) X (t) = φX (0) − sin 2πW t − 2n n W − t) φX ( n 2W 2πW t − n=−∞ ∞ 2W Again, by applying (1) with a = t anf τ = t, we observe that the right-hand-side of the equation is also zero. Hence (2) holds. Problem 2.18 : ∞ Q(x) = √1 π x e−t /2 dt = P [N ≥ x] , where N is a Gaussian r.v with zero mean and unit 2 variance. From the Chernoff bound : 2 ˆ ˆ P [N ≥ x] ≤ e−vx E evN (1) E N evN − xE evN = 0 (2) where v is the solution to : ˆ Now : E evN = ∞ −∞ √1 2π = ev = ev and E N evN = 2 /2 √1 2π 2 /2 evt e−t dt ∞ −(t−v)2 /2 dt −∞ e 2 /2 d 2 E evN = vev /2 dv Hence (2) gives : v=x ˆ and then : 2 (1) ⇒ Q(x) ≤ e−x ex 2 /2 Problem 2.19 : Since H (0) = ∞ −∞ h(n) = 0 ⇒ my = mx H (0) = 0 10 ⇒ Q(x) ≤ e−x 2 /2 The autocorrelation of the output sequence is 2 h(i)h(j )φxx (k − j + i) = σx φyy (k ) = i j ∞ h(i)h(k + i) i=−∞ where the last equality stems from the autocorrelation function of X (n) : 2 σx , j = k + i 0, o.w. 2 φxx (k − j + i) = σx δ (k − j + i) = 2 2 2 Hence, φyy (0) = 6σx , φyy (1) = φyy (−1) = −4σx , φyy (2) = φyy (−2) = σx , φyy (k ) = 0 otherwise. Finally, the frequency response of the discrete-time system is : ∞ −j 2πf n H (f ) = −∞ h(n)e = 1 − 2e−j 2πf + e−j 4πf 2 1 − e−j 2πf = = e−j 2πf ejπf − e−jπf = −4e−jπf sin 2 πf 2 which gives the power density spectrum of the output : 2 2 Φyy (f ) = Φxx (f )|H (f )|2 = σx 16 sin 4 πf = 16σx sin 4 πf Problem 2.20 : |k | 1 2 φ (k ) = The power density spectrum is Φ(f ) = ∞ k =−∞ = −1 k =−∞ = ∞ 1 j 2πf k k ) k =0 ( 2 e φ(k )e−j 2πf k −k 1 2 = 1 1−ej 2πf /2 = 2−cos 2πf 5/4−cos 2πf = e−j 2πf k + + 3 5−4 cos 2πf + 11 1 2 ∞ 1 −j 2πf k ) k =0 ( 2 e 1 1−e−j 2πf /2 −1 ∞ k =0 −1 k e−j 2πf k −1 Problem 2.21 : We will denote the discrete-time process by the subscript d and the continuous-time (analog) process by the subscript a. Also, f will denote the analog frequency and fd the discrete-time frequency. (a) φd (k ) = E [X ∗ (n)X (n + k )] = E [X ∗ (nT )X (nT + kT )] = φa (kT ) Hence, the autocorrelation function of the sampled signal is equal to the sampled autocorrelation function of X (t). (b) φd (k ) = φa (kT ) = ∞ −∞ Φa (F )ej 2πf kT df = (2l+1)/2T ∞ l=−∞ (2l−1)/2T = 1/2T ∞ l=−∞ −1/2T = 1/2T −1/2T Φa (F )ej 2πf kT df l Φa (f + T )ej 2πF kT df ∞ l=−∞ l Φa (f + T ) ej 2πF kT df Let fd = f T. Then : 1/2 1 φ d (k ) = −1/2 T ∞ Φa ((fd + l)/T ) ej 2πfd k dfd (1) l=−∞ We know that the autocorrelation function of a discrete-time process is the inverse Fourier transform of its power spectral density φ d (k ) = 1/2 −1/2 Comparing (1),(2) : Φd (fd ) = 1 T Φd (fd )ej 2πfd k dfd ∞ l=−∞ Φa ( fd + l ) T (c) From (3) we conclude that : Φd (fd ) = 1 fd Φa ( ) T T iff : Φa (f ) = 0, ∀ f : | f | > 1/2T 12 (2) (3) Otherwise, the sum of the shifted copies of Φa (in (3)) will overlap and aliasing will occur. Problem 2.22 : (a) φ a (τ ) = ∞ −∞ Φa (f )ej 2πf τ df = W −W ej 2πf τ df = sin 2πW τ πτ By applying the result in problem 2.21, we have φd (k ) = fa (kT ) = (b) If T = 1 2W sin 2πW kT πkT , then : φ d (k ) = 2W = 1/T, k=0 0, otherwise Thus, the sequence X (n) is a white-noise sequence. The fact that this is the minimum value of T can be shown from the following figure of the power spectral density of the sampled process: −f s − W −f s −f s + W −W W fs − W fs fs + W æ We see that the maximum sampling rate fs that gives a spectrally flat sequence is obtained when : 1 W = fs − W ⇒ fs = 2W ⇒ T = 2W f (c) The triangular-shaped spectrum Φ(f ) = 1 − |W| , |f | ≤ W may be obtained by convolv√ ing the rectangular-shaped spectrum Φ1 (f ) = 1/ W , |f | ≤ W/2. Hence, φ(τ ) = φ2 (τ ) = 1 13 1 W sin πW τ πτ 2 .Therefore, sampling X(t) at a rate with autocorrelation function : 1 φ d (k ) = W sin πW kT πkT 1 T 2 = W samples/sec produces a white sequence sin πk πk =W 2 = W, k=0 0, otherwise Problem 2.23 : Let’s denote : y (t) = fk (t)fj (t).Then : ∞ −∞ fk (t)fj (t)dt = ∞ −∞ y (t)dt = Y (f )|f =0 where Y (f ) is the Fourier transform of y (t). Since : y (t) = fk (t)fj (t) ←→ Y (f ) = Fk (f ) ∗ Fj (f ). But : ∞ 1 −j 2πf k/2W e fk (t)e−j 2πf t dt = Fk (f ) = 2W −∞ Then : ∞ Fk (a) ∗ Fj (f − a)da Y (f ) = Fk (f ) ∗ Fj (f ) = −∞ and at f = 0 : Y (f )|f =0 = = ∞ −∞ 1 2W Fk (a) ∗ Fj (−a)da 2 ∞ −j 2πa(k −j )/2W da −∞ e 1/2W, k = j 0, k=j = Problem 2.24 : 1∞ |H (f )|2df G0 For the filter shown in Fig. P2-12 we have G = 1 and Beq = Beq = ∞ 0 |H (f )|2df = B For the lowpass filter shown in Fig. P2-16 we have H (f ) = 1 1 ⇒ | H (f )| 2 = 1 + j 2πf RC 1 + (2πf RC )2 14 So G = 1 and Beq = = = ∞ 2 0 |H (f )| df 1∞ |H (f )|2df 2 −∞ 1 4RC where the last integral is evaluated in the same way as in problem P-2.9 . 15 CHAPTER 3 Problem 3.1 : I (Bj ; Ai ) = log 2 P (Bj |Ai ) P (Bj , Ai ) = log 2 P (Bj ) P (Bj )P (Ai ) Also : 0.31, j = 1 P (Bj , Ai ) = 0.27, j = 2 P (Bj ) = i=1 0.42, j = 3 4 0.31, 3 0.17, P (Ai) = P (Bj , Ai ) = 0.31, j =1 0.21, Hence : i=1 i=2 i=3 i=4 I (B1 ; A1 ) = log 2 0.10 = +0.057 bits (0.31)(0.31) I (B1 ; A2 ) = log 2 0.05 = −0.076 bits (0.31)(0.17) I (B1 ; A3 ) = log 2 0.05 = −0.943 bits (0.31)(0.31) I (B1 ; A4 ) = log 2 0.11 = +0.757 bits (0.31)(0.21) I (B2 ; A1 ) = log 2 0.08 = −0.065 bits (0.27)(0.31) I (B2 ; A2 ) = log 2 0.03 = −0.614 bits (0.27)(0.17) I (B2 ; A3 ) = log 2 0.12 = +0.520 bits (0.27)(0.31) I (B2 ; A4 ) = log 2 0.04 = −0.503 bits (0.27)(0.21) I (B3 ; A1 ) = log 2 0.13 = −0.002 bits (0.42)(0.31) I (B3 ; A2 ) = log 2 0.09 = +0.334 bits (0.42)(0.17) 16 0.14 = +0.105 bits (0.42)(0.31) 0.06 I (B3 ; A4 ) = log 2 = −0.556 bits (0.42)(0.21) (b) The average mutual information will be : I (B3 ; A3 ) = log 2 3 4 I (B ; A) = j =1 i=1 P (Ai, Bj )I (Bj ; Ai ) = 0.677 bits Problem 3.2 : H (B ) = − 3 j =1 P (Bj ) log 2 P (Bj ) = − [0.31 log 2 0.31 + 0.27 log 2 0.27 + 0.42 log 2 0.42] = 1.56 bits/letter Problem 3.3 : Let f (u) = u − 1 − ln u. The first and second derivatives of f (u) are 1 df =1− du u and 1 d2 f = 2 > 0, ∀u > 0 2 du u 17 df Hence this function achieves its minimum at du = 0 ⇒ u = 1. The minimum value is f (u = 1) = 0 so ln u = u − 1, at u = 1. For all other values of u : 0 < u < ∞, u = 1, we have f (u) > 0 ⇒ u − 1 > ln u. Problem 3.4 : We will show that −I (X ; Y ) ≤ 0 −I (X ; Y ) = − 1 ln 2 = P (x ,y ) i j i P (xi , yj ) log 2 P (xi )iP (jyj ) j ( P (xi , yj ) ln PPxix)iP (jy)j ) ( ,y We use the inequality ln u ≤ u − 1. We need only consider those terms for which P (xi , yj ) > 0; then, applying the inequality to each term in I (X ; Y ) : P (xi )P (yj ) P (xi ,yj ) −I (X ; Y ) ≤ 1 ln 2 i j P (xi , yj ) = 1 ln 2 i j [P (xi )P (yj ) − P (xi , yj )] ≤ 0 −1 The first inequality becomes equality if and only if P (xi )P (yj ) = 1 ⇐⇒ P (xi)P (yj ) = P (xi , yj ) P (xi , yj ) when P (xi , yj ) > 0. Also, since the summations [P (xi )P (yj ) − P (xi , yj )] i j contain only the terms for which P (xi , yj ) > 0, this term equals zero if and only if P (Xi)P (Yj ) = 0, when P (xi , yj ) = 0. Therefore, both inequalitites become equalities and hence, I (X ; Y ) = 0 if and only if X and Y are statistically independent. 18 Problem 3.5 : We shall prove that H (X ) − log n ≤ 0 : H (X ) − log n = n i=1 1 pi log pi − log n = n i=1 1 pi log pi − = n i=1 1 pi log npi n i=1 = 1 ln 2 n i=1 1 pi ln npi ≤ 1 ln 2 n i=1 pi pi log n 1 npi −1 =0 Hence, H (X ) ≤ log n. Also, if pi = 1/n ∀ i ⇒ H (X ) = log n. Problem 3.6 : By definition, the differential entropy is H (X ) = − ∞ −∞ p(x) log p(x)dx For the uniformly distributed random variable : H (X ) = − (a) For a = 1, (b) For a = 4, (c) For a = 1/4, a 0 1 1 log dx = log a a a H (X ) = 0 H (X ) = log 4 = 2 log 2 H (X ) = log 1 = −2 log 2 4 Problem 3.7 : (a) The following figure depicts the design of a ternary Huffman code (we follow the convention that the lower-probability branch is assigned a 1) : 19 Codeword Probability 01 11 0.20 001 0.15 100 1 0.25 0.12 1 1 0.10 0001 0.08 1 0.33 0 1 0.18 0 0.1 00001 0.42 0 0 1 0.05 00000 0.58 0 0.22 101 . 0.05 0 0 1 æ (b) The average number of binary digits per source letter is : ¯ R= P (xi )ni = 2(0.45) + 3(0.37) + 4(0.08) + 5(0.1) = 2.83 bits/letter i (c) The entropy of the source is : H (X ) = − P (xi )logP (xi) = 2.80 bits/letter i As it is expected the entropy of the source is less than the average length of each codeword. Problem 3.8 : The source entropy is : 5 H (X ) = i=1 pi log 1 = log 5 = 2.32 bits/letter pi ¯ (a) When we encode one letter at a time we require R = 3 bits/letter . Hence, the efficiency is 2.32/3 = 0.77 (77%). 20 (b) If we encode two letters at a time, we have 25 possible sequences. Hence, we need 5 bits ¯ per 2-letter symbol, or R = 2.5 bits/letter ; the efficiency is 2.32/2.5 = 0.93. (c) In the case of encoding three letters at a time we have 125 possible sequences. Hence we ¯ need 7 bits per 3-letter symbol, so R = 7/3 bits/letter; the efficiency is 2.32/(7/3) = 0.994. Problem 3.9 : (a) I (xi ; yj ) = log = log P (xi |yj ) P (xi ) P (xi ,yj ) P (xi )P (yj ) P (yj |xi ) P (yj ) 1 − log P (y1|xi ) P (yj ) j = log = log = I (yj ) − I (yj |xi ) (b) I (xi ; yj ) = log P (xi |yj ) P (xi ) P (xi ,yj ) P (xi )P (yj ) 1 + log P (1 j ) P (xi ) y = log = log − log P (x1,yj ) i = I (xi ) + I (yj ) − I (xi , yj ) Problem 3.10 : (a) H (X ) = − ∞ k =1 p(1 − p)k−1 log2 (p(1 − p)k−1 ) = −p log2 (p) ∞ (1 − p)k−1 − p log2 (1 − p) k =1 ∞ (k − 1)(1 − p)k−1 k =1 1 1−p − p log2 (1 − p) = −p log2 (p) 1 − (1 − p) (1 − (1 − p))2 1−p log2 (1 − p) = − log2 (p) − p 21 (b) Clearly P (X = k |X > K ) = 0 for k ≤ K . If k > K , then P (X = k | X > K ) = P (X = k, X > K ) p(1 − p)k−1 = P (X > K ) P (X > K ) But, ∞ ∞ p(1 − p)k−1 = p P (X > K ) = k =K +1 (1 − p)k−1 − k =1 1 − (1 − p) 1 − 1 − (1 − p) 1 − (1 − p) so that P (X = k | X > K ) = (1 − p)k−1 k =1 K =p K = (1 − p)K p(1 − p)k−1 (1 − p)K If we let k = K + l with l = 1, 2, . . ., then p(1 − p)K (1 − p)l−1 P (X = k | X > K ) = = p(1 − p)l−1 K (1 − p) that is P (X = k |X > K ) is the geometrically distributed. Hence, using the results of the first part we obtain H (X | X > K ) = − ∞ l=1 p(1 − p)l−1 log2 (p(1 − p)l−1 ) = − log2 (p) − 1−p log2 (1 − p) p Problem 3.11 : (a) The marginal distribution P (x) is given by P (x) = y P (x, y ). Hence, P (x) log P (x) = − H (X ) = − x =− P (x, y ) log P (x) x y P (x, y ) log P (x) x,y Similarly it is proved that H (Y ) = − x,y P (x, y ) log P (y ). (b) Using the inequality ln w ≤ w − 1 with w = ln P (x)P (y ) , P (x,y ) we obtain P (x)P (y ) P (x)P (y ) ≤ −1 P (x, y ) P (x, y ) 22 Multiplying the previous by P (x, y ) and adding over x, y , we obtain P (x, y ) ln P (x)P (y ) − x,y P (x, y ) ln P (x, y ) ≤ x,y P (x)P (y ) − x,y P (x, y ) = 0 x,y Hence, H (X, Y ) ≤ − P (x, y ) ln P (x)P (y ) = − x,y P (x, y ) ln P (x) − =− x,y Equality holds when (c) P (x)P (y ) P (x,y ) P (x, y )(ln P (x) + ln P (y )) x,y P (x, y ) ln P (y ) = H (X ) + H (Y ) x,y = 1, i.e when X , Y are independent. H (X, Y ) = H (X ) + H (Y |X ) = H (Y ) + H (X |Y ) Also, from part (b), H (X, Y ) ≤ H (X ) + H (Y ). Combining the two relations, we obtain H (Y ) + H (X |Y ) ≤ H (X ) + H (Y ) =⇒ H (X |Y ) ≤ H (X ) Suppose now that the previous relation holds with equality. Then, P (x) log P (x|y ) = − − x P (x) log P (x) ⇒ x P (x) log( x P (x) )=0 P (x|y ) However, P (x) is always greater or equal to P (x|y ), so that log(P (x)/P (x|y )) is non-negative. Since P (x) > 0, the above equality holds if and only if log(P (x)/P (x|y )) = 0 or equivalently if and only if P (x)/P (x|y ) = 1. This implies that P (x|y ) = P (x) meaning that X and Y are independent. Problem 3.12 : The marginal probabilities are given by P (X = 0, Y = k ) = P (X = 0, Y = 0) + P (X = 0, Y = 1) = P (X = 0) = k 2 3 1 3 1 P (X = k, Y = 0) = P (X = 0, Y = 0) = 3 P (X = 1, Y = k ) = P (X = 1, Y = 1) = P (X = 1) = k P (Y = 0) = k P (Y = 1) = P (X = k, Y = 1) = P (X = 0, Y = 1) + P (X = 1, Y = 1) = k 23 2 3 Hence, H (X ) = − H (X ) = − 1 11 1 1 Pi log2 Pi = −( log2 + log2 ) = .9183 3 33 3 i=0 1 11 1 1 Pi log2 Pi = −( log2 + log2 ) = .9183 3 33 3 i=0 2 1 1 log2 = 1.5850 3 i=0 3 H (X |Y ) = H (X, Y ) − H (Y ) = 1.5850 − 0.9183 = 0.6667 H (Y |X ) = H (X, Y ) − H (X ) = 1.5850 − 0.9183 = 0.6667 H (X, Y ) = − Problem 3.13 : H= = = = = lim H (Xn |X1 , . . . , Xn−1 ) n→∞ lim − n→∞ x1 ,...,xn lim − n→∞ x1 ,...,xn lim − n→∞ xn ,xn−1 P (x1 , . . . , xn ) log2 P (xn |x1 , . . . , xn−1 ) P (x1 , . . . , xn ) log2 P (xn |xn−1 ) P (xn , xn−1 ) log2 P (xn |xn−1 ) lim H (Xn |Xn−1 ) n→∞ However, for a stationary process P (xn , xn−1 ) and P (xn |xn−1 ) are independent of n, so that H = lim H (Xn |Xn−1 ) = H (Xn |Xn−1 ) n→∞ Problem 3.14 : H (X, Y ) = H (X, g (X )) = H (X ) + H (g (X )|X ) = H (g (X )) + H (X |g (X )) 24 But, H (g (X )|X ) = 0, since g (·) is deterministic. Therefore, H (X ) = H (g (X )) + H (X |g (X )) Since each term in the previous equation is non-negative we obtain H (X ) ≥ H (g (X )) Equality holds when H (X |g (X )) = 0. This means that the values g (X ) uniquely determine X , or that g (·) is a one to one mapping. Problem 3.15 : I (X ; Y ) = n i=1 m j =1 ( ,y P (xi , yj ) log PPxix)iP (jy)j ) ( = n m i=1 j =1 P (xi , yj ) log P (xi , yj ) n − i=1 m P (xi , yj ) log P (yj ) j =1 − n i=1 = n m i=1 j =1 P (xi , yj ) log P (xi , yj ) m − j =1 P (yj ) log P (yj ) − n i=1 m j =1 P (xi , yj ) log P (xi ) P (xi ) log P (xi ) = −H (XY ) + H (X ) + H (Y ) Problem 3.16 : H (X1 X2 ...Xn ) = − m1 m2 mn ... j1 =1 j2 =1 jn =1 P (x1 , x2 , ..., xn ) log P (x1 , x2 , ..., xn ) Since the {xi } are statistically independent : P (x1 , x2 , ..., xn ) = P (x1 )P (x2 )...P (xn ) and m2 mn ... j2 =1 jn =1 P (x1 )P (x2 )...P (xn ) = P (x1 ) (similarly for the other xi ). Then : H (X1X2 ...Xn ) = − m1 j1 =1 =− m1 j1 =1 = n i=1 m2 j2 =1 ... mn jn =1 P (x1 )P (x2 )...P (xn ) log P (x1 )P (x2 )...P (xn ) P (x1 ) log P (x1 ) − H ( Xi ) 25 m2 j2 =1 P (x2 ) log P (x2 )... − mn jn =1 P (xn ) log P (xn ) Problem 3.17 : We consider an n − input, n − output channel. Since it is noiseless : 0, i = j 1, i = j P (yj |xi ) = Hence : H (X | Y ) = = n i=1 n i=1 n j =1 n j =1 P (xi , yj ) log P (xi |yj ) P (yj |xi )p(xi ) log P (xi |yj ) But it is also true that : 0, i = j 1, i = j P (xi |yj ) = Hence : n H (X | Y ) = − i=1 P (xi ) log 1 = 0 Problem 3.18 : The conditional mutual information between x3 and x2 given x1 is defined as : I (x3 ; x2 |x1 ) = log P (x3 |x2 x1 ) P (x3 , x2 |x1 ) = log P (x3 |x1 )P (x2 |x1 ) P (x3 |x1 ) Hence : I (x3 ; x2 |x1 ) = I (x3 |x1 ) − I (x3 |x2 x1 ) and I ( X 3 ; X2 | X1 ) = = x1 − + x2 x3 x1 x2 x1 (3 21 P (x1 , x2 , x3 ) log PPxx|3xxx) ) ( |1 x2 P (x1 , x2 , x3 ) log P (x3 |x1 ) x3 P (x1 , x2 , x3 ) log P (x3 |x2 x1 ) x3 = H ( X 3 | X 1 ) − H ( X 3 | X 2 X1 ) Since I (X3 ; X2 |X1 ) ≥ 0, it follows that : H ( X 3 | X 1 ) ≥ H ( X 3 | X 2 X1 ) Problem 3.19 : 26 Assume that a > 0. Then we know that in the linear transformation Y = aX + b : 1 y−b p Y (y ) = p X ( ) a a Hence : H (Y ) = − =− Let u = y −b . a ∞ −∞ pY (y ) log pY (y )dy ∞1 y −b y −b 1 −∞ a pX ( a ) log a pX ( a )dy Then dy = adu, and : H (Y ) = − =− ∞1 −∞ a pX (u) [log pX (u) ∞ −∞ − log a] adu pX (u) log pX (u)du + ∞ −∞ pX (u) log adu = H (X ) + log a In a similar way, we can prove that for a < 0 : H (Y ) = −H (X ) − log a Problem 3.20 : The linear transformation produces the symbols : yi = axi + b, i = 1, 2, 3 with corresponding probabilities p1 = 0.45, p2 = 0.35, p3 = 0.20. since the {yi} have the same probability distribution as the {xi }, it follows that : H (Y ) = H (X ). Hence, the entropy of a DMS is not affected by the linear transformation. Problem 3.21 : (a) The following figure depicts the design of the Huffman code, when encoding a single level at a time : 27 Codeword Level Probability 1 a1 0.3365 00 a2 0.3365 010 a3 a4 0 0.6635 0 0.1635 011 1 0.1635 0 0.327 1 1 The average number of binary digits per source level is : ¯ R= P (ai )ni = 1.9905 bits/level i The entropy of the source is : H (X ) = − P (ai)logP (ai) = 1.9118 bits/level i (b) Encoding two levels at a time : 28 æ Codeword Levels Probability 001 a1 a1 010 a1 a2 0.11323 011 a2 a1 0.11323 100 a2 a2 1 0.11323 0.11323 1011 a1 a3 0.05502 1010 a1 a4 0.05502 00000 a2 a3 0.05502 00001 a2 a4 0.05502 00010 a3 a1 0.05502 00011 a3 a2 0.05502 1100 a4 a1 0.05502 1101 a4 a2 0.05502 11100 a3 a3 0.02673 11101 a3 a4 0.02673 11110 a4 a3 0.02673 11111 a4 a4 0.02673 0 0.22646 1 1 0 1 0.33331 1 0 0 0.11004 0 1 0.22008 0 0 0.44023 0.11004 1 1 1 0 0 0.11004 1 0 0.21696 1 0.05346 1 0.10692 0 1 0.05346 1 1 (c) H (X ) ≤ ¯ RJ J 0.55987 0.11004 ¯ The average number of binary digits per level pair is R2 = resulting in an average number : ¯ R = 1.937 bits/level As J → ∞, 0 0 0.22327 0 ¯ RJ 1 < H (X ) + J J → H (X ) = 1.9118 bits/level. 29 æ P (ak )nk = 3.874 bits/pair k Problem 3.22 : First, we need the state probabilities P (xi ), i = 1, 2. For stationary Markov processes, these can be found, in general, by the solution of the system : P Π = P, Pi = 1 i where P is the state probability vector and Π is the transition matrix : Π[ij ] = P (xj |xi ). However, in the case of a two-state Markov source, we can find P (xi ) in a simpler way by noting that the probability of a transition from state 1 to state 2 equals the probability of a transition from state 2 to state 1(so that the probability of each state will remain the same). Hence : P (x1 |x2 )P (x2 ) = P (x2 |x1 )P (x1 ) ⇒ 0.3P (x2 ) = 0.2P (x1 ) ⇒ P (x1 ) = 0.6, P (x2 ) = 0.4 Then : H (X ) = P (x1 ) [−P (x1 |x1 ) log P (x1 |x1 ) − P (x2 |x1 ) log P (x2 |x1 )] + P (x2 ) [−P (x1 |x2 ) log P (x1 |x2 ) − P (x2 |x2 ) log P (x2 |x2 )] = 0.6 [−0.8 log 0.8 − 0.2 log 0.2] + 0.4 [−0.3 log 0.3 − 0.7 log 0.7] = 0.7857 bits/letter If the source is a binary DMS with output letter probabilities P (x1 ) = 0.6, P (x2 ) = 0.4, its entropy will be : HDM S (X ) = −0.6 log 0.6 − 0.4 log 0.4 = 0.971 bits/letter We see that the entropy of the Markov source is smaller, since the memory inherent in it reduces the information content of each output. Problem 3.23 : (a) H (X ) = −(.05 log2 .05 + .1 log2 .1 + .1 log2 .1 + .15 log2 .15 +.05 log2 .05 + .25 log2 .25 + .3 log2 .3) = 2.5282 (b) After quantization, the new alphabet is B = {−4, 0, 4} and the corresponding symbol probabilities are given by P (−4) = P (−5) + P (−3) = .05 + .1 = .15 P (0) = P (−1) + P (0) + P (1) = .1 + .15 + .05 = .3 P (4) = P (3) + P (5) = .25 + .3 = .55 30 Hence, H (Q(X )) = 1.4060. As it is observed quantization decreases the entropy of the source. Problem 3.24 : The following figure depicts the design of a ternary Huffman code. 0 0 .22 0 1 10 .18 11 .17 12 .15 2 20 .13 21 .1 0 1 22 .05 2 .50 1 .28 2 The average codeword length is ¯ R (X ) = P (x)nx = .22 + 2(.18 + .17 + .15 + .13 + .10 + .05) x = 1.78 (ternary symbols/output) For a fair comparison of the average codeword length with the entropy of the source, we compute the latter with logarithms in base 3. Hence, H (X ) = − x P (x) log3 P (x) = 1.7047 ¯ As it is expected H (X ) ≤ R(X ). Problem 3.25 : Parsing the sequence by the rules of the Lempel-Ziv coding scheme we obtain the phrases 0, 00, 1, 001, 000, 0001, 10, 00010, 0000, 0010, 00000, 101, 00001, 000000, 11, 01, 0000000, 110, ... The number of the phrases is 18. For each phrase we need 5 bits plus an extra bit to represent the new source output. 31 Dictionary Dictionary Codeword Location Contents 1 00001 0 00000 0 2 00010 00 00001 0 3 00011 1 00000 1 4 00100 001 00010 1 5 00101 000 00010 0 6 00110 0001 00101 1 7 00111 10 00011 0 8 01000 00010 00110 0 9 01001 0000 00101 0 10 01010 0010 00100 0 11 01011 00000 01001 0 12 01100 101 00111 1 13 01101 00001 01001 1 14 01110 000000 01011 0 15 01111 11 00011 1 16 10000 01 00001 1 17 10001 0000000 01110 0 18 10010 110 01111 0 Problem 3.26 : (a) ∞ 1x 1 −x e λ ln( e− λ )dx λ λ 0 ∞1 ∞1 x xx 1 e− λ dx + e− λ dx = − ln( ) λ0λ λ λ 0 1 ∞ 1 −x e λ xdx = ln λ + λ0 λ 1 = ln λ + λ = 1 + ln λ λ H (X ) = − where we have used the fact ∞ 1 −x λ dx 0 λe = 1 and E [X ] = ∞ 0 1 x λ e− λ dx = λ. x (b) ∞ 1 − |x | 1 |x | e λ ln( e− λ )dx 2λ −∞ 2λ ∞1 |x | 1 1 e− λ dx + = − ln( ) 2λ −∞ 2λ λ H (X ) = − 32 ∞ −∞ |x| 1 − |x | e λ dx 2λ 0 ∞ 1 1x 1x −x e λ dx + x e− λ dx λ −∞ 2λ 2λ 0 1 1 = ln(2λ) + λ + λ = 1 + ln(2λ) 2λ 2λ = ln(2λ) + (c) λ −x + λ x+λ x+λ −x + λ ln dx − ln dx 2 2 2 λ λ λ2 −λ λ 0 0 x+λ λ −x + λ 1 dx + dx − ln 2 λ λ2 −λ λ2 0 0 x+λ λ −x + λ − ln(x + λ)dx − ln(−x + λ)dx λ2 −λ λ2 0 2λ z ln zdz ln(λ2 ) − 2 λ0 λ 2 z 2 ln z z 2 − ln(λ2 ) − 2 λ 2 40 1 ln(λ2 ) − ln(λ) + 2 0 H (X ) = − = = = = Problem 3.27 : λ λ (a) Since R(D ) = log D and D = λ , we obtain R(D ) = log( λ/2 ) = log(2) = 1 bit/sample. 2 (b) The following figure depicts R(D ) for λ = 0.1, .2 and .3. As it is observed from the figure, an increase of the parameter λ increases the required rate for a given distortion. 7 6 R(D) 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 l=.3 l=.2 l=.1 0.05 0.1 0.15 Distortion D 33 0.2 0.25 0.3 Problem 3.28 : (a) For a Gaussian random variable of zero mean and variance σ 2 the rate-distortion function 2 is given by R(D ) = 1 log2 σ . Hence, the upper bound is satisfied with equality. For the lower 2 D bound recall that H (X ) = 1 log2 (2πeσ 2 ). Thus, 2 1 1 1 log2 (2πeD ) = log2 (2πeσ 2 ) − log2 (2πeD ) 2 2 2 1 2πeσ 2 = = R (D ) log2 2 2πeD H (X ) − As it is observed the upper and the lower bounds coincide. (b) The differential entropy of a Laplacian source with parameter λ is H (X ) = 1 + ln(2λ). The variance of the Laplacian distribution is σ2 = ∞ −∞ x2 1 − |x | e λ dx = 2λ2 2λ √ Hence, with σ 2 = 1, we obtain λ = 1/2 and H (X ) = 1+ln(2λ) = 1+ln( 2) = 1.3466 nats/symbol = 1.5 bits/symbol. A plot of the lower and upper bound of R(D ) is given in the next figure. Laplacian Distribution, unit variance 5 4 R(D) 3 2 1 Upper Bound 0 -1 0 Lower Bound 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Distortion D (c) The variance of the triangular distribution is given by σ2 = 0 −λ 1 λ2 λ2 = 6 = λ −x + λ x+λ 2 x dx + x2 dx λ2 λ2 0 14 λ3 0 1 1 λ x+ x + 2 − x4 + x3 4 3 λ 4 3 −λ 34 λ 0 √ √ Hence, with σ 2 = 1, we obtain λ = 6 and H (X ) = ln(6)−ln( 6)+1/2 = 1.7925 bits /source output. A plot of the lower and upper bound of R(D ) is given in the next figure. Triangular distribution, unit variance 4.5 4 3.5 3 R(D) 2.5 2 1.5 1 Upper Bound 0.5 Lower Bound 0 -0.5 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Distortion D Problem 3.29 : σ 2 = E [X 2 (t)] = RX (τ )|τ =0 = Hence, ˘ SQNR = 3 · 4ν X 2 = 3 · 4ν A2 2 X2 A2 = 3 · 4ν 2 x2 2A max With SQNR = 60 dB, we obtain 10 log10 3 · 4q 2 = 60 =⇒ q = 9.6733 The smallest integer larger that q is 10. Hence, the required number of quantization levels is ν = 10. Problem 3.30 : (a) H (X | G ) = − ∞ ∞ −∞ −∞ p(x, g ) log p(x|g )dxdg 35 But X, G are independent, so : p(x, g ) = p(x)p(g ), p(x|g ) = p(x).Hence : ∞ ∞ H (X |G) = − −∞ p(g ) −∞ p(x) log p(x)dx dg ∞ = − −∞ p(g )H (X )dg 2 = H (X ) = 1 log(2πeσx ) 2 where the last equality stems from the Gaussian pdf of X. (b) I (X ; Y ) = H (Y ) − H (Y | X ) Since Y is the sum of two independent, zero-mean Gaussian r.v’s , it is also a zero-mean Gaussian 2 2 2 2 r.v. with variance : σ 2 = σx + σn . Hence : H (Y ) = 1 log (2πe (σx + σn )) . Also, since y = x + g : y 2 ( y −x ) 1 − 2 e 2σn p(y |x) = pg (y − x) = √ 2πσn 2 Hence : H (Y | X ) = − = = = ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ p(x, y ) log p(y |x)dxdy 1 (y − x)2 exp(− ) dydx 2 2σn −∞ −∞ 2πσn ∞ ∞ √ (y − x)2 p(x) log e pg (y − x) ln( 2πσn ) + dy dx 2 2σn −∞ −∞ ∞ √ 12 p(x) log e ln( 2πσn ) + 2 σn dx 2σn −∞ ∞ √ 1 log( 2πσn ) + log e p(x)dx 2 −∞ 1 2 log 2πeσn (= H (G)) 2 =− = ∞ p(x) log e where we have used the fact that : From H (Y ), H (Y |X ) : I (X ; Y ) = H (Y ) − H (Y | X ) = ∞ −∞ ∞ p(y |x) ln √ pg (y − x)dy = 1, ∞ 2 −∞ (y − x) pg (y − x)dy 2 = E [G2 ] = σn . 1 1 σ2 1 2 2 2 log 2πe(σx + σn ) − log 2πeσn = log 1 + x 2 2 2 2 σn 36 Problem 3.31 : Codeword Letter Probability 2 x1 0.25 00 x2 0.20 01 x3 0.15 02 x4 0.12 10 x5 0.10 12 x6 0.08 110 x7 0.05 111 x8 2 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 0.28 1 0.05 x9 0.47 2 0 1 1 0.1 æ ¯ R = 1.85 ternary symbols/letter Problem 3.32 : Given (n1 , n2 , n3 , n4 ) = (1, 2, 2, 3) we have : 4 2 −nk = 2−1 + 2−2 + 2−2 + 2−3 = k =1 9 >1 8 Since the Craft inequality is not satisfied, a binary code with code word lengths (1, 2, 2, 3) that satisfies the prefix condition does not exist. Problem 3.33 : 2n 2 k =1 −nk 2n = 2 −n = 2n 2 −n = 1 k =1 37 Therefore the Kraft inequality is satisfied. Problem 3.34 : 1 p (X ) = (2π )n/2 |M | ∞ H (X ) = − But : 1 −∞ ... ∞ −∞ 1/2 e− 2 X M −1 X p(X) log p(X)dX 1 1 log p(X) = − log(2π )n |M | − log e X M−1 X 2 2 and ∞ −∞ ... Hence : ∞ −∞ 1 n log e X M−1 X p(X)dX = log e 2 2 H (X ) = = 1 2 1 2 log(2π )n |M | + 1 log en 2 log(2πe)n |M | Problem 3.35 : R(D ) = 1 + D log D + (1 − D ) log(1 − D ), 0 ≤ D = Pe ≤ 1/2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 R(D) 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 D 38 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 Problem 3.36 : R(D ) = log M + D log D + (1 − D ) log (1 − D ) M −1 3 2.5 2 R(D) M=8 1.5 1 M=4 0.5 M=2 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 D 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Problem 3.37 : ˜ ˜ ˜ dW (X, X) = (X − X) W(X − X) Let W = P P. Then : ˜ ˜ ˜ dW (X, X) = (X − X) P P(X − X) ˜ ˜ = P (X − X ) P (X − X ) 1 ˜ ˜ = n Y−Y Y−Y √ ˜√ ˜ ˜ ˜ where by definition : Y= nPX, Y = nPX . Hence : dW (X, X) = d2 (Y,Y ). Problem 3.38 : (a) The first order predictor is : x(n) = a11 x(n − 1). The coefficient a11 that minimizes the MSE ˆ is found from the orthogonality of the prediction error to the prediction data : E [e(n)x(n − 1)] = 0 ⇒ E [(x(n) − a11 x(n − 1)) x(n − 1)] = 0 ⇒ φ(1) − a11 φ(0) = 0 ⇒ a11 = φ(1)/φ(0) = 1/2 39 The minimum MSE is : 1 = φ(0) (1 − a2 ) = 3/4 11 (b) For the second order predictor : x(n) = a21 x(n − 1) + a22 x(n − 2). Following the Levinsonˆ Durbin algorithm (Eqs 3-5-25) : a22 = 1 k =1 φ(2) − a1k φ(2 − k ) 1 1 0− 12 2 = = −1/3 3/4 a21 = a11 − a22 a11 = 2/3 The minimum MSE is : 2 = 1 (1 − a22 )2 = 2/3 Problem 3.39 : p(x1 , x2 ) = 15 , 7ab 0, x1 , x2 ∈ C o.w If x1 , x2 are quantized separately by using uniform intervals of length ∆, the number of levels a b needed is L1 = ∆ , L2 = ∆ . The number of bits is : Rx = R1 + R2 = log L1 + log L2 = log ab ∆2 By using vector quantization with squares having area ∆2 , we have Lx = 7ab log 15∆2 bits. The difference in bit rate is : Rx − Rx = log 7ab 15∆2 and Rx = log Lx = ab 7ab 15 = 1.1 bits/output sample − log = log 2 2 ∆ 15∆ 7 for all a, b > 0. Problem 3.40 : 1 (a) The area between the two squares is 4 × 4 − 2 × 2 = 12. Hence, pX,Y (x, y ) = 12 . The 2 marginal probability pX (x) is given by pX (x) = −2 pX,Y (x, y )dy . If −2 ≤ X < −1, then pX (x) = 2 −2 pX,Y (x, y )dy = 40 1 y 12 2 −2 = 1 3 If −1 ≤ X < 1, then −1 pX (x) = −2 1 dy + 12 2 1 1 1 dy = 12 6 Finally, if 1 ≤ X ≤ 2, then pX (x) = 2 −2 pX,Y (x, y )dy = 1 y 12 2 −2 = 1 3 The next figure depicts the marginal distribution pX (x). . . . . . 1/3 . ... 1/6 -2 -1 Similarly we find that p Y (y ) = 1 1 3 1 6 1 3 2 −2 ≤ y < −1 −1 ≤ y < −1 1≤y≤2 (b) The quantization levels x1 , x2 , x3 and x4 are set to − 3 , − 1 , ˆˆˆ ˆ 2 2 resulting distortion is DX = 2 2 3 2 = 3 1 = 12 = 1 2 and 0 3 1 (x + )2 pX (x)dx + 2 (x + )2 pX (x)dx 2 2 −2 −1 −1 202 9 1 (x2 + 3x + )dx + (x + x + )dx 4 6 −1 4 −2 −1 13 32 9 2 13 12 1 x+ x+ x x+ x+ x + 3 2 4 63 2 4 −2 3 2 respectively. The −1 0 −1 The total distortion is 1 1 1 + = 12 12 6 whereas the resulting number of bits per (X, Y ) pair Dtotal = DX + DY = R = RX + RY = log2 4 + log2 4 = 4 (c) Suppose that we divide the region over which p(x, y ) = 0 into L equal subregions. The case of L = 4 is depicted in the next figure. 41 For each subregion the quantization output vector (ˆ, y ) is the centroid of the corresponding xˆ rectangle. Since, each subregion has the same shape (uniform quantization), a rectangle with width equal to one and length 12/L, the distortion of the vector quantizer is D= 12 L 1 1 12 2 L [(x, y ) − ( , )] dxdy 2 2L 12 0 12 1 1 12 2 L (x − )2 + (y − ) dxdy 2 2L 0 0 123 1 12 12 1 1 +3 +2 = L 12 L 12 12 L 0 L = 12 L = 12 If we set D = 1 , we obtain 6 √ 12 1 =⇒ L = 144 = 12 = L2 12 Thus, we have to divide the area over which p(x, y ) = 0, into 12 equal subregions in order to achieve the same distortion. In this case the resulting number of bits per source output pair (X, Y ) is R = log2 12 = 3.585. Problem 3.41 : (a) The joint probability density function is pXY (x, y ) = pX (x) is pX (x) = y pXY (x, y )dy . If −2 ≤ x ≤ 0,then pX (x) = If 0 ≤ x ≤ 2,then pX (x) = 1 √ (2 2)2 = 1 . The marginal distribution 8 x+2 1 x+2 pX,Y (x, y )dy = y |x+2 2 = −x − 8 4 −x −2 −x+2 x −2 1x −x + 2 pX,Y (x, y )dy = y |−−+2 = x2 8 4 The next figure depicts pX (x). 42 1 2 ✦❛❛ ✦✦ ❛❛ ✦ ❛❛ ✦✦ ✦ ❛ −2 2 From the symmetry of the problem we have p Y (y ) = y +2 4 −y +2 4 −2 ≤ y < 0 0≤y≤2 (b) DX = 2 1 2 1 = 2 1 = 12 The total distortion is = −1 0 3 1 (x + )2 pX (x)dx + 2 (x + )2 pX (x)dx 2 2 −2 −1 −1 32 10 1 (x + ) (x + 2)dx + (x + )2 (−x + 2)dx 2 2 −1 2 −2 −1 1 14 9 1 1 4 5 3 33 2 9 + x+ x+ x+ x x + x3 + x2 + x 4 3 8 2 24 8 2 −2 0 −1 1 1 1 + = 12 12 6 whereas the required number of bits per source output pair Dtotal = DX + DY = R = RX + RY = log2 4 + log2 4 = 4 (c) We divide the square over which p(x, y ) = 0 into 24 = 16 equal square regions. The area of each square is 1 and the resulting distortion 2 1 √ 2 1 √ 2 1 1 (x − √ )2 + (y − √ )2 dxdy 0 0 22 22 1 1 √ √ 1 2 2 =4 (x − √ )2 dxdy 0 0 22 1 √ x 1 4 2 (x2 + − √ )dx =√ 8 20 2 1 1 2 √2 4 13 1 x + x− √ x =√ 8 23 22 0 1 = 12 Hence, using vector quantization and the same rate we obtain half the distortion. 16 D= 8 43 CHAPTER 4 Problem 4.1 : (a) x(t) = ˆ Hence : 1 π ∞ −∞ x(a) da t−a 1 ∞ xa x(−t) = − π −∞ −t(−)a da ˆ −) 1− = − π ∞∞ x(t+bb (−db) − 1 ∞ xb = − π −∞ −t(+)b db () 1∞ = π −∞ x−bb db = x(t) ˆ t where we have made the change of variables : b = −a and used the relationship : x(b) = x(−b). (b) In exactly the same way as in part (a) we prove : x(t) = x(−t) ˆ ˆ (c) x(t) = cos ω0 t, so its Fourier transform is : X (f ) = 1 [δ (f − f0 ) + δ (f + f0 )] , f0 = 2πω0 . 2 Exploiting the phase-shifting property (4-1-7) of the Hilbert transform : 1 1 ˆ [δ (f − f0 ) − δ (f + f0 )] = F −1 {sin 2πf0 t} X (f ) = [−jδ (f − f0 ) + jδ (f + f0 )] = 2 2j Hence, x(t) = sin ω0 t. ˆ (d) In a similar way to part (c) : x(t) = sin ω0 t ⇒ X (f ) = 1 1 ˆ [δ (f − f0 ) − δ (f + f0 )] ⇒ X (f ) = [−δ (f − f0 ) − δ (f + f0 )] 2j 2 1 ˆ ˆ ⇒ X (f ) = − [δ (f − f0 ) + δ (f + f0 )] = −F −1 {cos 2πω0 t} ⇒ x(t) = − cos ω0 t 2 (e) The positive frequency content of the new signal will be : (−j )(−j )X (f ) = −X (f ), f > 0, ˆ ˆ while the negative frequency content will be : j · jX (f ) = −X (f ), f < 0. Hence, since X (f ) = ˆ −X (f ), we have : x(t) = −x(t). ˆ 44 (f) Since the magnitude response of the Hilbert transformer is characterized by : |H (f )| = 1, ˆ we have that : X (f ) = |H (f )| |X (f )| = |X (f )| . Hence : ∞ −∞ 2 ˆ X (f ) df = ∞ −∞ |X (f )|2 df and using Parseval’s relationship : ∞ −∞ x2 (t)dt = ˆ ∞ −∞ x2 (t)dt (g) From parts (a) and (b) above, we note that if x(t) is even, x(t) is odd and vice-versa. ˆ ∞ x Therefore, x(t)ˆ(t) is always odd and hence : −∞ x(t)ˆ(t)dt = 0. x Problem 4.2 : We have : x(t) = h(t) ∗ x(t) ˆ where h(t) = 1 πt and H (f ) = −j, f > 0 j, f < 0 . Hence : Φxx (f ) = Φxx (f ) |H (f )|2 = Φxx (f ) ˆˆ and its inverse Fourier transform : φxx (τ ) = φxx (τ ) ˆˆ Also : φxx (τ ) = E [x(t + τ )ˆ(t)] x ˆ = 1 π ∞ E [x(t+τ )x(a)] da −∞ t−a = 1 π ∞ φxx (t+τ −a) da −∞ t−a 1 = −π = 1 π −∞ φxx (b) db ∞ b−τ ∞ φxx (b) −∞ τ −b db 45 = −φxx (τ ) Problem 4.3 : (a) E [z (t)z (t + τ )] = E [{x(t + τ ) + jy (t + t)} {x(t) + jy (t)}] = E [x(t)x(t + τ )] − E [y (t)y (t + τ )] + jE [x(t)y (t + τ )] +E [y (t)x(t + τ )] = φxx (τ ) − φyy (τ ) + j [φyx (τ ) + φxy (τ )] But φxx (τ ) = φyy (τ )and φyx (τ ) = −φxy (τ ). Therefore : E [z (t)z (t + τ )] = 0 (b) V= E V2 = T 0 T 0 T 0 z (t)dt E [z (a)z (b)] dadb = 0 from the result in (a) above. Also : E (V V ∗ ) = = = T 0 T 0 T 0 E [z (a)z ∗ (b)] dadb 2N0 δ (a − b)dadb 2N0 da = 2N0 T T 0 T 0 Problem 4.4 : E [x(t + τ )x(t)] = A2 E [sin (2πfc (t + τ ) + θ) sin (2πfc t + θ)] 2 2 = A cos 2πfc τ − A E [cos (2πfc (2t + τ ) + 2θ)] 2 2 where the last equality follows from the trigonometric identity : sin A sin B = 1 [cos(A − B ) − cos(A + B )] . But : 2 E [cos (2πfc (2t + τ ) + 2θ)] = = 2π 0 cos (2πfc (2t + τ ) 2π 1 cos (2πfc (2t + 2π 0 Hence : E [x(t + τ )x(t)] = 46 A2 cos 2πfc τ 2 + 2θ) p(θ)dθ τ ) + 2θ) dθ = 0 Problem 4.5 : We know from Fourier transform properties that if a signal x(t) is real-valued then its Fourier transform satisfies : X (−f ) = X ∗ (f ) (Hermitian property). Hence the condition under which sl (t) is real-valued is : Sl (−f ) = Sl∗ (f ) or going back to the bandpass signal s(t) (using 4-1-8): ∗ S+ (fc − f ) = S+ (fc + f ) The last condition shows that in order to have a real-valued lowpass signal sl (t), the positive frequency content of the corresponding bandpass signal must exhibit hermitian symmetry around the center frequency fc . In general, bandpass signals do not satisfy this property (they have Hermitian symmetry around f = 0), hence, the lowpass equivalent is generally complex-valued. Problem 4.6 : A well-known result in estimation theory based on the minimum mean-squared-error criterion states that the minimum of Ee is obtained when the error is orthogonal to each of the functions in the series expansion. Hence : ∞ −∞ s(t) − K k =1 ∗ sk fk (t) fn (t)dt = 0, n = 1, 2, ..., K (1) since the functions {fn (t)} are orthonormal, only the term with k = n will remain in the sum, so : ∞ ∗ s(t)fn (t)dt − sn = 0, n = 1, 2, ..., K −∞ or: sn = ∞ −∞ ∗ s(t)fn (t)dt n = 1, 2, ..., K The corresponding residual error Ee is : Emin = ∞ −∞ = ∞ −∞ |s(t)|2 dt − ∞ −∞ K ∗ k =1 sk fk (t)s (t)dt = ∞ −∞ |s(t)|2 dt − ∞ −∞ ∗ K ∗ k =1 sk fk (t)s (t)dt s(t) − = Es − K k =1 K k =1 sk fk (t) s(t) − K n=1 sn fn (t) dt − K ∗∞ n=1 sn −∞ s(t) − K k =1 sk fk (t) ∗ fn (t)dt |sk |2 where we have exploited relationship (1) to go from the second to the third step in the above calculation. 47 Note : Relationship (1) can also be obtained by simple differentiation of the residual error with respect to the coefficients {sn } . Since sn is, in general, complex-valued sn = an + jbn we have to differentiate with respect to both real and imaginary parts : d E dan e = ⇒− ∞ −∞ ⇒ −2an ⇒ ∞ −∞ d dan ∞ −∞ s(t) − an fn (t) s(t) − ∞ −∞ K k =1 K n=1 ∗ Re fn (t) s(t) − ∗ Re fn (t) s(t) − ∗ K n=1 sn fn (t) sk fk (t) s(t) − K n=1 sn fn (t) K n=1 ∗ ∗ + a∗ fn (t) s(t) − n sn fn (t) sn fn (t) dt = 0 K n=1 sn fn (t) dt = 0 dt = 0 d t = 0, n = 1, 2, ..., K where we have exploited the identity : (x + x∗ ) = 2Re{x}. Differentiation of Ee with respect to bn will give the corresponding relationship for the imaginary part; combining the two we get (1). Problem 4.7 : The procedure is very similar to the one for the real-valued signals described in the book (pages 167-168). The only difference is that the projections should conform to the complex-valued vector space : ∞ ∗ s2 (t)f1 (t)dt c12= −∞ and, in general for the k -th function : cik = ∞ −∞ sk (t)fi∗ (t)dt, i = 1, 2, ..., k − 1 Problem 4.8 : ∞ 1 For real-valued signals the correlation coefficients are given by : ρkm = √Ek Em −∞ sk (t)sm (t)dt √ 1/2 (e) . For the signals in this and the Euclidean distances by : dkm = Ek + Em − 2 Ek Em ρkm problem : E 1 = 2, E 2 = 2, E 3 = 3, E 4 = 3 2 2 ρ12 = 0 ρ13 = √6 ρ14 = − √6 ρ23 = 0 ρ24 = 0 ρ34 = − 1 3 48 and: √2 (e) (e) (e) d12 = 2 d13 = 2 + 3 − 2 6 √6 = 1 d14 = √ √ √ (e) (e) d24 = 5 d23 = 2 + 3 = 5 √ (e) d34 = 3 + 3 + 2 ∗ 3 1 = 2 2 3 √2 2 + 3 + 2 6 √6 = 3 Problem 4.9 : The energy of the signal waveform sm (t) is : E = = ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ 1 − M ∞ 2 |sm (t)| dt = s2 (t)dt + m M 1 M2 −∞ M 1 sm (t) − M ∞ M k =1 l=1 −∞ sk (t) dt k =1 sk (t)sl (t)dt ∞ 1 sm (t)sk (t)dt − M −∞ k =1 2 M M ∞ l=1 −∞ sm (t)sl (t)dt 1 MM 2 = E+ 2 E δkl − E M k=1 l=1 M 1 2 M −1 = E+ E− E= E M M M The correlation coefficient is given by : ρmn = 1 E 1 = E 1 − E = ∞ −∞ sm (t)sn (t)dt = 1 E ∞ ∞ −∞ 1 sm (t)sn (t)dt + 2 M −∞ 1 M 1 ME M2 M ∞ M =− M ∞ k =1 l=1 −∞ M sn (t)sk (t)dt + k =1 −∞ 1 1 − ME − ME M −1 E M sm (t) − 1 M l=1 1 M M k =1 sk (t) sn (t) − 1 M M l=1 sl (t) dt sk (t)sl (t)dt ∞ −∞ sm (t)sl (t)dt 1 M −1 Problem 4.10 : (a) To show that the waveforms fn (t), n = 1, . . . , 3 are orthogonal we have to prove that: ∞ −∞ fm (t)fn (t)dt = 0, 49 m=n Clearly: c12 = = ∞ −∞ 2 f1 (t)f2 (t)dt + 0 2 1 4 =0 = 4 f1 (t)f2 (t)dt = 0 4 1 4 dt − 2 f1 (t)f2 (t)dt 0 4 2 dt = f1 (t)f2 (t)dt 1 1 × 2 − × (4 − 2) 4 4 Similarly: c13 = = ∞ f1 (t)f3 (t)dt = −∞ 11 4 =0 0 dt − 1 4 2 1 dt − 4 0 1 4 f1 (t)f3 (t)dt 3 2 dt + 4 1 4 3 dt and : c23 = = ∞ f2 (t)f3 (t)dt = −∞ 11 4 =0 0 dt − 1 4 2 1 dt + 4 0 1 4 f2 (t)f3 (t)dt 3 2 dt − 4 1 4 3 dt Thus, the signals fn (t) are orthogonal. It is also straightforward to prove that the signals have unit energy : ∞ |fi(t)|2 dt = 1, i = 1, 2, 3 −∞ Hence, they are orthonormal. (b) We first determine the weighting coefficients xn = x1 = x2 = x3 = 4 0 0 0 4 4 ∞ −∞ x(t)fn (t)dt, x(t)f1 (t)dt = − x(t)f2 (t)dt = 1 2 x(t)f3 (t)dt = − 1 2 0 1 2 1 4 0 dt + 1 2 n = 1, 2, 3 2 1 dt − 1 2 dt + 1 2 3 2 dt + 1 2 dt + 1 2 4 3 dt = 0 x(t)dt = 0 1 0 dt − 1 2 2 1 3 2 4 3 dt = 0 As it is observed, x(t) is orthogonal to the signal wavaforms fn (t), n = 1, 2, 3 and thus it can not represented as a linear combination of these functions. 50 Problem 4.11 : (a) As an orthonormal set of basis functions we consider the set f1 (t) = 1 0≤t<1 0 o.w f2 (t) = 1 1≤t<2 0 o.w f3 (t) = 1 2≤t<3 0 o.w f4 (t) = 1 3≤t<4 0 o.w In matrix notation, the four waveforms can be represented as s1 (t) s2 (t) s3 (t) s4 (t) = 2 −1 −1 −1 f1 (t) −2 1 1 0 f2 (t) 1 −1 1 −1 f3 (t) f4 (t) 1 −2 −2 2 Note that the rank of the transformation matrix is 4 and therefore, the dimensionality of the waveforms is 4 (b) The representation vectors are s1 = 2 −1 −1 −1 s2 = −2 1 1 0 s3 = 1 −1 1 −1 s4 = 1 −2 −2 2 (c) The distance between the first and the second vector is: d1,2 = |s1 − s2 |2 = 2 4 −2 −2 −1 = √ 25 Similarly we find that : d1,3 = |s1 − s3 |2 = 1 0 −2 0 d1,4 = |s1 − s4 |2 = 1 1 1 −3 d2,3 = |s2 − s3 |2 = −3 2 0 1 d2,4 = |s2 − s4 |2 = d3,4 = |s3 − s4 |2 = 2 2 2 = = √ √ 5 12 14 √ 2 −3 3 3 −2 = 31 √ 2 0 1 3 −3 = 19 51 = √ Thus, the minimum distance between any pair of vectors is dmin = √ 5. Problem 4.12 : As a set of orthonormal functions we consider the waveforms f1 (t) = 1 0≤t<1 0 o.w f2 (t) = 1 1≤t<2 0 o.w f3 (t) = 1 2≤t<3 0 o.w The vector representation of the signals is s1 = 222 s2 = 200 s3 = 0 −2 −2 s4 = 220 Note that s3 (t) = s2 (t) − s1 (t) and that the dimensionality of the waveforms is 3. Problem 4.13 : 2πBt The power spectral density of X (t) corresponds to : φxx (t) = 2BN0 sinπBt . From the result of 2 Problem 2.14 : 2 φyy (τ ) = φ2 (0) + 2φ2 (τ ) = (2BN0 )2 + 8B 2 N0 xx xx Also : sin 2πBt 2πBt Φyy (f ) = φ2 (0)δ (f ) + 2Φxx (f ) ∗ Φxx (f ) xx The following figure shows the power spectral density of Y (t) : (2BN0 )2 δ (f ) ✻ 2N 2 B 0 ✑ ✑ ✑ ✑ ✑ ✑ ✑ ✑ −2B 0 f 2B 52 æ 2 Problem 4.14 : [an g (t − 2nT ) − jbn g (t − 2nT − T )] u(t) = n (a) Since the signaling rate is 1/2T for each sequence and since g (t) has duration 2T, for any time instant only g (t − 2nT ) and g (t − 2nT − T ) or g (t − 2nT + T ) will contribute to u(t). Hence, for 2nT ≤ t ≤ 2nT + T : |u(t)|2 = |an g (t − 2nT ) − jbn g (t − 2nT + T )|2 = a2 g 2 (t − 2nT ) + b2 g 2 (t − 2nT + T ) n n πt = g 2 (t − 2nT ) + g 2 (t − 2nT + T ) = sin 2 2T + sin 2 π(t+T ) 2T πt πt = sin 2 2T + cos 2 2T = 1, ∀t (b) The power density spectrum is : Φuu (f ) = 1 |G(f )|2 T ∞ πt where G(f ) = −∞ g (t) exp(−j 2πf t)dt = 02T sin 2T exp(−j 2πf t)dt. By using the trigonometric identity sin x = exp(jx)−exp(−jx) it is easily shown that : 2j G (f ) = 4T cos 2πT f −j 2πf T e π 1 − 16T 2 f 2 G (f ) = Hence : Φuu (f ) = = 2 4T π 1 T 4T π cos 2 2πT f (1−16T 2 f 2 )2 2 cos 2 2πT f (1−16T 2 f 2 )2 16T cos 2 2πT f π 2 (1−16T 2 f 2 )2 (c) The above power density spectrum is identical to that for the MSK signal. Therefore, the MSK signal can be generated as a staggered four phase PSK signal with a half-period sinusoidal pulse for g (t). 53 Problem 4.15: 1 We have that Φuu (f ) = T |G(f )|2 Φii (f ) But E(In ) = 0, E |In |2 1, m = 0 1 . Therefore : Φii (f ) = 1 ⇒ Φuu (f ) = T |G(f )|2 . 0, m = 0 = 1, hence : φii (m) = (a) For the rectangular pulse : G(f ) = AT sin 2 πf T sin πf T −j 2πf T /2 e ⇒ |G(f )|2 = A2 T 2 πf T (πf T )2 where the factor e−j 2πf T /2 is due to the T /2 shift of the rectangular pulse from the center t = 0. Hence : sin 2 πf T Φuu (f ) = A2 T (πf T )2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 Sv(f) 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 fT 1 2 3 4 5 (b) For the sinusoidal pulse : G(f ) = 0T sin πt exp(−j 2πf t)dt. By using the trigonometric T identity sin x = exp(jx)−exp(−jx) it is easily shown that : 2j G (f ) = 2AT 2AT cos πT f −j 2πf T /2 e ⇒ |G(f )|2 = π 1 − 4T 2 f 2 π Hence : 2A Φuu (f ) = π 2 54 cos 2 πT f T (1 − 4T 2 f 2 )2 2 cos 2 πT f (1 − 4T 2 f 2 )2 0.45 0.4 0.35 Sv(f) 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.1 0.05 0 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 fT 1 2 3 4 5 (c) The 3-db frequency for (a) is : 1 0.44 sin 2 πf3db T ⇒ f3db = 2= 2 T (πf3db T ) (where this solution is obtained graphically), while the 3-db frequency for the sinusoidal pulse on (b) is : 1 0.59 cos 2 πT f = ⇒ f3db = 2 f 2 )2 2 T (1 − 4T The rectangular pulse spectrum has the first spectral null at f = 1/T, whereas the spectrum of the sinusoidal pulse has the first null at f = 3/2T = 1.5/T. Clearly the spectrum for the rectangular pulse has a narrower main lobe. However, it has higher sidelobes. Problem 4.16 : u(t) = X cos 2πf t − Y sin 2πf t E [u(t)] = E (X ) cos 2πf t − E (Y ) sin 2πf t and : φuu (t, t + τ ) = E {[X cos 2πf t − Y sin 2πf t] [X cos 2πf (t + τ ) − Y sin 2πf (t + τ )]} = E (X 2 ) [cos 2πf (2t + τ ) + cos 2πf τ ] + E (Y 2 ) [− cos 2πf (2t + τ ) + cos 2πf τ ] −E (XY ) sin 2πf (2t + τ ) 55 For u(t) to be wide-sense stationary, we must have : E [u(t)] =constant and φuu (t, t+τ ) = φuu (τ ). We note that if E (X ) = E (Y ) = 0, and E (XY ) = 0 and E (X 2 ) = E (Y 2 ), then the above requirements for WSS hold; hence these conditions are necessary. Conversely, if any of the above conditions does not hold, then either E [u(t)] =constant, or φuu (t, t + τ ) = φuu (τ ). Hence, the conditions are also necessary. Problem 4.17 : The first basis function is : √ −1/ 3, 0 ≤ t ≤ 3 0, o.w. s4 (t) s4 (t) g4 (t) = √ = √ = E4 3 Then, for the second basis function : c43 2/3, 0 ≤ t ≤ 2 = s3 (t)g4 (t)dt = −1/ 3 ⇒ g3 (t) = s3 (t) − c43 g4 (t) = −4/3, 2 ≤ t ≤ 3 −∞ 0, o.w √ ∞ √ 1/ √ , 0 ≤ t ≤ 2 6 g3 (t) = −2/ 6, 2 ≤ t ≤ 3 g3 (t) = √ E3 0, o.w Hence : where E3 denotes the energy of g3 (t) : E3 = For the third basis function : c42 = ∞ −∞ 3 0 (g3 (t))2 dt = 8/3. s2 (t)g4 (t)dt = 0 and c32 = ∞ −∞ s2 (t)g3 (t)dt = 0 Hence : g2 (t) = s2 (t) − c42 g4 (t) − c32 g3 (t) = s2 (t) √ 1/ √ , 0 ≤ t ≤ 1 2 g2 (t) g2 (t) = √ = −1/ 2, 1 ≤ t ≤ 2 E2 0, o.w and where : E2 = 02 (s2 (t))2 dt = 2. Finally for the fourth basis function : c41 = ∞ −∞ √ s1 (t)g4 (t)dt = −2/ 3, c31 = ∞ −∞ √ s1 (t)g3 (t)dt = 2/ 6, c21 = 0 Hence : g1 (t) = s1 (t) − c41 g4 (t) − c31 g3 (t) − c21 g2 (t) = 0 ⇒ g1 (t) = 0 56 The last result is expected, since the dimensionality of the vector space generated by these signals is 3. Based on the basis functions (g2 (t), g3 (t), g4 (t)) the basis representation of the signals is : √ s4 = 0, 0, 3 ⇒ E4 = 3 √ s3 = 0, 8/3, −1/ 3 ⇒ E3 = 3 √ 2, 0, 0 ⇒ E 2 = 2 s2 = √ √ s1 = 2/ 6, −2/ 3, 0 ⇒ E1 = 2 Problem 4.18 : √ s1 = E, 0 √ s2 = − E , 0 √ s3 = 0, E √ s4 = 0, − E f ✻2 o s3 f1 o✲ s1 o s2 o s4 æ As we see, this signal set is indeed equivalent to a 4-phase PSK signal. Problem 4.19 : (a)(b) The signal space diagram, together with the Gray encoding of each signal point is given in the following figure : 57 01 00 11 10 The signal points that may be transmitted at times t = 2nT n = 0, 1, ... are given with blank circles, while the ones that may be transmitted at times t = 2nT + 1, n = 0, 1, ... are given with filled circles. Problem 4.20 : The autocorrelation function for u∆ (t) is : 1 E 2 [u∆ (t + τ )u∗ (t)] ∆ = 1 2 ∞ n=−∞ ∞ m=−∞ ∗ E (Im In ) E [u(t + τ − mT − ∆)u∗ (t − nT − ∆)] = 1 2 ∞ n=−∞ ∞ m=−∞ φii (m − n)E [u(t + τ − mT − ∆)u∗ (t − nT − ∆)] = 1 2 ∞ m=−∞ φii (m) ∞ n=−∞ = 1 2 ∞ m=−∞ φii (m) T1 ∞ n=−∞ 0 T u(t φu∆ u∆ (t) = E [u(t + τ − mT − nT − ∆)u∗ (t − nT − ∆)] + τ − mT − nT − ∆)u∗ (t − nT − ∆)d∆ Let a = ∆ + nT, da = d∆, and a ∈ (−∞, ∞). Then : (n+1)T 1 ∞ u (t n=−∞ nT T φu∆ u∆ (t) = 1 2 ∞ m=−∞ φii (m) = 1 2 ∞ m=−∞ 1 φii (m) T = 1 T ∞ m=−∞ φii (m)φuu (τ − mT ) ∞ −∞ + τ − mT − a)u∗ (t − a)da u(t + τ − mT − a)u∗ (t − a)da Thus we have obtained the same autocorrelation function as given by (4.4.11). Consequently the power spectral density of u∆ (t) is the same as the one given by (4.4.12) : Φu∆ u∆ (f ) = 1 |G(f )|2 Φii (f ) T 58 Problem 4.21 : (a) Bn = In + In−1 . Hence : In In−1 Bn 1 1 2 1 −1 0 −1 1 0 −1 −1 −2 The signal space representation is given in the following figure, with P (Bn = 2) = P (Bn = −2) = 1/4, P (Bn = 0) = 1/2. B o I o✲n 0 -2 2 æ (b) φBB (m) = E [Bn+m Bn ] = E [(In+m + In+m−1 ) (In + In−1 )] = φii (m) + φii (m − 1) + φii (m + 1) Since the sequence {In } consists of independent symbols : E [In+m ] E [In ] = 0 · 0 = 0, m = 0 2 m=0 E [In ] = 1, φii (m) = Hence : 2, m = 0 φBB (m) = 1, m = ±1 0, o.w and ∞ ΦBB (f ) = m=−∞ φBB (m) exp(−j 2πf mT ) = 2 + exp(j 2πf T ) + exp(−j 2πf T ) = 2 [1 + cos 2πf T ] = 4 cos 2 πf T A plot of the power spectral density ΦB (f ) is given in the following figure : Power spectral density of B 5 4.5 4 3.5 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 −0.5 −0.4 −0.3 −0.2 −0.1 0 0.1 0.2 Normalized frequency fT 59 0.3 0.4 0.5 (c) The transition matrix is : In−1 −1 −1 −1 −1 1 1 1 1 In Bn In+1 Bn+1 −1 −2 −1 −2 −1 −2 1 0 1 0 −1 0 1 0 1 2 −1 0 −1 −2 −1 0 1 0 1 2 −1 0 1 2 1 2 The corresponding Markov chain model is illustrated in the following figure : 1/2 1/2 1/2 ❅ ❘❄ ❅5✥ ✠ ✧✦ 1/4 s ❅ ❅ ✧✦ ❅ ❅ 1/2 5✥ ✲ 2 ❅ 1/2 ❅5✥ ✛ 0 -2 1/4 ✧✦ ✒ æ Problem 4.22 : (a) In = an −an−2 , with the sequence {an } being uncorrelated random variables (i.e E (an+m an ) = δ (m)). Hence : φii (m) = E [In+m In ] = E [(an+m − an+m−2 ) (an − an−2 )] = (m) − δ (m − 2) − δ (m + 2) 2δ 2, m=0 = −1, m = ±2 0, o.w. (b) Φuu (f ) = 1 T |G(f )|2 Φii (f ) where : ∞ Φii (f ) = m=−∞ φii (m) exp(−j 2πf mT ) = 2 − exp(j 4πf T ) − exp(−j 4πf T ) = 2 [1 − cos 4πf T ] = 4 sin 2 2πf T and |G(f )|2 = (AT )2 60 sin πf T πf T 2 Therefore : Φuu (f ) = 4A2 T sin πf T πf T 2 sin 2 2πf T (c) If {an } takes the values (0,1) with equal probability then E (an ) = 1/2 and E (an+m an ) = 1/4, m = 0 = [1 + δ (m)] /4. Then : 1/2, m = 0 φii (m) = E [In+m In ] = 2φaa (0) − φaa (2) − φaa (−2) = 1 [2δ (m) − δ (m − 2) − δ (m + 2)] 4 and Φii (f ) = Φuu (f ) = ∞ m=−∞ φii (m) exp(−j 2πf mT ) 2 A2 T sin πf T sin 2 2πf T πf T = sin 2 2πf T Thus, we obtain the same result as in (b) , but the magnitude of the various quantities is reduced by a factor of 4 . Problem 4.23 : ˆ x(t) = Re [u(t) exp (j 2πfc t)] where u(t) = s(t) ± j s(t). Hence : ˆ U (f ) = S (f ) ± j S (f ) So : U (f ) = ˆ where S (f ) = S (f ) ± S (f ), f > 0 S (f ) ∓ S (f ), f < 0 = −jS (f ), f > 0 jS (f ), f < 0 2S (f ) or 0, f > 0 0 or 2S (f ), f < 0 Since the lowpass equivalent of x(t) is single-sideband, we conclude that x(t) is a single-sideband signal, too. Suppose, for example, that s(t) has the following spectrum. Then, the spectra of the signals u(t) (shown in the figure for the case u(t) = s(t) + j s(t)) and x(t) are single-sideband ˆ 61 S(f) 1 ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙ -B 0 B U(f) 2 ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙  ❙ 0 B X(f) ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ −fc − B ✡ ✡ ❙ ❙ ❙ −fc fc ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ fc + B æ Problem 4.24 : We may use the result in (4.4.60), where we set K = 2, p1 = p2 = 1/2 : 1 Φ(f ) = 2 T ∞ l=−∞ 2 1 l Si T i=1 2 2 l δ f− T 1 + T 2 1 21 ∗ |Si (f )|2 − Re [S1 (f )S2 (f )] T4 i=1 4 To simplify the computations we may define the signals over the symmetric interval −T /2 ≤ t ≤ T /2. Then : sin π (f + fi )T T sin π (f − fi )T Si (f ) = − 2j π (f − fi )T π (f + fi )T 62 (the well-known rectangular pulse spectrum, modulated by sin 2πfi t) and : 2 T |Si (f )|2 = 2 sin π (f − fi )T π (f − fi )T 2 sin π (f + fi )T + π (f + fi )T 2 πf πf where the cross-term involving the product sin (f(−−ifiT)T · sin (f(++ifiT)T is negligible when fi >> 0. π f) π f) Also : l n sin π ( l + n )T l T sin π ( − )T S1 T = 2j π( l T n2TT − π( l T n2TT −) +) T 2T T sin(πl− πn ) 2 (πl− πn ) 2 − 2T sin(πl+ πn ) 2 (πl+ πn ) 2 = T 2j = T 2l(−1)l+1 2j = sin πn lT (−1)l+1 π(l2 −n22 /4) j sin πn /π (l2 − n2 /4) 2 l l and similarly for S2 ( T ) (with m instead of n). Note that if n(m) is even then S1(2) ( T ) = 0 for ( T all l except at l = ±n(m)/2, where S1(2) ( n2m) ) = ± 2j . For this case T 1 T2 ∞ 2 l=−∞ 1 l Si T i=1 2 2 δ f− l T = 1 n δ f− 16 2T +δ f + n 2T +δ f − m 2T +δ f − m 2T The third term in (4.4.60) involves the product of S1 (f ) and S2 (f ) which is negligible since they have little spectral overlap. Hence : Φ(f ) = 1 n δ f− 16 2T +δ f + n 2T +δ f − m 2T +δ f − m 2T + 1 |S1 (f )|2 + |S2 (f )|2 4T In comparison with the spectrum of the MSK signal, we note that this signal has impulses in the spectrum. Problem 4.25 : MFSK signal with waveforms : si (t) = sin 2πit , i = 1, 2, ..., M 0 ≤ t ≤ T T The expression for the power density spectrum is given by (4.4.60) with K = M and pi = 1/M. From Problem 4.23 we have that : Si ( f ) = sin π (f + fi )T T sin π (f − fi )T − 2j π (f − fi )T π (f + fi )T for a signal si (t) shifted to the left by T /2 (which does not affect the power spectrum). We also have that : n ±T /2j, n = ±i Si = 0, o.w. T 63 Hence from (4.4.60) we obtain : Φ(f ) = 1 T2 1 +T 2 −T = 2 1 T2 M i=1 [δ (f − M 4 2 2 M 1 i=1 |Si (f )| M 2 M M 1 Re i=1 j =i+1 M 2 1 2M 2 − T M2 M i=1 M i=1 fi ) + δ (f + fi )] ∗ Si ( f ) S j ( f ) [δ (f − fi ) + δ (f + fi )] + M ∗ j =i+1 Re Si (f )Sj (f ) 1 T M2 M i=1 |Si (f )|2 Problem 4.26 : QPRS signal v (t) = n (Bn + jCn ) u(t − nT ), Bn = In + In−1 , Cn = Jn + Jn−1 . (a) Similarly to Problem 4.20, the sequence Bn can take the values : P (Bn = 2) = P (Bn = −2) = 1/4, P (Bn = 0) = 1/2. The same holds for the sequence Cn ; since these two sequences are independent : P {Bn = i, Cn = j } = P {Bn = 1} P {Cn = j } Hence, since they are also in phase quadrature the signal space representation will be as shown in the following figure (next to each symbol is the corresponding probability of occurrence) : ✻Cn o 1/16 1/8 o o 1/16 o 1/8 o 1/4 1/8 o 1/8 o o o ✛ 1/16 Bn ✲ 1/16 ✲ 2 æ (b) If we name Zn = Bn + jCn : φZZ (m) = = 1 E [(Bn+m + jCn+m ) (Bn − jCn )] 2 1 {E [Bn+m Bn ] + E [Cn+m Cn ]} = 1 2 2 64 (φBB (m) + φCC (m)) = φBB (m) = φCC (m) since the sequences Bn , Cn are independent, and have the same statistics. Now, from Problem 4.20 : 2, m = 0 φBB (m) = 1, m = ±1 = φCC (m) = φZZ (m) 0, o.w Hence, from (4-4-11) : φvs (τ ) = 1 T ∞ m=−∞ φBB (m)φuu (τ − mT ) = φvc (τ ) = φv (τ ) Also : 1 |U (f )|2 ΦBB (f ) T since the corresponding autocorrelations are the same . From Problem 4.20 : ΦBB (f ) = 4 cos 2 πf T , so 4 Φvs (f ) = Φvc (f ) = Φv (f ) = |U (f )|2 cos 2 πf T T Therefore, the composite QPRS signal has the same power density spectrum as the in-phase and quadrature components. Φvs (f ) = Φvc (f ) = Φv (f ) = (c) The transition probabilities for the Bn , Cn sequences are independent, so the probability of a transition between one state of the QPRS signal to another state, will be the product of the probabilities of the respective B-transition and C-transition. Hence, the Markov chain model will be the Cartesian product of the Markov model that was derived in Problem 4.20 for the sequence Bn alone. For example, the transition probability from the state (Bn , Cn ) = (0, 0) to 1 the same state will be : P (Bn+1 = 0|Bn = 0) · P (Cn+1 = 0|Cn = 0) = 1 2 = 1 and so on. Below, 2 4 we give a partial sketch of the Markov chain model; the rest of it can be derived easily, from the symmetries of this model. 65 1/4 1/4 1/4 ✛✘ ❅❄ ❘ ❅✛✘ -2,2 0,2 ✲ ✛✘ 2,2 ✚✙ ✚✙ ✚✙ ❅ s ❅ 1/4 ✒ ❅❅ s ❅❅ ❅ ❅ ❅❅ 1/4 ❅ 1/8 ❅❅ ❅ ❅❅ ❅ ❅❅ ❅ ❅❅ 1/8 ❅ ❅❅ 1/16 ❘ ❅ ❘ ❅ ❅❅ ❅✛✘ ✠ ✛✘ ✛✘ ❅ ✛ -2,0 0,0 ✚✙ s ❅ ❅ ✚✙ 1/8 ✛✘ 1/4 ✛✘ -2,-2 0,-2 ✚✙ ✚✙ 2,0 ✚✙ ✛✘ 2,-2 ✚✙ æ Problem 4.27 : The MSK and offset QPSK signals have the following form : [an u(t − 2nT ) − jbn u(t − 2nT − T )] v (t) = n where for the QPSK : 1, 0 ≤ t ≤ 2T 0, o.w. u(t) = and for MSK : u(t) = πt sin 2T , 0 ≤ t ≤ 2T 0, o.w. The derivation is identical to that given in Sec. 4.4.1 with 2T substituted for T. Hence, the result is: φvv (τ ) = 21 ∞=−∞ φii (m)φuu (τ − m2T ) m T ∞ m=−∞ = 1 2T = 2 σa φ (τ ) T uu 2 2 (σa + σb ) δ (m)φuu (τ − m2T ) 66 and : Φvv (f ) = 2 σa | U (f )| 2 T For the rectangular pulse of QPSK, we have : φuu (τ ) = 2T 1 − |τ | , 2T 0 ≤ | τ | ≤ 2T For the MSK pulse : t ∞ πt φuu (τ ) = −∞ u(t + τ )u∗ (t)dt = 02T −τ sin 2T sin π(2+τ ) dt T | τ τ τ = T 1 − 2τ | cos π|T | + π sin π|T | T 2 2 Problem 4.28 : (a) For simplicity we assume binary CPM. Since it is partial response : q (T ) = 0T u(t)dt = 1/4 q (2T ) = 02T u(t)dt = 1/2, q (t) = 1/2, t > 2T so only the last two symbols will have an effect on the phase : φ(t; I) = 2πh n=−∞ Ik q (t − kT ), nT ≤ t ≤ nT + T k −2 = π n=−∞ Ik + π (In−1 q (t − (n − 1)T ) + In q (t − nT )) , k 2 It is easy to see that, after the first symbol, the phase slope is : 0 if In, In−1 have different signs, and sgn(In )π/(2T ) if In, In−1 have the same sign. At the terminal point t = (n + 1)T the phase is : π π n−1 Ik + In φ((n + 1)T ; I) = 2 k=−∞ 4 Hence the phase tree is as shown in the following figure : 67 t=0 t=T t=2T t=3T t=4T +1 7π/4 o +1 -1 -1 o +1 o ❅ +1 -1 ❅ 3π/4 +1 +1 ❅ o -1 o o +1 ❅ -1 -1 ❅ π/4 +1 +1 ❅ +1 ❅ o o o o ✦ +1 ✦✦ -1 ❅-1 -1 -1❅ ✦ ✦ ❅ ❅ ❅ 0 ❛❛ ❛❛ +1 ❅ +1 +1 +1 -1 ❛o ❅ o o o −π/4 ❅ ❅ -1 -1 -1 ❅ ❅ ❅ +1 ❅ +1 -1 ❅ o o o −3π/4 ❅ ❅ +1 -1 -1 ❅ ❅ ❅ -1 ❅ +1 o −5π/4 ❅ +1 o -1 ❅ ❅ -1 ❅ +1 o −7π/4 ❅ ❅ -1❅ 5π/4 æ (b) The state trellis is obtained from the phase-tree modulo 2π : t=0 φ3 = 7π/4 t=T o t=2T +1 o t=3T -1 o t=4T +1 o -1 ✄❅ ❇ ✂❅ ❇ +1 ✂ +1❇ ✄ ❅ ❇ ✂ -1 ❅ ✄ ❅ ❇ ❅ ❇ ✂ ✄ ❇ ❇ -1 ❅ ✂ +1 ❅ ✄ ❅ ❇ ❅ +1❇ ✂ ✂ o ❇ ✂ o o❇✂ φ2 = 5π/4 ✄ ❅ ❅ ✄ -1 ❅ ❇ ✂ -1 ❅ ❇ ✂ ✄ ❅ ❇✂ ❅ ❇✂ ✄ ❅ ❇ ✂ ❅ ✂❇ ❅ +1 ❇ ❅ ✄ +1 ✂ ❇ ✂ -1 +1 o o o✂❇ ✂ ❇❅ φ1 = 3π/4 ✄ ✄ ❅ ❇ ❇ ✂ -1 ✂ -1 ❅ ✄ ❇ +1 ✂ ✂ ✄ ❅ ❇ +1 ✂ ✂ ✄ -1 ✂ ❇ ❅ ✂ -1 ✄ ❅✂ ❇ ❅ ❇ o o✂ o o φ0 = π/4 ✄ ✑ ✑ ✑ ✄ -1 +1 -1 +1 ✄ ✑✑ 0 +1 ✄ ✑ 68 æ (c) The state diagram is shown in the following figure (with the (In, In−1 ) or (In−1, In ) that cause the respective transitions shown in parentheses) (-1,1) (-1,-1) .. ... ❅ .. (-1,1) .. ✏ €€ ... ✏✏ €€ ❘ ❅ ✏✏✏ ❅ ✏ € ✏ q € ✠ ❅ φ = 3π/4 φ2 = 5π/4 ✒✑ ✒✑ 1 ✏ ✐ € € ✏✏ ✂ ❇ ❇ €€€ (1,1) ✍ ✂ ✍ ✏ ✂ ✂ ✏✏ € ❇ ❇ ✂ ✂ ❇ ❇ ✂ ✂ ❇ ❇ ✂ ✂ ❇ (-1,-1) ❇❇ ❇ ✂ ✂ (1,1) (1,1) (-1,-1) ❇ ❇ ❇ ❇ φ3 = 7π/4 ✂ ✂ ❇ ❇ ❇ ✂ ✂ (1,1) ✂ ✂ ✏ €€ ✂ ❇ ✂ ✏✏ €€ ❇ ✏ ❇❇ € ❇✏ ✌ ✂✂ ✌ ✂✂ ✏✏ q € ✏ ✐ €€ ✏✒✑ € ❅ ✒ ✒✑ € ✏✏ (-1,-1) s ... ❅❅ €€ ✏✏ . ..... ✏ ❅.. . φ0 = π/4 (-1,,1) (-1,1) æ Problem 4.29 : φ(t; I) = 2πh n Ik q (t − kT ) k =−∞ (a) Full response binary CPFSK (q (T ) = 1/2): 1 π (i) h = 2/3. At the end of each bit interval the phase is : 2π 2 2 n=−∞ Ik = 23 n=−∞ Ik . Hence k k 3 the possible terminal phase states are {0, 2π/3, 4π/3} . 1 π (ii) h = 3/4. At the end of each bit interval the phase is : 2π 3 2 n=−∞ Ik = 34 n=−∞ Ik . Hence k k 4 the possible terminal phase states are {0, π/4, π/2, 3π/4, π, 5π/4, 3π/2, 7π/4} (b) Partial response L = 3, binary CPFSK : q (T ) = 1/6, q (2T ) = 1/3, q (3T ) = 1/2. Hence, at the end of each bit interval the phase is : n−2 πh k =−∞ n−2 Ik + 2πh (In−1 /3 + In /6) = πh k =−∞ Ik + πh (2In−1 + In ) 3 The symbol levels in the parenthesis can take the values {−3, −1, 1, 3} . So : (i) h = 2/3. The possible terminal phase states are : {0, 2π/9, 4π/9, 2π/3, 8π/9, 10π/9, 4π/3, 14π/9, 16π/9} 69 (ii) h = 3/4. The possible terminal phase states are : {0, π/4, π/2, 3π/4, π, 5π/4, 3π/2, 7π/4} Problem 4.30 : The 16-QAM signal is represented as s(t) = In cos 2πf t+Qn sin 2πf t, where In = {±1, ±3} , Qn = {±1, ±3} . A superposition of two 4-QAM (4-PSK) signals is : s(t) = G [An cos 2πf t + Bn sin 2πf t] + Cn cos 2πf t + Cn sin 2πf t where An , Bn, Cn , Dn = {±1} . Clearly : In = GAn + Cn , Qn = GBn + Dn . From these equations it is easy to see that G = 2 gives the requires equivalence. Problem 4.31 : We are given by Equation (4.3-77) that the pulses ck (t) are defined as L−1 ck (t) = s0 (t) n=1 s0 [t + (n + Lak,n )], 0 ≤ t ≤ T · min[L(2 − ak,n − n] n Hence, the time support of the pulse ck (t) is 0 ≤ t ≤ T · min[L(2 − ak,n ) − n] n We need to find the index n which minimizes S = L(2 − ak,n ) − n, or equivalently maximizes ˆ S1 = Lak,n + n : n = arg max[Lak,n + n], n = 1, ..., L − 1, ak,n = 0, 1 ˆ n It is easy to show that n=L−1 ˆ (1) if all ak,n , n = 0, 1, ..., L − 1 are zero (for a specific k ), and n = max {n : ak,n = 1} ˆ (2) otherwise. The first case (1) is shown immediately, since if all ak,n , n = 0, 1, ..., L − 1 are zero, then maxn S1 = maxn n, n = 0, 1, ..., L − 1. For the second case (2), assume that there are n1 , n2 such that : n1 < n2 and ak,n1 = 1, ak,n2 = 0. Then S1 (n1 ) = L + n1 > n2 (= S1 (n2 )), since n2 − n1 < L − 1 due to the allowable range of n. ˆ So, finding the binary representation of k, k = 0, 1, ..., 2L−1 − 1, we find n and the corresponding S (n) which gives the extent of the time support of ck (t): ⇒ n=L−1 ⇒ S =L+1 ˆ k=0 ⇒ ak,L−1 = 0, ..., ak,2 = 0, ak,1 = 0 ⇒ n=1 ˆ ⇒ S =L−1 k=1 ⇒ ak,L−1 = 0, ..., ak,2 = 0, ak,1 = 1 k = 2/3 ⇒ ak,L−1 = 0, ..., ak,2 = 1, ak,1 = 0/1 ⇒ n = 2 ˆ ⇒ S =L−2 70 and so on, using the binary representation of the integers between 1 and 2L−1 − 1. Problem 4.32 : sk (t) = Ik s(t) ⇒ Sk (f ) = Ik S (f ), K k =1 2 2 σi = E (Ik ) − µ2 i E (Ik ) = µi , 2 2 K 2 p k Sk ( f ) = | S ( f ) | k =1 pk Ik = µ2 |S (f )|2 i Therefore, the discrete frequency component becomes : µ2 i T2 ∞ n=−∞ 2 n T S δ f− n T The continuous frequency component is : 1 T K k =1 pk (1 − pk ) |Sk (f )|2 − 2 T i<j ∗ pi pj Re Si (f )Sj (f ) = 1 T |S (f )|2 K k =1 pk |Ik |2 − K k =1 p2 |Ik |2 − k = 1 T |S (f )|2 K k =1 pk |Ik |2 − K k =1 p2 |Ik |2 − k = 1 T |S (f )|2 = 2 σi T K k =1 pk |Ik |2 − 2 T i<j i<j pi pj |S (f )|2 p i p j | S (f )| 2 ∗ ∗ I i I j +I i I j 2 ∗ Ii Ij + Ii∗ Ij 2 K k =1 pk Ik |S (f )|2 Thus, we have obtained the result in (4.4.18) Problem 4.33 : The line spectrum in (4.4.60) consists of the term : 1 T2 ∞ K n=−∞ k =1 p k Sk n T 2 δ f− n T Now, if K pk sk (t) = 0, then K pk Sk (f ) = 0, ∀f. Therefore, the condition K pk sk (t) = 0 k =1 k =1 k =1 is sufficient for eliminating the line spectrum. Now, suppose that K pk sk (t) = 0 for some t ∈ [t0 , t1 ]. For example, if sk (t) = Ik s(t), then k =1 K pk sk (t) = s(t) K pk Ik , where K pk Ik ≡ µi = 0 and s(t) is a signal pulse. Then, the k =1 k =1 k =1 71 line spectrum vanishes if S (n/T ) = 0 for all n. A signal pulse that satisfies this condition is shown below : s(t) ✻ 1 T ✲ -T t æ In this case, S (f ) = T sin πT f sin πT f, so that S (n/T ) = 0 for all n. Therefore, the condition πT f K pk sk (t) = 0 is not necessary. k =1 Problem 4.34 : 2 (a) Since : µa = 0, σa = 1, we have : Φss (f ) = 1 T |G(f )|2 . But : = T sin πf T /2 −j 2πf T /4 e 2 πf T /2 = G (f ) T sin πf T /2 −jπf T e (2j 2 πf T /2 − T sin πf T /2 −j 2πf 3T /4 e 2 πf T /2 sin πf T /2) 2 = jT sin πf/T /2 e−jπf T ⇒ πf T 2 |G(f )|2 = T 2 Φss (f ) =T sin 2 πf T /2 2 πf T /2 ⇒ sin 2 πf T /2 2 πf T /2 (b) For non-independent information sequence the power spectrum of s(t) is given by : Φss (f ) = 72 1 T |G(f )|2 Φbb (f ). But : φbb (m) = E [bn+m bn ] = E [an+m an ] + kE [an+m−1 an ] + kE [an+m an−1 ] + k 2 E [an+m−1 an−1 ] 1 + k2 , m=0 k, m = ±1 = 0, o.w. Hence : ∞ Φbb (f ) = We want : m=−∞ φbb (m)e−j 2πf mT = 1 + k 2 + 2k cos 2πf T Φss (1/T ) = 0 ⇒ Φbb (1/T ) = 0 ⇒ 1 + k 2 + 2k = 0 ⇒ k = −1 and the resulting power spectrum is : Φss (f ) = 4T sin 2 πf T /2 πf T /2 2 sin 2 πf T (c) The requirement for zeros at f = l/4T, l = ±1, ±2, ... means : Φbb (l/4T ) = 0 ⇒ 1 + k 2 + 2k cos πl/2 = 0, which cannot be satisfied for all l. We can avoid that by using precoding in the form :bn = an + kan−4 . Then : 1 + k2 , m=0 k, m = ±4 ⇒ Φbb (f ) = 1 + k 2 + 2k cos 2πf 4T φbb (m) = 0, o.w. and , similarly to (b), a value of k = −1, will zero this spectrum in all multiples of 1/4T. Problem 4.35 : P= 0 1/2 0 1/ 2 0 0 1/ 2 1 / 2 , 1/2 1/2 0 0 1/2 0 1/ 2 0 ρ= By straightforward matrix multiplication we verify that indeed : 1 P4 ρ = − ρ 4 73 1 0 0 −1 0 1 −1 0 0 −1 1 0 −1 0 0 1 Problem 4.36 : (a) The power spectral density of the FSK signal may be evaluated by using equation (4-4-60) with K = 2 (binary) signals and probabilities p0 = p1 = 1 . Thus, when the condition that the 2 carrier phase θ0 and and θ1 are fixed, we obtain Φ(f ) = 1 4T 2 ∞ 1 n n n | S0 (f ) − S1 (f )| 2 | S0 ( ) + S1 ( ) | 2 δ ( f − ) + T T T 4T n=−∞ where S0 (f ) and S1 (f ) are the fourier transforms of s0 (t) and s1 (t). In particular : S0 ( f ) = T 0 s0 (t)e−j 2πf t dt = 2E b T = T Eb sin πT (f − f0 ) sin πT (f + f0 ) −jπf T jθ0 + e e 2 π (f − f0 ) π (f + f0 ) T 0 cos(2πf0 t + θ0 )ej 2πf t dt, f0 = fc − ∆f 2 Similarly : S1 ( f ) = = where f1 = fc + ∆f . 2 Φ(f ) = T 0 s1 (t)e−j 2πf t dt T Eb sin πT (f − f1 ) sin πT (f + f1 ) −jπf T jθ1 + e e 2 π (f − f1 ) π (f + f1 ) By expressing Φ(f ) as : ∞ n n n ∗n n 1 |S0 ( )|2 + |S1 ( )|2 + 2Re[S0 ( )S1 ( )] δ (f − ) 4T 2 n=−∞ T T T T T 1 ∗ + |S0 (f )|2 + |S1 (f )|2 − 2Re[S0 (f )S1 (f )] 4T ∗ we note that the carrier phases θ0 and θ1 affect only the terms Re(S0 S1 ). If we average over the random phases, these terms drop out. Hence, we have : Φ(f ) = where : ∞ n n n 1 | S0 ( ) | 2 + | S1 ( ) | 2 δ ( f − ) 2 4T n=− T T T 1 | S0 ( f ) | 2 + | S1 ( f ) | 2 + 4T 2 T Eb sin πT (f − fk ) sin πT (f + fk ) | Sk ( f ) | = + , 2 π (f − fk ) π (f + fk ) 2 74 k = 0, 1 Note that the first term in Φ(f ) consists of a sequence of samples and the second term constitutes the continuous spectrum. (b) Note that : T Eb sin πT (f − fk ) | Sk ( f ) | 2 = 2 π (f − fk ) because the product 2 sin πT (f + fk ) + π (f + fk ) 2 sin πT (f − fk ) sin πT (f + fk ) × ≈0 π (f − fk ) π (f + fk ) if fk is large enough. Hence |Sk (f )|2 decays proportionally to Consequently, Φ(f ) exhibits the same behaviour. 75 1 (f −fk )2 approx f12 for f fc . CHAPTER 5 Problem 5.1 : (a) Taking the inverse Fourier transform of H (f ), we obtain : 1 e−j 2πf T − F −1 j 2πf j 2πf t− T 2 = sgn(t) − sgn(t − T ) = 2Π T h(t) = F −1 [H (f )] = F −1 where sgn(x) is the signum signal (1 if x > 0, -1 if x < 0, and 0 if x = 0) and Π(x) is a rectangular pulse of unit height and width, centered at x = 0. (b) The signal waveform, to which h(t) is matched, is : T −t− T s(t) = h(T − t) = 2Π t− T 2 T where we have used the symmetry of Π T 2 = 2Π T 2 −t T = h(t) with respect to the t = T 2 axis. Problem 5.2 : (a) The impulse response of the matched filter is : h(t) = s(T − t) = A (T T 0 − t) cos(2πfc (T − t)) 0 ≤ t ≤ T otherwise (b) The output of the matched filter at t = T is : g (T ) = = v =T −τ = = = h(t) s(t)|t=T = T 0 h(T − τ )s(τ )dτ A2 T (T − τ )2 cos2 (2πfc (T − τ ))dτ 20 T A2 T 2 v cos2 (2πfc v )dv T2 0 A2 v 3 1 v cos(4πfc v ) T v2 + − sin(4πfc v ) + T2 6 4 × 2πfc 8 × (2πfc )3 4(2πfc )2 0 2 3 2 T AT 1 T cos(4πfc T ) + − sin(4πfc T ) + 2 3 T 6 4 × 2πfc 8 × (2πfc ) 4(2πfc )2 76 (c) The output of the correlator at t = T is : T q (T ) = s2 (τ )dτ 0 A2 = T2 T 0 τ 2 cos2 (2πfc τ )dτ However, this is the same expression with the case of the output of the matched filter sampled at t = T . Thus, the correlator can substitute the matched filter in a demodulation system and vice versa. Problem 5.3 : (a) In binary DPSK, the information bit 1 is transmitted by shifting the phase of the carrier by π radians relative to the phase in the previous interval, while if the information bit is 0 then the phase is not shifted. With this in mind : Data : 110100010110 Phase θ : (π ) 0 π π 0 0 0 0 π π 0 π π Note : since the phase in the first bit interval is 0, we conclude that the phase before that was π. (b) We know that the power spectrum of the equivalent lowpass signal u(t) is : Φuu (f ) = 1 |G(f )|2 Φii (f ) T where G(f ) = AT sin πf T , is the spectrum of the rectangular pulse of amplitude A that is used, πf T and Φii (f ) is the power spectral density of the information sequence. It is straightforward to see that the information sequence In is simply the phase of the lowpass signal, i.e. it is ejπ or ej 0 depending on the bit to be transmitted an (= 0, 1). We have : In = ejθn = ejπan ejθn−1 = ejπ k ak The statistics of In are (remember that {an } are uncorrelated) : E [In ] E |In | = E ejπ 2 jπ = Ee ∗ E [In+m In ] = E ejπ k ak = a −jπ kk e n+m k=0 k a kk ak −jπ e E [ejπak ] = k 1 jπ e 2 − 1 ej 0 = 2 k 0=0 =1 n k=0 ak = E ejπ m a k=n+1 k = m k =n+1 E [ejπak ] = 0 Hence, In is an uncorrelated sequence with zero mean and unit variance, so Φii (f ) = 1, and Φuu (f ) = Φss (f ) = 1 |G(f )|2 = A2 T sin πf T T πf T 1 [Φuu (f − fc ) + Φuu (−f 2 77 − fc )] A sketch of the signal power spectrum Φss (f ) is given in the following figure : Power spectral density of s(t) −fc 0 f fc Problem 5.4 : (a) The correlation type demodulator employes a filter : f (t) = 1 √ T 0≤t≤T o.w 0 as given in Example 5-1-1. Hence, the sampled outputs of the crosscorrelators are : r = sm + n, m = 0, 1 √ where s0 = 0, s1 = A T and the noise term n is a zero-mean Gaussian random variable with variance : 2 N0 σn 2 The probability density function for the sampled output is : 2 1 −r e N0 πN0 √ ( r −A T ) 2 1 − N0 p (r | s 1 ) = √ e πN0 p (r | s 0 ) = √ Since the signals are equally probable, the optimal detector decides in favor of s0 if PM(r, s0 ) = p(r |s0) > p(r |s1) = PM(r, s1 ) 78 otherwise it decides in favor of s1 . The decision rule may be expressed as: √ √ √ ( r −A T ) 2 −r 2 (2r −A T )A PM(r, s0 ) − N0 N0 =e =e PM(r, s1 ) T s0 > < s1 1 or equivalently : s1 1√ r> AT <2 s0 √ The optimum threshold is 1 A T . 2 (b) The average probability of error is: 1 1 P (e|s0 ) + P (e|s1) 2 2 √ 1 1 2A T 1∞ p(r |s1)dr = √ p(r |s0 )dr + 2 1A T 2 −∞ 2 √ √ 1 ( r −A T ) 2 r2 1 1 2A T 1 1∞ −N − N0 √ e 0 dr + e dr = √√ 2 1 A T πN0 2 −∞ πN0 2 P (e) = 1 = 2 =Q ∞ 1 2 1 2 2 A N0 √ T x2 1 1 √ e− 2 dx + 2 2π −1 2 −∞ 2 A N0 √ T x2 1 √ e− 2 dx 2π √ 2√ A T = Q SNR N0 where SNR = 12 AT 2 N0 Thus, the on-off signaling requires a factor of two more energy to achieve the same probability of error as the antipodal signaling. Problem 5.5 : Since {fn (t)} constitute an orthonormal basis for the signal space : r (t) = 79 N n=1 rn fn (t), sm (t) = N n=1 smn fn (t). Hence, for any m : C (r, sm ) = 2 T 0 =2 r (t)sm (t)dt − T 0 N n=1 rn fn (t) =2 N n=1 rn N l=1 =2 N n=1 rn smn s2 (t)dt m T 0 N l=1 sml sml fl (t)dt − fn (t)fl (t)dt − T 0 T 0 N n=1 N n=1 smn fn (t) N l=1 smn sml N l=1 T 0 sml fl (t)dt fn (t)fl (t)dt N 2 n=1 smn − where we have exploited the orthonormality of {fn (t)} : 0T fn (t)fl (t)dt = δnl . The last form is indeed the original form of the correlation metrics C (r, sm ). Problem 5.6 : The SNR at the filter output will be : SNR = |y (T )|2 E |n(T )|2 where y (t) is the part of the filter output that is due to the signal sl (t), and n(t) is the part due to the noise z (t). The denominator is : E |n(T )|2 = 0T 0T E [z (a)z ∗ (b)] hl (T − a)h∗ (T − b)dadb l = 2N0 0T |hl (T − t)|2 dt so we want to maximize : T 0 SNR = sl (t)hl (T − t)dt 2 T 0 |hl (T − t)|2 dt T 2N0 |hl (T − t)|2 dt From Schwartz inequality : T 0 2 sl (t)hl (T − t)dt ≤ Hence : SNR ≤ 1 2N0 T 0 0 |sl (t)|2 dt = T 0 |sl (t)|2 dt E = SNRmax N0 and the maximum occurs when : sl (t) = h∗ (T − t) ⇔ hl (t) = s∗ (T − t) l l 80 Problem 5.7 : T Nmr = Re (a) Define am = T 0 0 ∗ z (t)fm (t)dt ∗ z (t)fm (t)dt. Then, Nmr = Re(am ) = 1 [am + a∗ ] . m 2 E (Nmr ) = Re T 0 ∗ E (z (t)) fm (t)dt = 0 since, E [z (t)] = 0. Also : E But E (a2 ) = E m T 0 T 0 2 Nmr a2 + (a∗ )2 + 2am a∗ m m =E m 4 ∗ ∗ z (a)z (b)fm (a)fm (b)dadb = 0, since E [z (a)z (b)] = 0 (Problem 4.3), and the same is true for E (a∗ )2 = 0, since E [z ∗ (a)z ∗ (b)] = 0 Hence : m 2 E (Nmr ) = E = N0 am a∗ m = 1 0T 0T 2 2 T |fm (a)|2 da = 0 (b) For m = k : E [Nmr Nkr ] = E =E ∗ E [z (a)z ∗ (b)] fm (a)fm (b)dadb 2E N0 am +a∗ ak +a∗ m k 2 2 ∗ a +a a∗ +a∗ a∗ am ak +am k m k m k 4 But, similarly to part (a), E [am ak ] = E [a∗ a∗ ] = 0, hence, E [Nmr Nkr ] = E mk ∗ E [am a∗ ] = 0T 0T E [z (a)z ∗ (b)] fm (a)fk (b)dadb k ∗ = 2N0 0T fm (a)fk (a)da = 0 since, for m = k, the waveforms are orthogonal. Similarly : E [a∗ ak ] = 0, hence : E [Nmr Nkr ] = 0. m Problem 5.8 : (a) Since the given waveforms are the equivalent lowpass signals : E1 = E2 = 1T 20 1T 20 |s1 (t)|2 dt = 1 A2 2 |s2 (t)|2 dt = 1 A2 2 81 T 0 T 0 dt = A2 T /2 dt = A2 T /2 a∗ ak +am a∗ m k 4 . Now : Hence E1 = E2 = E . Also :ρ12 = 1 2E T 0 s1 (t)s∗ (t)dt = 0. 2 (b) Each matched filter has an equivalent lowpass impulse response : hi (t) = si (T − t) . The following figure shows hi (t) : h (t) ✻1 h (t) ✻2 A A ✲ ✲ t T t T -A æ (c) h1 (t) ∗ s2 (t) ✻ A2 T A2 T /2 0 −A2 T /2 ❡ ❡ ❡ ✪ ✪ ❡ ❡✪ ✪❡ ✪❡ ✪ ❡ ✪ ❡✲ ❡ ✪ T 2T ✪ t 0 ✻ h2 (t) ∗ s2 (t) ✪❡ ✪❡ ✪ ❡ ✪ ❡ ✪ ❡ ✪ ❡ ✪ ❡ ✪ ❡ ✪ ❡✲ T t 2T æ 82 (d) ✻ A2 T /2 0 T 0 s1 (τ )s2 (τ )dτ T A2 T ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✲ T t 0 ✻0 s1 (τ )s2 (τ )dτ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ T ✲ t æ (e) The outputs of the matched filters are different from the outputs of the correlators. The two sets of outputs agree at the sampling time t = T. (f) Since the signals are orthogonal (ρ12 = 0) the error probability for AWGN is P2 = Q where E = A2 T /2. E N0 , Problem 5.9 : (a) The joint pdf of a, b is : pab (a, b) = pxy (a − mr , b − mi ) = px (a − mr )py (b − mi ) = √ 1 − 12 [(a−mr )2 +(b−mi )2 ] e 2σ 2πσ 2 φ = tan −1 b/a ⇒ a = u cos φ, b = u sin φ The Jacobian of the transforma∂ a/∂u ∂a/∂φ tion is : J (a, b) = = u, hence : ∂b/∂u ∂b/∂φ (b) u = a2 + b2 , u − 12 [(u cos φ−mr )2 +(u sin φ−mi )2 ] e 2σ 2πσ 2 u − 12 [u2 +M 2 −2uM cos(φ−θ)] = e 2σ 2πσ 2 puφ (u, φ) = where we have used the transformation : M = m2 + m2 i r θ = tan −1 mi /mr ⇒ 83 mr = M cos θ mi = M sin θ (c) p u (u ) = 2π 0 puφ (u, φ)dφ u − u2 +M 2 2π − 12 [−2uM cos(φ−θ)] e 2σ2 e 2σ dφ 2πσ 2 0 u − u2 +M 2 1 2π uM cos(φ−θ)/σ2 = e 2σ2 e dφ σ2 2π 0 u − u2 + M 2 e 2σ2 Io uM/σ 2 = 2 σ = Problem 5.10 : s(t) + z (t) T ∗ −s(t) + z (t) (a) U = Re 0 r (t)s (t)dt , where r (t) = z (t) sent. If we assume that s(t) was sent : U = Re T 0 s(t)s∗ (t)dt + Re T 0 depending on which signal was z (t)s∗ (t)dt = 2E + N where E = 1 0T s(t)s∗ (t)dt, and N = Re 0T z (t)s∗ (t)dt is a Gaussian random variable with 2 zero mean and variance 2EN0 (as we have seen in Problem 5.7). Hence, given that s(t) was sent, the probability of error is : 2E − A Pe1 = P (2E + N < A) = P (N < −(2E − A)) = Q √ 2N0 E When −s(t) is transmitted : U = −2E + N, and the corresponding conditional error probability is : 2E − A Pe2 = P (−2E + N > −A) = P (N > (2E − A)) = Q √ 2N0 E and finally, when 0 is transmitted : U = N, and the corresponding error probability is : Pe3 = P (N > A or N < −A) = 2P (N > A) = 2Q √ (b) Pe = 2E − A 1 2 (P e 1 + P e 2 + P e 3 ) = Q√ 3 3 2N0 E 84 +Q √ A 2N0 E A 2N0 E (c) In order to minimize Pe : where we differentiate Q(x) = d dx ∞ f (x) ∞ x dPe =0⇒A=E dA √1 exp(−t2 /2)dt with respect to x, using the Leibnitz rule : 2π df g (a)da = − dx g (f (x)). Using this threshold : E 4 Pe = Q √ 3 2N0 E E 2N0 4 =Q 3 Problem 5.11 : (a) The transmitted energy is : E1 = E2 = 1T 20 1T 20 |s1 (t)|2 dt = A2 T /2 |s2 (t)|2 dt = A2 T /2 (b) The correlation coefficient for the two signals is : ρ= T 1 2E 0 s1 (t)s∗ (t)dt = 1/2 2 Hence, the bit error probability for coherent detection is : P2 = Q E (1 − ρ) = Q N0 E 2N0 (c) The bit error probability for non-coherent detection is given by (5-4-53) : 2 2 1 P2,nc = Q1 (a, b) − e−(a +b )/2 I0 (ab) 2 where Q1 (.) is the generalized Marcum Q function (given in (2-1-123)) and : a= E 2N0 1− 1 − |ρ|2 = E 2N0 1− b= E 2N0 1+ 1 − |ρ|2 = E 2N0 1+ 85 √ 3 2 √ 3 2 Problem 5.12 : The correlation of the two signals in binary FSK is: ρ= sin(2π ∆f T ) 2π ∆f T To find the minimum value of the correlation, we set the derivative of ρ with respect to ∆f equal to zero. Thus: ϑρ cos(2π ∆f T )2πT sin(2π ∆f T ) 2πT =0= − ϑ∆f 2π ∆f T (2π ∆f T )2 and therefore : 2π ∆f T = tan(2π ∆f T ) Solving numerically (or graphically) the equation x = tan(x), we obtain x = 4.4934. Thus, 2π ∆f T = 4.4934 =⇒ ∆f = 0.7151 T and the value of ρ is −0.2172. We know that the probability of error can be expressed in terms of the distance d12 between the signal points, as : 2 d12 Pe = Q 2N0 where the distance between the two signal points is : d2 = 2Eb (1 − ρ) 12 and therefore : 2Eb (1 − ρ) Pe = Q =Q 2N0 1.2172Eb N0 Problem 5.13 : (a) It is straightforward to see that : Set I : Four − level PAM Set II : Orthogonal Set III : Biorthogonal 86 (b) The transmitted waveforms in the first set have energy : 1 A2 or 1 9A2 . Hence for the first 2 2 set the average energy is : 1 12 1 2 A + 2 9A2 = 2.5A2 E1 = 42 2 All the waveforms in the second and third sets have the same energy : 1 A2 .Hence : 2 E2 = E3 = A2 /2 (c) The average probability of a symbol error for M-PAM is (5-2-45) : P4,P AM 6Eav 2 − 1)N (M 0 2(M − 1) Q = M A2 3 = Q 2 N0 (d) For coherent detection, a union bound can be given by (5-2-25) : P4,orth < (M − 1) Q Es /N0 A2 = 3Q 2N0 while for non-coherent detection : 1 3 2 P4,orth,nc ≤ (M − 1) P2,nc = 3 e−Es /2N0 = e−A /4N0 2 2 ?? (e) It is not possible to use non-coherent detection for a biorthogonal signal set : e.g. without phase knowledge, we cannot distinguish between the signals u1 (t) and u3 (t) (or u2 (t)/u4 (t)). (f) The bit rate to bandwidth ratio for M-PAM is given by (5-2-85) : R W 1 = 2 log 2 M = 2 log 2 4 = 4 For orthogonal signals we can use the expression given by (5-2-86) or notice that we use a symbol interval 4 times larger than the one used in set I, resulting in a bit rate 4 times smaller : R W 2 = 2 log 2 M =1 M Finally, the biorthogonal set has double the bandwidth efficiency of the orthogonal set : R W 3 =2 Hence, set I is the most bandwidth efficient (at the expense of larger average power), but set III will also be satisfactory. 87 Problem 5.14 : The following graph shows the decision regions for the four signals : U2 A = U 1 > +| U 2 | ✻ B ❅ C ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅ ✲ ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅A D ❅ ❅ W2 ✻ B = U 1 < −|U 2| C = U 2 > +| U 1 | C A D = U 2 < −|U 1| U1 ✲W1 B D æ As we see, using the transformation W1 = U1 + U2 , W2 = U1 − U2 alters the decision regions to : (W1 > 0, W2 > 0 → s1 (t); W1 > 0, W2 < 0 → s2 (t); etc.) . Assuming that s1 (t) was transmitted, the outputs of the matched filters will be : U1 = 2E + N1r U2 = N2r where N1r , N2r are uncorrelated (Prob. 5.7) Gaussian-distributed terms with zero mean and variance 2E N0 . Then : W1 = 2E + (N1r + N2r ) W2 = 2E + (N1r − N2r ) 2 will be Gaussian distributed with means : E [W1 ] = E [W2 ] = 2E , and variances : E [W1 ] = 2 E [W2 ] = 4E N0. Since U1 , U2 are independent, it is straightforward to prove that W1 , W2 are independent, too. Hence, the probability that a correct decision is made, assuming that s1 (t) was transmitted is : Pc|s1 = P [W1 > 0] P [W2 > 0] = (P [W1 > 0])2 = (1 − P [W1 < 0])2 = 1 − Q = 1−Q 2 E N0 = 1−Q √ 2E 4E N0 2 2Eb N0 2 where Eb = E /2 is the transmitted energy per bit. Then : Pe | s 1 = 1 − Pc | s 1 = 1 − 1 − Q 2E b N0 88 2 = 2Q 2E b N0 1 1− Q 2 2E b N0 This is the exact symbol error probability for the 4-PSK signal, which is expected since the vector space representations of the 4-biorthogonal and 4-PSK signals are identical. Problem 5.15 : (a) The output of the matched filter can be expressed as : y (t) = Re v (t)ej 2πfc t where v (t) is the lowpass equivalent of the output : v (t) = t 0 t −(t−τ )/T dτ = AT 1 − e−t/T , 0 Ae T −(t−τ )/T dτ = AT (e − 1)e−t/T , 0 Ae s0 (τ )h(t − τ )dτ = 0≤t≤T T ≤t (b) A sketch of v (t) is given in the following figure : v(t) 0 T t (c) y (t) = v (t) cos 2πfc t, where fc >> 1/T. Hence the maximum value of y corresponds to the maximum value of v, or ymax = y (T ) = vmax = v (T ) = AT (1 − e−1 ). (d) Working with lowpass equivalent signals, the noise term at the sampling instant will be : vN (T ) = The mean is : E [vN (T )] = E |vN (T )|2 T 0 T 0 z (τ )h(T − τ )dτ E [z (τ )] h(T − τ )dτ = 0, and the second moment : = E 0T z (τ )h(T − τ )dτ = 2N0 0T h2 (T − τ )dτ = N0 T (1 − e−2 ) 89 T 0 z ∗ (w )h(T − w )dw The variance of the real-valued noise component can be obtained using the relationship Re[N ] = 1 (N + N ∗ ) to obtain : σ 2 r = 1 E |vN (T )|2 = 1 N0 T (1 − e−2 ) N 2 2 2 (e) The SNR is defined as : γ= |vmax |2 = E |vN (T )|2 A2 T e − 1 N0 e + 1 (the same result is obtained if we consider the real bandpass signal, when the energy term has the additional factor 1/2 compared to the lowpass energy term, and the noise term is σ 2 r = 1 E |vN (T )|2 ) N 2 (f) If we have a filter matched to s0 (t), then the output of the noise-free matched filter will be : vmax = v (T ) = T 0 s2 (t) = A2 T o and the noise term will have second moment : E |vN (T )|2 = E 0T z (τ )s0 (T − τ )dτ = 2N0 0T s2 (T − τ )dτ 0 = 2N0 A2 T giving an SNR of : γ= |vmax |2 E |vN (T )|2 = T 0 z ∗ (w )s0 (T − w )dw A2 T 2N0 Compared with the result we obtained in (e), using a sub-optimum filter, the loss in SNR is −1 = 0.925 or approximately 0.35 dB equal to : e−1 1 e+1 2 Problem 5.16 : (a) Consider the QAM constellation of Fig. P5-16. Using the Pythagorean theorem we can find the radius of the inner circle as: 1 a2 + a2 = A2 =⇒ a = √ A 2 The radius of the outer circle can be found using the cosine rule. Since b is the third side of a triangle with a and A the two other sides and angle between then equal to θ = 75o , we obtain: √ 1+ 3 2 2 2 o b = a + A − 2aA cos 75 =⇒ b = A 2 90 (b) If we denote by r the radius of the circle, then using the cosine theorem we obtain: A2 = r 2 + r 2 − 2r cos 45o =⇒ r = A 2− √ 2 (c) The average transmitted power of the PSK constellation is: 2 1 A A2 = P √ PPSK = 8 × × ⇒ PSK = √ 8 2− 2 2− 2 whereas the average transmitted power of the QAM constellation: √ √ A2 1 (1 + 3)2 2 2 + (1 + 3)2 4 A2 PQAM = +4 A =⇒ PQAM = 8 2 4 8 The relative power advantage of the PSK constellation over the QAM constellation is: gain = PPSK 8 √ √ = 1.5927 dB = PQAM (2 + (1 + 3)2 )(2 − 2) Problem 5.17 : (a) Although it is possible to assign three bits to each point of the 8-PSK signal constellation so that adjacent points differ in only one bit, (e.g. going in a clockwise direction : 000, 001, 011, 010, 110, 111, 101, 100). this is not the case for the 8-QAM constellation of Figure P5-16. This is because there are fully connected graphs consisted of three points. To see this consider an equilateral triangle with vertices A, B and C. If, without loss of generality, we assign the all zero sequence {0, 0, . . . , 0} to point A, then point B and C should have the form B = {0, . . . , 0, 1, 0, . . . , 0} C = {0, . . . , 0, 1, 0, . . . , 0} where the position of the 1 in the sequences is not the same, otherwise B=C. Thus, the sequences of B and C differ in two bits. (b) Since each symbol conveys 3 bits of information, the resulted symbol rate is : Rs = 90 × 106 = 30 × 106 symbols/sec 3 91 Problem 5.18 : For binary phase modulation, the error probability is 2E b A2 T = Q N0 N0 P2 = Q With P2 = 10−6 we find from tables that A2 T = 4.74 =⇒ A2 T = 44.9352 × 10−10 N0 If the data rate is 10 Kbps, then the bit interval is T = 10−4 and therefore, the signal amplitude is √ A = 44.9352 × 10−10 × 104 = 6.7034 × 10−3 Similarly we find that when the rate is 105 bps and 106 bps, the required amplitude of the signal is A = 2.12 × 10−2 and A = 6.703 × 10−2 respectively. Problem 5.19 : (a) The PDF of the noise n is : p(n) = √ where λ = 2 σ λ −λ|n| e 2 The optimal receiver uses the criterion : p(r |A) = e−λ[|r−A|−|r+A|] p(r | − A) A > < 1 =⇒ r −A A > <0 −A The average probability of error is : P (e) = = = = = 1 1 P (e|A) + P (e| − A) 2 2 10 1∞ f (r |A)dr + f (r | − A)dr 2 −∞ 20 1∞ 10 λ2 e−λ|r−A| dr + λ2 e−λ|r+A| dr 2 −∞ 20 λ ∞ −λ|x| λ −A −λ|x| e dx + e dx 4 −∞ 4A 1 −λA 1 −√2A e =eσ 2 2 92 (b) The variance of the noise is : 2 σn = λ 2 =λ ∞ −∞ ∞ e−λ|x| x2 dx e−λx x2 dx = λ 0 Hence, the SNR is: SNR = 2! 2 = 2 = σ2 3 λ λ A2 σ2 and the probability of error is given by: 1√ P (e) = e− 2SN R 2 For P (e) = 10−5 we obtain: √ ln(2 × 10−5 ) = − 2SNR =⇒ SNR = 58.534 = 17.6741 dB If the noise was Gaussian, then the probability of error for antipodal signalling is: P (e) = Q √ 2E b = Q SNR N0 where SNR is the signal to noise ratio at the output of the matched filter. With P (e) = 10−5 √ we find SNR = 4.26 and therefore SNR = 18.1476 = 12.594 dB. Thus the required signal to noise ratio is 5 dB less when the additive noise is Gaussian. Problem 5.20 : The constellation of Fig. P5-20(a) has four points at a distance 2A from the origin and four √ points at a distance 2 2A. Thus, the average transmitted power of the constellation is: √ 1 4 × (2A)2 + 4 × (2 2A)2 = 6A2 8 √ The second constellation has four points at a distance 7A from the origin, two points at a √ distance 3A and two points at a distance A. Thus, the average transmitted power of the second constellation is: Pa = Pb = √ √ 1 9 4 × ( 7A)2 + 2 × ( 3A)2 + 2A2 = A2 8 2 Since Pb < Pa the second constellation is more power efficient. 93 Problem 5.21 : The optimum decision boundary of a point is determined by the perpedicular bisectors of each line segment connecting the point with its neighbors. The decision regions for this QAM constellation are depicted in the next figure: ❅ ❅ O ❅ ❅ ❅ O ❅ ❅ ❅ O ❅ ❅ O ❅ ❅ ❅ O OO O O O O O ❅ ❅ O ❅❅ ❅ ❅ O ❅ ❅ O ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅ O ❅ ❅ æ Problem 5.22 : One way to label the points of the V.29 constellation using the Gray-code is depicted in the next figure. 94 O 0110 O 0111 O 0101 O 0100 1101 1111 1110 1100 O O O 0000 0001 0011 0010 O O O O O O 1000 O 1001 O 1011 O 1010 æ Problem 5.23 : The transmitted signal energy is A2 T 2 where T is the bit interval and A is the signal amplitude. Since both carriers are used to transmit E information over the same channel, the bit SNR, Nb0 , is constant if A2 T is constant. Hence, the 1 desired relation between the carrier amplitudes and the supported transmission rate R = T is Eb = Ac = As With we obtain Ts = Tc Rc Rs Rc 10 × 103 = = 0.1 Rs 100 × 103 Ac = 0.3162 As 95 Problem 5.24 : (a) Since m2 (t) = −m3 (t) the dimensionality of the signal space is two. (b) As a basis of the signal space we consider the functions: f1 (t) = 1 √ T 0 0≤t≤T otherwise f2 (t) = 1 √ T 1 − √T 0 0≤t≤ T 2 T <t≤T 2 otherwise The vector representation of the signals is: √ m1 = [ T , 0] √ m2 = [0, T] √ m3 = [0, − T ] (c) The signal constellation is depicted in the next figure : ✈(0, √ T) ✈√ ( T , 0) √ (0, − T ) ✈ (d) The three possible outputs of the matched filters, corresponding √ the three possible transto √ √ mitted signals are (r1 , r2 ) = ( T + n1 , n2 ), (n1 , T + n2 ) and (n1 , − T + n2 ), where n1 , n2 are zero-mean Gaussian random variables with variance N0 . If all the signals are equiprobable the 2 optimum decision rule selects the signal that maximizes the metric (see 5-1-44): C (r, mi ) = 2r · mi − |mi |2 or since |mi |2 is the same for all i, C (r, mi ) = r · mi Thus the optimal decision region R1 for m1 is the set of points (√ , r2 ), such that (r1 , √ ) · m1 > r1 r2 (r1 , r2 ) · m2 and (r1 , r2 ) · m1 > (r1 , r2 ) · m3 . Since (r1 , r2 ) · m1 = T r1 , (r1 , r2 ) · m2 = T r2 and √ (r1 , r2 ) · m3 = − T r2 , the previous conditions are written as r 1 > r2 and r1 > −r2 96 Similarly we find that R2 is the set of points (r1 , r2 ) that satisfy r2 > 0, r2 > r1 and R3 is the region such that r2 < 0 and r2 < −r1 . The regions R1 , R2 and R3 are shown in the next figure. R2 0 ❅ ❅ R3 R1 ❅ ❅ ❅ ❅ (e) If the signals are equiprobable then: P (e|m1 ) = P (|r − m1 |2 > |r − m2 |2 |m1 ) + P (|r − m1 |2 > |r − m3 |2 |m1 ) √ When m1 is transmitted then r = [ T + n1 , n2 ] and therefore, P (e|m1 ) is written as: √ √ P (e|m1 ) = P (n2 − n1 > T ) + P (n1 + n2 < − T ) Since, n1 , n2 are zero-mean statistically independent Gaussian random variables, each with variance N0 , the random variables x = n1 − n2 and y = n1 + n2 are zero-mean Gaussian with 2 variance N0 . Hence: √ 2 2 ∞ −T 1 1 − 2x −y N0 P (e|m1 ) = √ dx + √ e 2N0 dy √e 2πN0 T 2πN0 −∞ T T T =Q +Q = 2Q N0 N0 N0 √ When m2 is transmitted then r = [n1 , n2 + T ] and therefore: √ √ P (e|m2 ) = P (n1 − n2 > T ) + P (n2 < − T ) =Q T +Q N0 2T N0 Similarly from the symmetry of the problem, we obtain: P (e|m2 ) = P (e|m3 ) = Q T +Q N0 Since Q[·] is momononically decreasing, we obtain: Q 2T <Q N0 97 T N0 2T N0 and therefore, the probability of error P (e|m1 ) is larger than P (e|m2 ) and P (e|m3 ). Hence, the message m1 is more vulnerable to errors. The reason for that is that it has both threshold lines close to it, while the other two signals have one of the their threshold lines further away. Problem 5.25 : (a) If the power spectral density of the additive noise is Sn (f ), then the PSD of the noise at the output of the prewhitening filter is Sν (f ) = Sn (f )|Hp (f )|2 In order for Sν (f ) to be flat (white noise), Hp (f ) should be such that H p (f ) = 1 Sn (f ) (b) Let hp (t) be the impulse response of the prewhitening filter Hp (f ). That is, hp (t) = F −1 [Hp (f )]. Then, the input to the matched filter is the signal s(t) = s(t) hp (t). The frequency ˜ response of the filter matched to s(t) is ˜ ∗ ˜ ˜ Sm (f ) = S ∗ (f )e−j 2πf t0 == S ∗ (f )Hp (f )e−j 2πf t0 where t0 is some nominal time-delay at which we sample the filter output. (c) The frequency response of the overall system, prewhitenig filter followed by the matched filter, is S ∗ (f ) −j 2πf t0 ˜ e G(f ) = Sm (f )Hp (f ) = S ∗ (f )|Hp (f )|2e−j 2πf t0 = Sn (f ) (d) The variance of the noise at the output of the generalized matched filter is σ2 = ∞ −∞ Sn (f )|G(f )|2df = ∞ −∞ | S (f )| 2 df Sn (f ) At the sampling instant t = t0 = T , the signal component at the output of the matched filter is y (T ) = = ∞ −∞ ∞ Y (f )ej 2πf T df = S ∗ (f ) df = S (f ) Sn (f ) −∞ Hence, the output SNR is SNR = y 2 (T ) = σ2 98 ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ s(τ )g (T − τ )dτ | S (f )| 2 df Sn (f ) | S (f )| 2 df Sn (f ) Problem 5.26 : (a) The number of bits per symbol is k= 4800 4800 = =2 R 2400 Thus, a 4-QAM constellation is used for transmission. The probability of error for an M-ary QAM system with M = 2k , is PM 1 = 1− 1−2 1− √ M Q 2 3k E b (M − 1)N0 With PM = 10−5 and k = 2 we obtain Q 2E b Eb = 5 × 10−6 =⇒ = 9.7682 N0 N0 (b) If the bit rate of transmission is 9600 bps, then k= 9600 =4 2400 In this case a 16-QAM constellation is used and the probability of error is PM 1 =1− 1−2 1− Q 4 3 × 4 × Eb 15 × N0 2 Thus, Q 3 × Eb 1 Eb = × 10−5 =⇒ = 25.3688 15 × N0 3 N0 (c) If the bit rate of transmission is 19200 bps, then k= 19200 =8 2400 In this case a 256-QAM constellation is used and the probability of error is PM With PM = 10−5 we obtain 1 = 1− 1−2 1− Q 16 Eb = 659.8922 N0 99 3 × 8 × Eb 255 × N0 2 (d) The following table gives the SNR per bit and the corresponding number of bits per symbol for the constellations used in parts a)-c). k SNR (db) 2 4 8 9.89 14.04 28.19 As it is observed there is an increase in transmitted power of approximately 3 dB per additional bit per symbol. Problem 5.27 : Using the Pythagorean theorem for the four-phase constellation, we find: d 2 2 r1 + r1 = d2 =⇒ r1 = √ 2 The radius of the 8-PSK constellation is found using the cosine rule. Thus: 2 2 2 d2 = r2 + r2 − 2r2 cos(45o ) =⇒ r2 = d 2− √ 2 The average transmitted power of the 4-PSK and the 8-PSK constellation is given by: P4,av = d2 , 2 P8,av = d2 √ 2− 2 Thus, the additional transmitted power needed by the 8-PSK signal is: P = 10 log10 2d 2 √ = 5.3329 dB (2 − 2)d2 We obtain the same results if we use the probability of error given by (see 5-2-61) : PM = 2Q 2γs sin π M where γs is the SNR per symbol. In this case, equal error probability for the two signaling schemes, implies that γ4,s sin2 sin π π π γ8,s 4 = γ8,s sin2 =⇒ 10 log10 = 20 log10 = 5.3329 dB 4 8 γ4,s sin π 8 Since we consider that error ocuur only between adjacent points, the above result is equal to the additional transmitted power we need for the 8-PSK scheme to achieve the same distance d between adjacent points. 100 Problem 5.28 : For 4-phase PSK (M = 4) we have the following realtionship between the symbol rate 1/T , the 2 required bandwith W and the bit rate R = k · 1/T = logT M (see 5-2-84): W= R → R = W log2 M = 2W = 200 kbits/sec log2 M For binary FSK (M = 2) the required frequency separation is 1/2T (assuming coherent receiver) and (see 5-2-86): W= M 2W log2M R→R= = W = 100 kbits/sec log2 M M Finally, for 4-frequency non-coherent FSK, the required frequency separation is 1/T , so the symbol rate is half that of binary coherent FSK, but since we have two bits/symbol, the bit ate is tha same as in binary FSK : R = W = 100 kbits/sec Problem 5.29 : We assume that the input bits 0, 1 are mapped to the symbols -1 and 1 respectively. The terminal phase of an MSK signal at time instant n is given by θ(n; a) = πk ak + θ0 2 k=0 where θ0 is the initial phase and ak is ±1 depending on the input bit at the time instant k . The following table shows θ(n; a) for two different values of θ0 (0, π ), and the four input pairs of data: {00, 01, 10, 11}. θ0 0 0 0 0 π π π π b0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 b1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 a0 a1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 11 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 11 101 θ(n; a) −π 0 0 π 0 π π 2π Problem 5.30 : (a) The envelope of the signal is |sc (t)|2 + |ss (t)|2 |s(t)| = = 2E b πt πt 2E b cos2 + sin2 Tb 2Tb Tb 2Tb = 2E b Tb Thus, the signal has constant amplitude. (b) The signal s(t) is equivalent to an MSK signal. A block diagram of the modulator for synthesizing the signal is given in the next figure. a2n n ✲× ✻ ✛ Serial / ✲ Parallel data an Demux Serial ❄ −π 2 a2n+1 n ✲× ✻ ✛ ❧ cos( 2πtb ) T ❄ n ✲× ❄ ❧ ❄ s(t) n✲ cos(2πfc t) + ✻ −π 2 ❄ n ✲× (c) A sketch of the demodulator is shown in the next figure. t = 2Tb ✲× n r (t) ✲ ✻ ✛ ❄ ✲× n ✻ ✛ ❧ cos(2πfc t)) −π 2 ❄ n ✲× ✲ 2Tb (·)dt ❅ ❅ 0 Threshold ❄ ❧ Parallel to ✲ Serial cos( 2πtb ) T ❄ ✻ −π 2 ❄ n ✲× t = 2Tb ✲ 2Tb 0 (·)dt 102 ❅ ❅ Threshold Problem 5.31 : 1 h= , L=2 2 Based on (5-3-7), we obtain the 4 phase states : Θs = {0, π/2, π, 3π/2} The states in the trellis are the combination of the phase state and the correlative state, which take the values In−1 = {±1} . The transition from state to state are determined by θn+1 = θn + π In−1 2 and the resulting state trellis and state diagram are given in the following figures, where a solid line corresponds to In = 1, while a dotted line corresponds to In = −1. (θn , In−1 ) (0, 1) (0, −1) (π/2, 1) (π/2, −1) (π, 1) (π, −1) (3π/2, 1) (2π/2, −1) .. ◗ .◗ ✒ ✕ ✁ .. ✁ ◗ . .◗ ✁ . . . ◗ ✁.✸ . . ❏ . . . . ◗◗. .✣ . . . . .✁ . ❏ . . s ◗ . . . . . .✁.✁ ◗ ❏ . . . . ◗ . . . .◗.❏. ✒ ..... .. ✁ . . ◗ ❏ . . ....◗ ✁ . . ❘ . . ..◗ . . .❏✁ . . .✸ .✁. . ◗ . ❏ . . .◗ . ✁ .. ❏. . . . ❏. ◗ s .. .. . . ◗ ◗ . .◗ . ✁ ✒ .. . ❏ . ... . . ✁ ◗ ❏ .. . . ✁.... ◗ .. ❘ . . . ◗ . . .. . ❏. ✁ ◗ .✸ .. . .. . . .◗ ❏ . ✁ . . . . . .◗ ❏ s .✁ . ◗ . . . .. . . . . .. . .. .. ❘æ . 103 (3π/2,1) (3π/2,−1) (π, −1) (0, +1) (π, 1) (π/2, −1) (0, −1) (π/2, 1) The treatment in Probl. 4.27 involved the terminal phase states only, which were determined to be {π/4, 3π/4, 5π/4, 7π/4} . We can easily verify that each two of the combined states, which were obtained in this problem, give one terminal phase state. For example (θn , In−1 ) = (3π/2, −1) and (θn , In−1) = (π, +1) , give the same terminal phase state at t = (n + 1)T : φ ((n + 1)T ; I) = θn + θ(t; I) = θn + 2πhIn−1 q (2T ) + 2πhIn q (T ) ⇒ π φ ((n + 1)T ; I) = θn + π In−1 + π In = 32 + π In = 5π/4 or 7π/4 2 4 4 Problem 5.32 : (a) (i) There are no correlative states in this system, since it is a full response CPM. Based on (5-3-6), we obtain the phase states : Θs = 0 , 2π 4π , 33 104 (ii) Based on (5-3-7), we obtain the phase states : Θs = 0 , π 15π 7π 18π π 21π 5π 3π 3π 9π ,, ≡ , π, ≡ , ≡, ≡ 424 4 4 44 24 4 (b) (i) The combined states are Sn = (θn , In−1 , In−2 ) , where , In−1/n−2 take the values ±1. Hence there are 3 × 2 × 2 = 12 combined states in all. (ii) The combined states are Sn = (θn , In−1 , In−2 ) , where , In−1/n−2 take the values ±1. Hence there are 8×2 × 2 = 32 combined states in all. Problem 5.33 : A biorthogonal signal set with M = 8 signal points has vector space dimensionallity 4. Hence, the detector first checks which one of the four correlation metrics is the largest in absolute value, and then decides about the two possible symbols associated with this correlation metric,based on the sign of this metric. Hence, the error probability is the probability of the union of the event E1 that another correlation metric is greater in absolute value and the event E2 that the signal correlation metric has the wrong sign. A union bound on the symbol error probability can be given by : PM ≤ P (E1 ) + P (E2 ) But P (E2 ) is simply the probability of error for an antipodal signal set : P (E2 ) = Q and the probability of the event E1 can be union bounded by : P (E1 ) ≤ 3 [P (|C2 | > |C1 |)] = 3 [2P (C2 > C1 )] = 6P (C2 > C1 ) = 6Q 2Es N0 Es N0 where Ci is the correlation metric corresponding to the i-th vector space dimension; the probability that a correlation metric is greater that the correct one is given by the error probability for Es orthogonal signals Q (since these correlation metrics correspond to orthogonal signals). N0 Hence : Es 2E s PM ≤ 6 Q +Q N0 N0 (sum of the probabilities to chose one of the 6 orthogonal, to the correct one, signal points and the probability to chose the signal point which is antipodal to the correct one). Problem 5.34 : It is convenient to find first the probability of a correct decision. Since all signals are equiprob105 able, M P (C ) = 1 P (C |si ) i=1 M All the P (C |si ), i = 1, . . . , M are identical because of the symmetry of the constellation. By translating the vector si to the origin we can find the probability of a correct decison, given that si was transmitted, as : P (C |si ) = ∞ −d 2 ∞ f (n1 )dn1 −d 2 f (n2 )dn2 . . . ∞ −d 2 f (nN )dnN where the number of the integrals on the right side of the equation is N , d is the minimum distance between the points and : 2 f (ni ) = √ n n2 1 1 i −i e− 2σ2 = √ e N0 πN0 2πσ 2 Hence : P (C |si ) = = ∞ −d 2 N = 1− f (n)dn d 1−Q √ 2N0 −d 2 −∞ N f (n)dn N and therefore, the probability of error is given by : M 1 P (e) = 1 − P (C ) = 1 − i=1 M d = 1− 1−Q √ 2N0 Note that since : Es = N i=1 s2 = m,i d 1−Q √ 2N0 N d d2 ( )2 = N 4 i=1 2 N the probability of error can be written as : P (e) = 1 − 1 − Q 2E s NN0 Problem 5.35 : Consider first the signal : n y (t) = k =1 ck δ (t − kTc ) 106 N N The signal y (t) has duration T = nTc and its matched filter is : n g (t) = y (T − t) = y (nTc − t) = n = i=1 k =1 cn−i+1 δ ((i − 1)Tc − t) = ck δ (nTc − kTc − t) n i=1 cn−i+1 δ (t − (i − 1)Tc ) that is, a sequence of impulses starting at t = 0 and weighted by the mirror image sequence of {ci }. Since, n n ck p(t − kTc ) = p(t) s(t) = k =1 ck δ (t − kTc ) k =1 the Fourier transform of the signal s(t) is : n S (f ) = P (f ) k =1 ck e−j 2πf kTc and therefore, the Fourier transform of the signal matched to s(t) is : H (f ) = S ∗ (f )e−j 2πf T = S ∗ (f )e−j 2πf nTc ∗ n = P (f ) = P ∗ (f ) ∗ k =1 n i=1 ck ej 2πf kTc e−j 2πf nTc cn−i+1 e−j 2πf (i−1)Tc = P (f )F [g (t)] Thus, the matched filter H (f ) can be considered as the cascade of a filter,with impulse response p(−t), matched to the pulse p(t) and a filter, with impulse response g (t), matched to the signal y (t) = n=1 ck δ (t − kTc ). The output of the matched filter at t = nTc is (see 5-1-27) : k ∞ −∞ |s(t)| 2 n = k =1 c2 k n = Tc k =1 ∞ −∞ p2 (t − kTc )dt c2 k where we have used the fact that p(t) is a rectangular pulse of unit amplitude and duration Tc . Problem 5.36 : The bandwidth required for transmission of an M -ary PAM signal is W= R Hz 2 log2 M 107 Since, R = 8 × 103 bits samples bits ×8 = 64 × 103 sec sample sec we obtain 16 KHz W = 10.667 KHz 8 KHz M =4 M =8 M = 16 Problem 5.37 : (a) The inner product of si (t) and sj (t) is ∞ −∞ si (t)sj (t)dt = ∞ n −∞ k =1 nn cik p(t − kTc ) cik cjl = k =1 l=1 nn = ∞ −∞ n l=1 cjl p(t − lTc )dt p(t − kTc )p(t − lTc )dt cik cjl Ep δkl k =1 l=1 n = Ep cik cjk k =1 The quantity n=1 cik cjk is the inner product of the row vectors C i and C j . Since the rows of k the matrix Hn are orthogonal by construction, we obtain ∞ −∞ si (t)sj (t)dt = Ep n k =1 c2 δij = nEp δij ik Thus, the waveforms si (t) and sj (t) are orthogonal. (b) Using the results of Problem 5.35, we obtain that the filter matched to the waveform n si (t) = k =1 cik p(t − kTc ) can be realized as the cascade of a filter matched to p(t) followed by a discrete-time filter matched to the vector C i = [ci1 , . . . , cin ]. Since the pulse p(t) is common to all the signal waveforms si (t), we conclude that the n matched filters can be realized by a filter matched to p(t) followed by n discrete-time filters matched to the vectors C i , i = 1, . . . , n. 108 Problem 5.38 : (a) The optimal ML detector (see 5-1-41) selects the sequence C i that minimizes the quantity: D (r , C i ) = n (r k − Eb Cik )2 k =1 The metrics of the two possible transmitted sequences are D (r , C 1 ) = w E b )2 + (r k − w n E b )2 + k =1 and D (r , C 2 ) = (r k − k =1 (r k − E b )2 (r k + E b )2 k =w +1 n k =w +1 Since the first term of the right side is common for the two equations, we conclude that the optimal ML detector can base its decisions only on the last n − w received elements of r. That is n (r k − k =w +1 E b )2 − n (r k + k =w +1 E b )2 C2 > <0 C1 or equivalently n rk k =w +1 (b) Since rk = √ C1 > <0 C2 EbCik + nk , the probability of error P (e|C 1 ) is P (e|C 1 ) = P Eb (n − w ) + = P n k =w +1 The random variable u = Hence P (e|C 1 ) = n k =w +1 nk 1 2 π (n − w )σ 2 k =w +1 nk < 0 nk < −(n − w ) Eb 2 is zero-mean Gaussian with variance σu = (n − w )σ 2 . √ − Eb (n−w ) −∞ n E b (n − w ) x2 exp(− )dx = Q 2 2 π (n − w )σ σ2 109 Similarly we find that P (e|C 2 ) = P (e|C 1 ) and since the two sequences are equiprobable E b (n − w ) P (e) = Q σ2 (c) The probability of error P (e) is minimized when Eb (n−w) is maximized, that is for w = 0. σ2 This implies that C 1 = −C 2 and thus the distance between the two sequences is the maximum possible. Problem 5.39 : rl (t) = sl1 (t)ejφ + z (t). Hence, the output of a correlator-type receiver will be : r1 = T 0 rl (t)s∗1 (t)dt = l = ejφ T 0 T 0 sl1 (t)ejφ + z (t) s∗1 (t)dt l sl1 (t)s∗1 (t)dt + l T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt l = ejφ 2E + n1c + jn1s = 2E cos φ + n1c + j (2E sin φ + n1s ) where n1c = Re output: T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt , n1s = Im l r2 = T 0 = ejφ rl (t)s∗2 (t)dt = l T 0 T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt . Similarly for the second correlator l sl1 (t)ejφ + z (t) s∗2 (t)dt l T 0 sl1 (t)s∗2 (t)dt + l T 0 z (t)s∗2 (t)dt l = ejφ 2E ρ∗ + n2c + jn2s = ejφ 2E |ρ| e−ja0 + n2c + jn2s = 2E |ρ| cos (φ − a0 ) + n2c + j (2E |ρ| sin (φ − a0 ) + n2s ) where n2c = Re T 0 z (t)s∗2 (t)dt , n2s = Im l T 0 z (t)s∗2 (t)dt . l Problem 5.40 : nic = Re T 0 z (t)s∗ (t)dt , nis = Im li T 0 z (t)s∗ (t)dt , li 110 i = 1, 2. The variances of the noise terms are: T 0 E [n1c n1c ] = E Re z (t)s∗1 (t)dt Re l T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt l = 1 E 4 T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt + l = 1 2 0T 4 T 0 = 1 2 4 2 E [z (a)z ∗ (t)] sl1 (t)s∗1 (a)dtda l · 2N0 T 0 T 0 z ∗ (t)sl1 (t)dt sl1 (t)s∗1 (t)dt = 2N0 E l where we have used the identity Re [z ] = 1 (z + z ∗ ) , and the fact from Problem 5.7 (or 4.3) that 2 E [z (t)z (t + τ )] = 0, E [z ∗ (t)z ∗ (t + τ )] = 0. Similarly : E [n2c n2c ] = E [n1s n1s ] = E [n2s n2s ] = 2N0 E where for the quadrature noise term components we use the identity : Im [z ] = The covariance between the in-phase terms for the two correlators is : E [n1c n2c ] = 1 E 4 =0 T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt + l T 0 z ∗ (t)sl1 (t)dt T 0 z (t)s∗2 (t)dt + l T 0 1 2j (z − z ∗ ) . z ∗ (t)sl2 (t)dt because the 4 crossterms that are obtained from the above expressions contain one of : E [z (t)z (t + τ )] = E [z ∗ (t)z ∗ (t + τ )] = T 0 sl2 (t)s∗1 (t)dt = l T 0 sl1 (t)s∗2 (t)dt = 0 l Similarly : E [n1c n2s ] = E [n1s n2s ] = E [n1s n2c ] = 0. Finally, the covariance between the in-phase and the quadrature component of the same correlator output is : E [n1c n1s ] = = 1 E 4j 1 4j T 0 1 4j T 0 + 41j = T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt + l T 0 z ∗ (t)sl1 (t)dt T 0 z (t)s∗1 (t)dt − l T 0 z ∗ (t)sl1 (t)dt T TT ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 0 E [z (a)z (t)] sl1 (a)sl1 (t)dtda + 0 0 E [z (a)z (t)] sl1 (a)sl1 dtda TT TT ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 0 0 E [z (a)z (t)] sl1 (a)sl1 (t)dtda − 0 0 E [z (a)z (t)] sl1 (a)sl1 (t)dtda T 0 E [z (a)z (t)] s∗1 (a)s∗1 (t)dtda + l l T 0 T 0 E [z ∗ (a)z ∗ (t)] sl1 (a)s∗1 dtda l =0 Similarly : E [n2c n2s ] = 0. The joint pdf is simply the product of the marginal pdf’s, since these noise terms are Gaussian and uncorrelated, and thus they are also statistically independent : p(n1c , n2c , n1s , n2s ) = p(n1c )p(n2c )p(n1s )p(n2s ) 111 where, e.g : p(n1c ) = √1 4πNo E exp(−n2c /4N0 E ). 1 Problem 5.41 : The first matched filter output is : r1 = T 0 rl (τ )h1 (T − τ )dτ = T 0 rl (τ )s∗1 (T − (T − τ ))dτ = l T rl (τ )s∗1 (τ )dτ l T rl (τ )s∗2 (τ )dτ l 0 Similarly : r2 = T 0 rl (τ )h2 (T − τ )dτ = T 0 rl (τ )s∗2 (T − (T − τ ))dτ = l 0 which are the same as those of the correlation-type receiver of Problem 5.39. From this point, following the exact same steps as in Problem 5.39, we get : r1 = 2E cos φ + n1c + j (2E sin φ + n1s ) r2 = 2E |ρ| cos (φ − a0 ) + n2c + j (2E |ρ| sin (φ − a0 ) + n2s ) Problem 5.42 : (a) The noncoherent envelope detector for the on-off keying signal is depicted in the next figure. t=T ✲× n ✲ ✻ r (t) ✲ ✛ 2 T t 0 (·)dτ ❅ ❅ rc (· )2 ❄r ❧ +✲ cos(2πfc t) ❄ ✻ −π 2 ❄ n ✲× ✲ t=T t 0 (·)dτ ❅ ❅ rs (· )2 ✲ VT Threshold Device (b) If s0 (t) is sent, then the received signal is r (t) = n(t) and therefore the sampled outputs rc , rs are zero-mean independent Gaussian random variables with variance N0 . Hence, the random 2 2 2 variable r = rc + rs is Rayleigh distributed and the PDF is given by : p(r |s0 (t)) = r r − r22 2r − N2 e 2σ = e0 σ2 N0 112 If s1 (t) is transmitted, then the received signal is : r (t) = Crosscorrelating r (t) by 2 T 2E b cos(2πfc t + φ) + n(t) Tb cos(2πfc t) and sampling the output at t = T , results in T 2 r (t) cos(2πfc t)dt T 0 √ T2 E T 2 b = cos(2πfc t + φ) cos(2πfc t)dt + n(t) cos(2πfc t)dt Tb T 0 0 √ 2 Eb T 1 (cos(2π 2fc t + φ) + cos(φ)) dt + nc = Tb 0 2 rc = = Eb cos(φ) + nc where nc is zero-mean Gaussian random variable with variance component we have : rs = Eb sin(φ) + ns The PDF of the random variable r = 2 2 rc + rs = √ E r Eb r − r2 +2 b p(r |s1(t)) = 2 e 2σ I0 σ σ2 N0 . 2 Similarly, for the quadrature Eb + n2 + n2 follows the Rician distibution : c s √ + 2r E b 2r − r2N Eb 0I = e 0 N0 N0 (c) For equiprobable signals the probability of error is given by: P (error) = 1 2 VT −∞ p(r |s1 (t))dr + 1 2 ∞ VT p(r |s0 (t))dr Since r > 0 the expression for the probability of error takes the form 1 2 1 = 2 P (error) = VT 0 VT 0 p(r |s1 (t))dr + E r − r2 +2 b e 2σ I0 2 σ 1∞ p(r |s0 (t))dr 2 VT √ r Eb 1 ∞ r − r22 dr + e 2σ dr σ2 2 VT σ 2 The optimum threshold level is the value of VT √ that minimizes the probability of error. However, E Eb 1 the optimum value is close to: 2 b and we will use this threshold to simplify the when N0 analysis. The integral involving the Bessel function cannot be evaluated in closed form. Instead of I0 (x) we will use the approximation : ex √ I0 (x) ≈ 2πx 113 which is valid for large x, that is for high SNR. In this case : VT 1 2 0 √ √ E r − r2 +2 b r Eb 1 e 2σ I0 dr ≈ σ2 σ2 2 Eb 2 √2 r 2 √ e−(r− Eb ) /2σ dr 2πσ 2 Eb 0 This integral is√ further simplified if we observe that for high SNR, the integrand is dominant in the vicinity of Eb and therefore, the lower limit can be substituted by −∞. Also 2πσ r √ 2 Eb 1 2πσ 2 ≈ and therefore : √ 1 2 Eb 2 √2 r 1 2 √ e−(r− Eb ) /2σ dr ≈ 2E 2 2πσ b 0 = √ Eb 2 1 −(r−√Eb )2 /2σ2 e dr 2πσ 2 −∞ Eb 2N0 1 Q 2 Finally : P (error) = 1 Q 2 Eb 1 + 2N0 2 ≤ 1 Q 2 Eb 1 − Eb + e 4N0 2N0 2 ∞ √ Eb 2 r 2r − N2 e 0 dr N0 Problem 5.43 : ∗ (a) D = Re Vm Vm−1 where Vm = Xm + jYm . Then : D = Re ((Xm + jYm )(Xm−1 − jYm−1 )) = Xm Xm−1 + Ym Ym−1 = Xm +Xm−1 2 2 − Xm −Xm−1 2 2 + Ym +Ym−1 2 2 − Ym −Ym−1 2 2 (b) Vk = Xk + jYk = 2aE cos(θ − φ) + j 2aE sin(θ − φ) + Nk,real + Nk,imag . Hence : U1 U2 U3 U4 = = = = Xm +Xm−1 , 2 Ym +Ym−1 , 2 Xm −Xm−1 , 2 Ym −Ym−1 , 2 E (U1 ) = 2aE cos(θ − φ) E (U2 ) = 2aE sin(θ − φ) E (U3 ) = 0 E (U4 ) = 0 114 2 The variance of U1 is : E [U1 − E (U1 )]2 = E 1 (Nm,real + Nm−1,real ) = E [Nm,real ]2 = 2E N0 , 2 and similarly : E [Ui − E (Ui )]2 = 2EN0 , i = 2, 3, 4. The covariances are (e.g for U1 , U2 ): cov (U1 , U2 ) = E [(U1 − E (U1 )) (U2 − E (U2 ))] = E 1 (Nm,r + Nm−1,r ) (Nm,i + Nm−1,i ) = 0, since 4 the noise components are uncorrelated and have zero mean. Similarly for any i, j : cov (Ui , Uj ) = 0 . The condition cov (Ui , Uj ) = 0, implies that these random variables {Ui } are uncorrelated, and since they are Gaussian, they are also statistically independent. 2 2 Since U3 and U4 are zero-mean Gaussian, the random variable R2 = U3 + U4 has a Rayleigh 2 2 U1 + U2 has a Rice distribution. distribution; on the other hand R1 = 2 2 (c) W1 = U1 + U2 , with U1 , U2 being statistically independent Gaussian variables with means 2aE cos(θ − φ), 2aE (sin θ − φ) and identical variances σ 2 = 2EN0 . Then, W1 follows a non-central chi-square distribution with pdf given by (2-1-118): p (w 1 ) = 1 22 a√ e−(4a E +w1 )/4EN0 I0 w1 , w1 ≥ 0 4EN0 N0 2 2 Also, W2 = U3 + U4 , with U3 , U4 being zero-mean Gaussian with the same variance. Hence, W1 follows a central chi-square distribution, with pfd given by (2-1-110) : p (w 2 ) = (d) 1 e−w2 /4EN0 , w2 ≥ 0 4EN0 Pb = P (D < 0) = P (W1 − W2 < 0) = ∞ 0 = ∞ 0 = ∞ −w1 /4EN0 p(w1 )dw1 0e P (w2 > w1 |w1 )p(w1 )dw1 ∞ w1 p(w2 )dw2 p(w1 )dw1 = ψ (jv )|v=j/4EN0 = 1 (1−2jvσ2 ) = j v4a2 E 2 1−2jvσ2 1 −a2 E/N0 e 2 exp |v=j/4EN0 where we have used the characteristic function of the non-central chi-square distribution given by (2-1-117) in the book. 115 Problem 5.44 : v (t) = k sin 2πtb , 0 ≤ t ≤ Tb T 0, o.w. [Ik u(t − 2kTb ) + jJk u(t − 2kTb − Tb )] where u(t) = that u(t − Tb ) = sin π (t − Tb ) πt = − cos , 2Tb 2Tb . Note Tb ≤ t ≤ 3Tb Hence, v (t) may be expressed as : Ik sin v (t) = k π (t − 2kTb ) π (t − 2kTb ) − jJk cos 2Tb 2Tb The transmitted signal is : Re v (t)ej 2πfc t = Ik sin k π (t − 2kTb ) π (t − 2kTb ) cos 2πfc t + Jk cos sin 2πfc t 2Tb 2Tb (a) ✎ ✲X ✍✌ ✻ ✲ (2k +2)Tb ()dt 2kTb ✲ Threshold Detector ✲ ✲ Threshold Detector ✲ Sampler t = (2k + 2)Tb ˆ Ik Input sin 2π b cos2πfc t T ✎ ✲X ✍✌ ✻ ✲ (2k +2)Tb ()dt 2kTb Sampler t = (2k + 2)Tb cos 2πb sin2πfc t T ˆ Ik æ (b) The offset QPSK signal is equivalent to two independent binary PSK systems. Hence for coherent detection, the error probability is : Pe = Q 2γ b , γ b = Eb 1 , Eb = N0 2 T 0 |u(t)|2 dt (c) Viterbi decoding (MLSE) of the MSK signal yields identical performance to that of part (b). 116 (d) MSK is basically binary FSK with frequency separation of ∆f = 1/2T. For this frequency separation the binary signals are orthogonal with coherent detection. Consequently, the error probability for symbol-by-symbol detection of the MSK signal yields an error probability of √ Pe = Q ( γ b ) which is 3dB poorer relative to the optimum Viterbi detection scheme. For non-coherent detection of the MSK signal, the correlation coefficient for ∆f = 1/2T is : |ρ| = sin π/2 = 0.637 π/2 From the results in Sec. 5-4-4 we observe that the performance of the non coherent detector method is about 4 dB worse than the coherent FSK detector. hence the loss is about 7 dB compared to the optimum demodulator for the MSK signal. Problem 5.45 : (a) For n repeaters in cascade, the probability of i out of n repeaters to produce an error is given by the binomial distribution Pi = n i pi (1 − p)n−i However, there is a bit error at the output of the terminal receiver only when an odd number of repeaters produces an error. Hence, the overall probability of error is n i Pn = Podd = i=odd pi (1 − p)n−i Let Peven be the probability that an even number of repeaters produces an error. Then Peven = i=even n i pi (1 − p)n−i and therefore, n Peven + Podd = i=0 n i pi (1 − p)n−i = (p + 1 − p)n = 1 One more relation between Peven and Podd can be provided if we consider the difference Peven − Podd . Clearly, pi (1 − p)n−i − i=even n i n i (−p)i (1 − p)n−i + i=even Peven − Podd = a = i=odd = (1 − p − p)n = (1 − 2p)n 117 n i i=odd pi (1 − p)n−i n i (−p)i (1 − p)n−i where the equality (a) follows from the fact that (−1)i is 1 for i even and −1 when i is odd. Solving the system Peven + Podd = 1 Peven − Podd = (1 − 2p)n we obtain 1 Pn = Podd = (1 − (1 − 2p)n ) 2 (b) Expanding the quantity (1 − 2p)n , we obtain (1 − 2p)n = 1 − n2p + Since, p n(n − 1) (2p)2 + · · · 2 1 we can ignore all the powers of p which are greater than one. Hence, 1 Pn ≈ (1 − 1 + n2p) = np = 100 × 10−6 = 10−4 2 Problem 5.46 : The overall probability of error is approximated by (see 5-5-2) 2E b N0 P (e) = KQ Thus, with P (e) = 10−6 and K = 100, we obtain the probability of each repeater Pr = b Q 2E0 = 10−8. The argument of the function Q[·] that provides a value of 10−8 is found N from tables to be 2E b = 5.61 N0 Hence, the required Eb N0 is 5.612 /2 = 15.7 Problem 5.47 : (a) The antenna gain for a parabolic antenna of diameter D is : GR = η 118 πD λ 2 If we assume that the efficiency factor is 0.5, then with : λ= 3 × 108 c = = 0.3 m f 109 D = 3 × 0.3048 m we obtain : GR = GT = 45.8458 = 16.61 dB (b) The effective radiated power is : EIRP = PT GT = GT = 16.61 dB (c) The received power is : PR = P T GT GR 4πd λ 2 = 2.995 × 10−9 = −85.23 dB = −55.23 dBm Note that : dBm = 10 log10 actual power in Watts 10−3 = 30 + 10 log10 (power in Watts ) Problem 5.48 : (a) The antenna gain for a parabolic antenna of diameter D is : GR = η πD λ 2 If we assume that the efficiency factor is 0.5, then with : λ= 3 × 108 c = = 0.3 m f 109 and D=1m we obtain : GR = GT = 54.83 = 17.39 dB (b) The effective radiated power is : EIRP = PT GT = 0.1 × 54.83 = 7.39 dB 119 (c) The received power is : PR = P T GT GR 4πd λ 2 = 1.904 × 10−10 = −97.20 dB = −67.20 dBm Problem 5.49 : The wavelength of the transmitted signal is: λ= 3 × 108 = 0.03 m 10 × 109 The gain of the parabolic antenna is: GR = η πD λ 2 = 0.6 10 0.03 2 = 6.58 × 105 = 58.18 dB The received power at the output of the receiver antenna is: P T GT GR 3 × 101.5 × 6.58 × 105 PR = = 2.22 × 10−13 = −126.53 dB d2 = 4×107 2 (4π λ ) (4 × 3.14159 × 0.03 ) Problem 5.50 : (a) Since T = 3000 K , it follows that N0 = kT = 1.38 × 10−23 × 300 = 4.14 × 10−21 W/Hz If we assume that the receiving antenna has an efficiency η = 0.5, then its gain is given by : πD GR = η λ 2 = 0.5 2 3.14159 × 50 3×108 2×109 = 5.483 × 105 = 57.39 dB Hence, the received power level is : P T GT GR 10 × 10 × 5.483 × 105 = 7.8125 × 10−13 = −121.07 dB PR = d2 = 108 2 (4π λ ) (4 × 3.14159 × 0.15 ) (b) If Eb N0 = 10 dB = 10, then PR R= N0 Eb N0 −1 = 7.8125 × 10−13 × 10−1 = 1.8871 × 107 = 18.871 Mbits/sec −21 4.14 × 10 120 Problem 5.51 : The wavelength of the transmission is : 3 × 108 c = 0.75 m λ= = f 4 × 109 If 1 MHz is the passband bandwidth, then the rate of binary transmission is Rb = W = 106 bps. Hence, with N0 = 4.1 × 10−21 W/Hz we obtain : PR Eb = Rb =⇒ 106 × 4.1 × 10−21 × 101.5 = 1.2965 × 10−13 N0 N0 The transmitted power is related to the received power through the relation (see 5-5-6) : PR = P T GT GR PR d ⇒ PT = 4π d2 = GT GR λ (4π λ ) 2 Substituting in this expression the values GT = 100.6 , GR = 105 , d = 36 × 106 and λ = 0.75 we obtain PT = 0.1185 = −9.26 dBW 121 CHAPTER 6 Problem 6.1 : N n=1 rn fn (t) Using the relationship r (t) = and s(t; ψ ) = [r (t) − s(t; ψ )]2 dt = 1 N0 = 1 N0 = 1 N0 N n=1 = 1 N0 N n=1 (rn = 1 N0 1 2σ2 N n=1 (rn N n=1 N n=1 sn (ψ )fn (t) we have : 2 − sn (ψ ))fn (t) dt N m=1 (rn N m=1 (rn − sn (ψ ))(rm − sm (ψ ))fn (t)fm (t)dt − sn (ψ ))(rm − sm (ψ ))δmn − sn (ψ ))(rn − sn (ψ )) N n=1 [rn − sn (ψ )]2 where we have exploited the orthonormality of the basis functions fn (t) : and σ 2 = N0 . 2 T0 fn (t)fm (t)dt = δmn Problem 6.2 : A block diagram of a binary PSK receiver that employs match filtering is given in the following figure : Received signal Matched filter ✲ X ✲ h(t) = g (T − t) ❧ ✻ ✲ Sampler and Detector Output data ✲ ✻ ✲ Carrier phase recovery ˆ cos(2πfc t + φ) ✲ Symbol synchronization æ ˆ As we note, the received signal is, first, multiplied with cos(2πfc t + φ) and then fed the matched filter. This allows us to have the filter matched to the baseband pulse g (t) and not to the passband signal. 122 If we want to have the filter matched to the passband signal, then the carrier phase estimate is fed into the matched filter, which should have an impulse response: ˆ h(t) = s(T − t) = g (T − t)cos(2πfc (T − t) + φ) ˆ ˆ = g (T − t)[cos(2πfc T )cos(−2πfc t + φ) + sin(2πfc T )sin(−2πfc t + φ) ˆ ˆ = g (T − t)cos(−2πfc t + φ) = g (T − t)cos(2πfc t − φ) where we have assumed that fc T is an integer so that : cos(2πfc T ) = 1, sin(2πfc T ) = 0. As we note, in this case the impulse response of the filter should change according to the carrier phase estimate, something that is difficult to implement in practise. Hence, the initial realization (shown in the figure) is preferable. Problem 6.3 : (a) The closed loop transfer function is : H (s ) = G (s ) 1 G(s)/s = =2 √ 1 + G(s)/s s + G (s ) s + 2s + 1 The poles of the system are the roots of the denominator, that is √ √ 1 1 − 2± 2−4 = −√ ± j √ ρ1,2 = 2 2 2 Since the real part of the roots is negative, the poles lie in the left half plane and therefore, the system is stable. (b) Writing the denominator in the form : 2 D = s2 + 2ζωn s + ωn we identify the natural frequency of the loop as ωn = 1 and the damping factor as ζ = Problem 6.4 : (a) The closed loop transfer function is : G(s)/s G (s ) K H (s ) = = = =2 2+s+K 1 + G(s)/s s + G (s ) τ1 s s+ The gain of the system at f = 0 is : |H (0)| = |H (s)|s=0 = 1 123 K τ1 1 s τ1 + K τ1 1 √ 2 (b) The poles of the system are the roots of the denominator, that is √ −1 ± 1 − 4Kτ1 ρ1,2 = 2τ1 In order for the system to be stable the real part of the poles must be negative. Since K is greater than zero, the latter implies that τ1 is positive. If in addition we require that the damping factor ζ = 2√11 K is less than 1, then the gain K should satisfy the condition : τ K> 1 4τ1 Problem 6.5 : The transfer function of the RC circuit is : G (s ) = 1 R2 + Cs 1 + R2 Cs 1 + τ2 s = 1= R1 + R2 + Cs 1 + (R1 + R2 )Cs 1 + τ1 s From the last equality we identify the time constants as : τ2 = R2 C, τ1 = (R1 + R2 )C Problem 6.6 : Assuming that the input resistance of the operational amplifier is high so that no current flows through it, then the voltage-current equations of the circuit are : V2 = −AV1 V1 − V2 = R1 + V1 − V0 = iR 1 i Cs where, V1 , V2 is the input and output voltage of the amplifier respectively, and V0 is the signal at the input of the filter. Eliminating i and V1 , we obtain : V2 = V1 1+ 1 R1 + Cs R 1 R + Cs 1 − 1AR A If we let A → ∞ (ideal amplifier), then : 1 + τ2 s 1 + R1 Cs V2 = = V1 RCs τ1 s 124 Hence, the constants τ1 , τ2 of the active filter are given by : τ1 = RC, τ2 = R1 C Problem 6.7 : In the non decision-directed timing recovery method we maximize the function : Λ L (τ ) = m 2 y m (τ ) with respect to τ . Thus, we obtain the condition : d Λ L (τ ) =2 dτ y m (τ ) m dym (τ ) =0 dτ Suppose now that we approximate the derivative of the log-likelihood ΛL (τ ) by the finite difference : d Λ L (τ ) Λ L (τ + δ ) − Λ L (τ − δ ) ≈ dτ 2δ Then, if we substitute the expression of ΛL (τ ) in the previous approximation, we obtain : d Λ L (τ ) = dτ = m 1 2δ 2 y m (τ + δ ) − 2δ m 2 y m (τ − δ ) r (t)g (t − mT − τ − δ )dt 2 − r (t)g (t − mT − τ + δ )dt 2 m where g (−t) is the impulse response of the matched filter in the receiver. However, this is the expression of the early-late gate synchronizer, where the lowpass filter has been substituted by the summation operator. Thus, the early-late gate synchronizer is a close approximation to the timing recovery system. Problem 6.8 : An on-off keying signal is represented as : s1 (t) = A cos(2πfc t + φc ), 0 ≤ t ≤ T (binary 1) s2 (t) = 0, 0 ≤ t ≤ T (binary 0) Let r (t) be the received signal, that is r (t) = s(t; φc ) + n(t) where s(t; φc ) is either s1 (t) or s2 (t) and n(t) is white Gaussian noise with variance N0 . The likelihood function, that is to be 2 maximized with respect to φc over the inteval [0, T ], is proportional to : Λ(φc ) = exp − 2 N0 T 0 125 [r (t) − s(t; φc )]2 dt Maximization of Λ(φc ) is equivalent to the maximization of the log-likelihood function : 2 N0 2 =− N0 T [r (t) − s(t; φc )]2 dt T Λ L (φ c ) = − r 2 (t)dt + 0 0 4 N0 T 0 r (t)s(t; φc )dt − 2 N0 T 0 s2 (t; φc )dt Since the first term does not involve the parameter of interest φc and the last term is simply a constant equal to the signal energy of the signal over [0, T ] which is independent of the carrier phase, we can carry the maximization over the function : V (φ c ) = T 0 r (t)s(t; φc )dt Note that s(t; φc ) can take two different values, s1 (t) and s2 (t), depending on the transmission of a binary 1 or 0. Thus, a more appropriate function to maximize is the average log-likelihood 1T 1 ¯ r (t)s1 (t)dt + V (φ c ) = 20 2 ¯ Since s2 (t) = 0, the function V (φc ) takes the form : 1 ¯ V (φ c ) = 2 T 0 T 0 r (t)s2 (t)dt r (t)A cos(2πfc t + φc )dt ¯ Setting the derivative of V (φc ) with respect to φc equal to zero, we obtain : ¯ ϑV (φc ) 1 =0 = ϑφc 2 T 0 = cos φc r (t)A sin(2πfc t + φc )dt 1 2 T 0 r (t)A sin(2πfc t)dt + sin φc 1 2 T 0 r (t)A cos(2πfc t)dt Thus, the maximum likelihood estimate of the carrier phase is : ˆ φc,M L = − arctan T 0 T 0 r (t) sin(2πfc t)dt r (t) cos(2πfc t)dt Problem 6.9 : (a) The wavelength λ is : λ= 3 3 × 108 m m= 9 10 10 Hence, the Doppler frequency shift is : fD = ± 100 Km/hr 100 × 103 × 10 u =± =± Hz = ±92.5926 Hz 3 λ m 3 × 3600 10 126 The plus sign holds when the vehicle travels towards the transmitter whereas the minus sign holds when the vehicle moves away from the transmitter. (b) The maximum difference in the Doppler frequency shift, when the vehicle travels at speed 100 km/hr and f = 1 GHz, is : ∆fD max = 2fD = 185.1852 Hz This should be the bandwith of the Doppler frequency tracking loop. (c) The maximum Doppler frequency shift is obtained when f = 1 GHz + 1 MHz and the vehicle moves towards the transmitter. In this case : λmin = 3 × 108 m = 0.2997 m 109 + 106 and therefore : 100 × 103 = 92.6853 Hz 0.2997 × 3600 Thus, the Doppler frequency spread is Bd = 2fD max = 185.3706 Hz. fD max = Problem 6.10 : The maximum likelihood phase estimate given by (6-2-38) is : ˆ φM L = − tan −1 Im K −1 ∗ n=0 In yn Re K −1 ∗ n=0 In yn (n+1)T where yn = nT r (t)g ∗(t − nT )dt. The Re(yn ), Im(yn ) are statistically independent components of yn . Since r (t) = e−jφ n In g (t − nT ) + z (t) it follows that yn = In e−jφ + zn , where the pulse energy is normalized to unity. Then : K −1 n=0 Hence : K −1 E Im n=0 and K −1 E Re n=0 ∗ In yn = K −1 n=0 ∗ |In |2 e−jφ + In zn ∗ |In |2 e−jφ + In zn ¯2 = −K In sin φ ∗ |In |2 e−jφ + In zn ¯2 = −K In cos φ 127 ˆ ˆ Consequently : E φM L = − tan −1 − sinφφ = φ, and hence, φM L is an unbiased estimate of the cos true phase φ. Problem 6.11 : The procedure that is used in Sec. 5-2-7 to derive the pdf p(Θr ) for the phase of a PSK signal ˆ may be used to determine the pdf p(φM L ). Specifically, we have : ˆ φM L = − tan −1 Im K −1 ∗ n=0 In yn Re K −1 ∗ n=0 In yn (n+1)T where yn = nT r (t)g ∗(t − nT )dt and r (t) = e−jφ into yn yields : yn = In e−jφ + zn . Hence : K −1 n=0 ∗ In yn = e−jφ K −1 n=0 n In g (t |In |2 + K −1 n=0 − nT ) + z (t). Substitution of r (t) ∗ In zn U + jV = Ce−jφ + z = C cos φ + x + j (y − C sin φ) − − ∗ where C = K=01 |In |2 and z = K=01 In zn = x + jy. The random variables (x,y) are zero-mean, n n Gaussian random variables with variances σ 2 .Hence : p(U, V ) = 1 −[(U −C cos φ)2 −(V −C sin φ)2 ] e 2πσ 2 √ ˆ By defining R = U 2 + V 2 and φM L = tan −1 V and making the change in variables, we obtain U ˆ ˆ ˆ p(R, φM L ) and finally, p(φM L ) = 0∞ p(r, φM L )dr. Upon performing the integration over R, as in Sec. 5-2-7, we obtain : 1 −2γ sin 2 φM L ˆ ˆ e p (φ M L ) = 2π ∞ 0 re−(r− √ 2 ˆ 4γ cos φM L ) /2 dr ˆ where γ = C 2 /2σ 2 . The graph of p(φM L ) is identical to that given on page 271, Fig. 5-2-9. We ˆM L ) = φ, so that the estimate is unbiased. observe that E (φ Problem 6.12 : We begin with the log-likelihood function given in (6-2-35), namely : ΛL(φ) = Re 1 N0 T0 128 r (t)s∗ (t)dt ejφ l where sl (t) is given as : sl (t) = n In g (t − nT ) + j n Jn u(t − nT − T /2). Again we define (n+1)T (n+3/2)T yn = nT r (t)s∗ (t − nT )dt. Also, let : xn = (n+1/2)T r (t)s∗ (t − nT − T /2)dt. Then : l l K −1 ∗ ΛL (φ) = Re e 0 n=0 In yn − j N = Re [A cos φ + jA sin φ] jφ where A = K −1 ∗ n=0 In yn −j K −1 ∗ n=0 Jn xn . K −1 ∗ n=0 Jn xn Thus : ΛL (φ) = Re(A) cos φ − Im(A) sin φ and : d Λ L (φ ) = −Re(A) sin φ − Im(A) cos φ = 0 ⇒ dφ ˆ φM L = − tan −1 Im K −1 ∗ n=0 In yn −j K −1 ∗ n=0 Jn xn Re K −1 ∗ n=0 In yn −j K −1 ∗ n=0 Jn xn Problem 6.13 : Assume that the signal um (t) is the input to the Costas loop. Then um (t) is multiplied by ˆ ˆ ˆ cos(2πfc t + φ) and sin(2πfc t + φ), where cos(2πfc t + φ) is the output of the VCO. Hence : umc (t) ˆ ˆ ˆ = Am gT (t) cos(2πfc t) cos(2πfc t + φ) − Am gT (t) sin(2πfc t) cos(2πfc t + φ) Am gT (t) Am gT (t) ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ cos(2π 2fc t + φ) + cos(φ) − sin(2π 2fc t + φ) − sin(φ) = 2 2 ums (t) ˆ ˆ = Am gT (t) cos(2πfc t) sin(2πfc t + φ) − Am gT (t) sin(2πfc t) sin(2πfc t + φ) ˆ Am gT (t) Am gT (t) ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ = sin(2π 2fc t + φ) + sin(φ) − cos(φ) − cos(2π 2fc t + φ) 2 2 The lowpass filters of the Costas loop will reject the double frequency components, so that : Am gT (t) Am gT (t) ˆ ˆ ˆ cos(φ) + sin(φ) 2 2 Am gT (t) ˆ Am gT (t) ˆ ˆ sin(φ) − cos(φ) yms (t) = 2 2 ymc (t) = ˆ Note that when the carrier phase has been extracted correctly, φ = 0 and therefore : ymc (t) = Am gT (t) , 2 yms (t) = − Am gT (t) ˆ 2 If the second signal, yms (t) is passed through a Hilbert transformer, then : yms (t) = − ˆ ˆ Am gT (t) Am g T (t) ˆ = 2 2 129 and by adding this signal to ymc (t) we obtain the original unmodulated signal. Problem 6.14 : (a) The signal r (t) can be written as : r (t) = ± 2Ps cos(2πfc t + φ) + 2Pc sin(2πfc t + φ) = = 2PT sin 2πfc t + φ + an cos−1 Ps Pc 2(Pc + Ps ) sin 2πfc t + φ + an tan−1 Pc PT where an = ±1 are the information symbols and PT is the total transmitted power. As it is observed the signal has the form of a PM signal where : θn = an cos−1 Pc PT Any method used to extract the carrier phase from the received signal can be employed at the receiver. The following figure shows the structure of a receiver that employs a decision-feedback PLL. The operation of the PLL is described in the next part. ✎ ✲× ✲ Tb (·)dt 0 ✍✌ ✻ v (t) ✲ DFPLL t = Tb ✲ Threshold ✲ ˆ cos(2πfc t + φ) (b) At the receiver (DFPLL) the signal is demodulated by crosscorrelating the received signal : r (t) = 2PT sin 2πfc t + φ + an cos−1 Pc PT + n(t) ˆ ˆ with cos(2πfc t + φ) and sin(2πfc t + φ). The sampled values at the ouput of the correlators are : 1 2 1 = 2 r1 = r2 1 ˆ ˆ 2PT − ns (t) sin(φ − φ + θn ) + nc (t) cos(φ − φ + θn ) 2 1 ˆ ˆ 2PT − ns (t) cos(φ − φ + θn ) + nc (t) sin(φ − φ − θn ) 2 130 where nc (t), ns (t) are the in-phase and quadrature components of the noise n(t). If the detector has made the correct decision on the transmitted point, then by multiplying r1 by cos(θn ) and r2 by sin(θn ) and subtracting the results, we obtain (after ignoring the noise) : 1 ˆ ˆ 2PT sin(φ − φ) cos2 (θn ) + cos(φ − φ) sin(θn ) cos(θn ) 2 1 ˆ ˆ r2 sin(θn ) = 2PT cos(φ − φ) cos(θn ) sin(θn ) − sin(φ − φ) sin2 (θn ) 2 1 ˆ e(t) = r1 cos(θn ) − r2 sin(θn ) = 2PT sin(φ − φ) 2 r1 cos(θn ) = The error e(t) is passed to the loop filter of the DFPLL that drives the VCO. As it is seen only the phase θn is used to estimate the carrier phase. (c) Having a correct carrier phase estimate, the output of the lowpass filter sampled at t = Tb is : r=± 1 2PT sin cos−1 2 Pc PT =± Pc 1 2PT 1 − +n 2 PT =± Pc 1 2PT 1 − 2 PT +n +n where n is a zero-mean Gaussian random variable with variance : 2 σn = E N0 2 N0 = 4 = Tb 0 0 Tb 0 Tb n(t)n(τ ) cos(2πfc t + φ) cos(2πfc τ + φ)dtdτ cos2 (2πfc t + φ)dt Note that Tb has been normalized to 1 since the problem has been stated in terms of the power of the involved signals. The probability of error is given by : P (error) = Q 2PT N0 1− Pc PT The loss due to the allocation of power to the pilot signal is : SNRloss = 10 log10 1 − Pc PT When Pc /PT = 0.1, then SNRloss = 10 log10 (0.9) = −0.4576 dB. The negative sign indicates that the SNR is decreased by 0.4576 dB. 131 Problem 6.15 : The received signal-plus-noise vector at the output of the matched filter may be represented as (see (5-2-63) for example) : rn = Es ej (θn −φ) + Nn where θn = 0, π/2, π, 3π/2 for QPSK, and φ is the carrier phase. By raising rn to the fourth power and neglecting all products of noise terms, we obtain : √ 4 j 4(θn −φ) √3 4 rn ≈ Es e + 4 Es Nn √ 3 √ −j 4φ ≈ Es Es e + 4Nn 4 If the estimate is formed by√ averaging the received vectors {rn } over K signal intervals, we have K the resultant vector U = K Es e−jφ + 4 n=1 Nn . Let φ4 ≡ 4φ. Then, the estimate of φ4 is : Im(U ) ˆ φ4 = − tan −1 Re(U ) Nn is a complex-valued Gaussian noise component with zero mean and variance σ 2 = N0 /2. ˆ Hence, the pdf of φ4 is given by (5-2-55) where : √2 K Es K Es K 2 Es γs = = = 2) 16 (2Kσ 16KN0 16N0 To a first approximation, the variance of the estimate is : 2 σφ4 ≈ ˆ 1 16 = γs K Es /N0 Problem 6.16 : The PDF of the carrier phase error φe , is given by : φ2 −e 1 2σ 2 eφ p (φ e ) = √ 2πσφ Thus the average probability of error is : ¯ P2 = = = ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ P2 (φe )p(φe )dφe Q 1 2πσφ 2E b cos2 φe p(φe )dφe N0 ∞ ∞ 1 2 φ2 e exp − x+ 2 2Eb 2φ 2 σφ cos e −∞ N0 132 dxdφe Problem 6.17: The log-likelihood function of the symbol timing may be expressed in terms of the equivalent low-pass signals as 1 N0 1 N0 1 N0 Λ L (τ ) = = = r (t)sl ∗ (t; τ )dt ∗∗ n In g (t − nT − τ )dt T0 r (t) T0 n In ∗ y n (τ ) where yn (τ ) = T0 r (t)g ∗(t − nT − τ )dt. A necessary condition for τ to be the ML estimate of τ is ˆ dΛL (τ ) τ =0⇒ [ n In yn (τ ) + n In yn (τ )] = 0 ⇒ ∗d d ∗ n In dτ yn (τ ) + n In dτ yn (τ ) = 0 d dτ ∗ ∗ If we express yn (τ ) into its real and imaginary parts : yn (τ ) = an (τ ) + jbn (τ ), the above expression simplifies to the following condition for the ML estimate of the timing τ ˆ [In ] n d an (τ ) + dτ [In ] n d bn (τ ) = 0 dτ Problem 6.18: We follow the exact same steps of the derivation found in Sec. 6.4. For a PAM signal In ∗ = In and Jn = 0. Since the pulse g (t) is real, it follows that B (τ ) in expression (6.4-6) is zero, therefore (6.4-7) can be rewritten as ΛL (φ, τ ) = A(τ ) cos φ where A(τ ) = 1 N0 In yn (τ ) Then the necessary conditions for the estimates of φ and τ to be the ML estimates (6.4-8) and (6.4-9) give ˆ φM L = 0 and In n d [yn (τ )]τ =ˆM L = 0 τ dτ 133 Problem 6.19: The derivation for the ML estimates of φ and τ for an offset QPSK signal follow the derivation found in Sec. 6.4, with the added simplification that, since w (t) = g (t − T /2), we have that xn (τ ) = yn (τ + T /2). 134 CHAPTER 7 Problem 7.1 : I (xj ; Y ) = Since Q −1 i=0 P (yi |xj ) log P (yi|xj ) P (y i ) q −1 j =0 we have : P (xj ) = P ( Xj ) = 1 P (xj )=0 q −1 I (X ; Y ) = P (xj )=0 CP (xj ) j =0 P (xj )I (xj ; Y ) = = C P (xj )=0 P (xj ) = C = maxP (xj ) I (X ; Y ) Thus, the given set of P (xj ) maximizes I (X ; Y ) and the condition is sufficient. To prove that the condition is necessary, we proceed as follows : Since P (xj ) satisfies the −1 condition q=0 P (xj ) = 1, we form the cost function : j C (X ) = I (X ; Y ) − λ P (xj ) − 1 q −1 j =0 and use the Lagrange multiplier method to maximize C (X ). The partial derivative of C (X ) with respect to all P (Xj ) is : ∂C (X ) ∂P (xk ) q −1 q −1 = ∂P ∂xk ) j =0 P (xj )I (xj ; Y ) − λ j =0 P (xj ) + λ ( q −1 ∂ = I (xk ; Y ) + j =0 P (xj ) ∂P (xk ) I (xj ; Y ) − λ = 0 But : q −1 j =0 P (xj ) ∂P ∂xk ) I (xj ; Y ) = − log e ( q −1 j =0 P (xj ) Q −1 i=0 P (y |x ) ∂P yi ij P (yi|xj ) PPy(iy|i )j ) −[P (yi )]2 ∂P ((xk)) (x q −1 P (xj )P (yi |xj ) j =0 P (yi ) = − log e Q −1 i=0 = − log e Q−1 P (yi ) i=0 P (yi ) P (yi |xk ) P (yi|xk ) = − log e Therefore: q −1 I (xk ; Y ) + j =0 P (xj ) ∂ I (xj ; Y ) − λ = 0 ⇒ I (xk ; Y ) = λ + log e, ∂P (xk ) Now, we consider two cases : 135 ∀ xk (i) If there exists a set of P (xk ) such that : q −1 k =0 ∂C (X ) =0 ∂P (xk ) P (xk ) = 1, 0 ≤ P (xk ) ≤ 1, k = 0, 1, ..., q − 1 and then this set will maximize I (X ; Y ), since I (X ; Y ) is a convex function of P (xk ). We have : C = maxP (xj ) I (X ; Y ) = q −1 j =0 = q −1 j =0 P (xj )I (xj ; Y ) P (xj ) [λ + log e] = λ + log e = I (xj ; Y ) This provides a sufficient condition for finding a set of P (xk ) which maximizes I (X ; Y ), for a symmetric memoryless channel. (ii) If the set {P (xk )} does not satisfy 0 ≤ P (xk ) ≤ 1, k = 0, 1, ..., q − 1, since I (X ; Y ) is a convex function of P (xk ), necessary and sufficient conditions on P (xk ) for maximizing I (X ; Y ) are : ∂I (X ; Y ) ∂I (X ; Y ) = µ, for P (xk ) > 0, ≤ µ, for P (xk ) = 0 ∂P (xk ) ∂P (xk ) Hence : I (xk ; Y ) = µ + log e, P (xk ) = 0 I (xk ; Y ) ≤ µ + log e, P (xk ) = 0 is the necessary and sufficient condition on P (xk ) for maximizing I (X ; Y ) and µ + log e = C. Problem 7.2 : (a) For a set of equally probable inputs with probability 1/M, we have : I (xk ; Y ) = M −1 i=0 (| P (yi|xk ) log P Py(iyx)k ) i (x = P (yk |xk ) log P Py(k |k )k ) + y i=k (| P (yi |xk ) log P Py(iyx)k ) i But ∀i: M −1 P (y i ) = Hence : j =0 P (yi|xj ) = 1 1 P (yi|xi ) + M M P (yi|xj ) = j =i 1 p 1 1 − p + (M − 1) = M M −1 M −p I (xk ; Y ) = (1 − p) log (1/M) + (M − 1) Mp 1 log p/M −1 1 − 1/M p = (1 − p) log (M (1 − p)) + p log MM1 − = log M + (1 − p) log(1 − p) + p log Mp 1 − 136 which is the same for all k = 0, 1, ...M − 1. Hence, this set of {P (xk ) = 1/M } satisfies the condition of Probl. 7.1. (b) From part (a) : C = log M + (1 − p) log(1 − p) + p log p M −1 A plot of the capacity is given in the following figure. We note that the capacity of the channel is zero when all transitions are equally likely (i.e. when 1 − p = Mp 1 ⇒ p = M −1 or: p = − M 0.5, M = 2; p = 0.75, M = 4; p = 0.875, M = 8). Problem 7.2 3 Capacity (bits/channel use) 2.5 M=8 2 1.5 M=4 1 M=2 0.5 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 Error probability p 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Problem 7.3 : In all of these channels, we assume a set of {P (xi )} which, we think, may give the maximum I (X ; Y ) and see if this set of {P (xi )} satisfies the condition of Probl. 7.1(or relationship 7-121). Since all the channels exhibit symmetries, the set of {P (xi )} that we examine first, is the equiprobable distribution. (a) Suppose P (xi) = 1/4, ∀i. Then : P (y1) = P (y1|x1 )P (x1 ) + P (y1|x4 )P (x4 ) = 1/4. Similarly P (yj ) = 1/4, ∀j . Hence : 4 I (x1 ; Y ) = j =1 P (yj |x1 ) log 1 1/2 1 1/2 P (yj |x1 ) = log + log = log 2 = 1 P (y j ) 2 1/4 2 1/4 Similarly : I (xi ; Y ) = 1, i = 2, 3, 4. Hence this set of input probabilities satisfies the condition of Probl. 7.1 and : C = 1 bit/symbol sent (bit/channel use) 137 (b) We assume that P (xi ) = 1/2, i = 1, 2. Then P (y1 ) = 1/4, j = 2, 3, 4. Hence : 4 I (x1 ; Y ) = j =1 P (yj |x1 ) log 1 2 1 3 + 1 6 = 1 4 and similarly P (yj ) = 1 1/3 1 1/6 P (yj |x1 ) = 2 log + 2 log = 0.0817 P (y j ) 3 1/4 6 1/4 and the same is true for I (x2 ; Y ). Thus : C = 0.0817 bits/symbol sent (c) We assume that P (xi ) = 1/3, i = 1, 2, 3. Then P (y1) = P (yj ) = 1/3, j = 2, 3. Hence : 3 I (x1 ; Y ) = j =1 P (yj |x1 ) log 1 3 1 2 + 1 3 + 1 6 = 1 3 and similarly 1 1/2 1 1/3 1 1/6 P (yj |x1 ) = log + log + log = 0.1258 P (y j ) 2 1/3 3 1/3 6 1/3 and the same is true for I (x2 ; Y ), I (x3 ; Y ). Thus : C = 0.1258 bits/symbol sent Problem 7.4 : We expect the first channel (with exhibits a certain symmetry) to achieve its capacity through equiprobable input symbols; the second one not. (a) We assume that P (xi ) = 1/2, i = 1, 2. Then P (y1) = P (y3) = 0.35, . P (y2 ) = 0.3. Hence : 3 I (x1 ; Y ) = j =1 P (yj |x1 ) log 1 2 (0.6 + 0.1) = 0.35 and similarly 0.6 0.3 0.1 P (yj |x1 ) = 0.6 log + 0.3 log + 0.1 log = 0.2858 P (y j ) 0.35 0.3 0.35 and the same is true for I (x2 ; Y ). Thus, equally likely input symbols maximize the information rate through the channel and : C = 0.2858 bits/symbol sent (b) We assume that P (xi ) = 1/2, i = 1, 2. Then P (y1) = P (y2) = 0.2, P (y3) = 0.35. Hence : 3 I (x1 ; Y ) = j =1 P (yj |x1 ) log 1 2 (0.6 + 0.3) = 0.45, and similarly 0.6 0.3 0.1 P (yj |x1 ) = 0.6 log + 0.3 log + 0.1 log = 0.244 P (y j ) 0.45 0.2 0.35 138 But : 3 I (x2 ; Y ) = j =1 P (yj |x2 ) log P (yj |x2 ) 0.3 0.1 0.6 = 0.3 log + 0.1 log + 0.6 log = 0.191 P (y j ) 0.45 0.2 0.35 Since I (x1 ; Y ) = I (x2 ; Y ) the equiprobable input distribution does not maximize the information rate through the channel. To determine P (x1 ), P (x2 ) that give the channel capacity, we assume that P (x1 ) = a, P (x2 ) = 1 − a; then we find P (yi), express I (X ; Y ) as a function of a and set its derivative with respect to a equal to zero. Problem 7.5 : (a) Relationship (7-1-31) gives : C = W log 1 + Pav W N0 = 25.9 Kbits/ sec (b) From Table 3-5-2 we see that logarithmic PCM uses 7-8 bits/sample and since we sample the speech signal at 8 KHz, this requires 56 to 64 Kbits/sec for speech transmission. Clearly, the above channel cannot support this transmission rate. (c) The achievable transmission rate is : 0.7C = 18.2 Kbits/ sec From Table 3-5-2 we see that linear predictive coding (LPC) and adaptive delta modulation (ADM) are viable source coding methods for speech transmission over this channel. Problem 7.6 : (a) We assume that P (xi ) = 1/2, i = 1, 2. Then P (y1) = P (yj ) = 1/4, j = 2, 3, 4. Hence : 1 2 1 (1 2 − p) + 1 p = 2 1 4 and similarly P (yj |x1 ) (1−p)/2 2 4 1 I (x1 ; Y ) = + 2 1 p log p/4 j =1 P (yj |x1 ) log P (yj ) = 2 2 (1 − p) log 1/4 2 1/ = 1 + p log p + (1 − p) log(1 − p) and the same is true for I (x2 ; Y ). Thus, equiprobable input symbols achieve the channel capacity C = 1 + p log p + (1 − p) log(1 − p) bits/symbol sent 139 (b) We note that the above capacity is the same to the capacity of the binary symmetric channel. Indeed, if we consider the grouping of the output symbols into a = {y1 , y2 } and b = {y3 , y4} we get a binary symmetric channel, with transition probabilities: P (a|x1 ) = P (y1|x1 ) + P (y2|x1 ) = (1 − p), P (a|x2 ) = p, etc. Problem 7.7 : We assume that P (xi ) = 1/3, i = 1, 2, 3. Then P (y1 ) = P (yj ) = 1/3, j = 2, 3. Hence : 1 3 ((1 − p) + p) = 1 3 and similarly P (y |x ) (1−p) p 3 j1 I (x1 ; Y ) = j =1 P (yj |x1 ) log P (yj ) = (1 − p) log 1/3 + p log 1/3 = log 3 + p log p + (1 − p) log(1 − p) and the same is true for I (x2 ; Y ), I (x3 ; Y ). Thus, equiprobable input symbols achieve the channel capacity : C = log 3 + p log p + (1 − p) log(1 − p) bits/symbol sent Problem 7.8 : (a) the probability that a codeword transmitted over the BSC is received correctly, is equal to the probability that all R bits are received correctly. Since each bit transmission is independent from the others : P (correct codeword) = (1 − p)R (b) P ( at least one bit error in the codeword) = 1 − P (correct codeword) = 1 − (1 − p)R (c) ne P ( ne or less errors in R bits) = i=1 Ri p (1 − p)R−i i (d) For R = 5, p = 0.01, ne = 5 : (1 − p)R = 0.951 1 − (1 − p)R = 0.049 Ri ne R−i = 1 − (1 − p)R = 0.049 i=1 i p (1 − p) 140 Problem 7.9 : Let X = (X1 , X2 , ..., Xn ), Y = (Y1 , Y2 , ..., Yn ). Since the channel is memoryless : P (Y |X) = n i=1 P (Yi |Xi ) and : P (Y|X) I (X ; Y ) = X Y P (X, Y ) log P (Y) = X Y P (X, Y ) log i P (Yi |Xi ) P (Y) For statistically independent input symbols : n i=1 n i=1 I ( Xi ; Y i ) = = X Xi Y Yi (| P (Xi , Yi) log P PY(iYXi ) i) P (X, Y ) log i P (Yi |Xi ) P (Yi ) i Then : I (X ; Y ) − n i=1 X = Y P (Y ) log ≤ Y P (Y ) =( Y Y i P (Yi ) i P (Y) P (X, Y ) log I ( Xi ; Y i ) = P (Yi ) i P (Y) P (Yi ) i P (Y) P (Y i ) − = Y P (Y ) ln P (Yi ) i P (Y) log e − 1 log e Y P (Y )) log e = (1 − 1) log e = 0 where we have exploited the fact that : ln u ≤ u − 1, with equality iff u = 1. Therefore : I (X; Y ) ≤ n=1 I (Xi ; Yi) with equality iff the set of input symbols is statistically independent. i Problem 7.10 : P (X = 0) = a, P (X = 1) = 1 − a. Then : P (Y = 0) = (1 − p)a, P (Y = e) = p(1 − a + a) = p, P (Y = 1) = (1 − p)(1 − a). (a) I (X ; Y ) = 2 i=1 P (yj |xi ) 3 j =1 P (yj |xi )P (xi ) log P (yj ) 1 1 = a(1 − p) log a(1−pp) + ap log p + (1 − a)p log p + (1 − a)(1 − p) log (1−a−p−p) − p p )(1 = −(1 − p) [a log a + (1 − a) log(1 − a)] Note that the term − [a log a + (1 − a) log(1 − a)] is the entropy of the source. 141 (b) The value of a that maximizes I (X ; Y ) is found from : a 1−a dI (X ; Y ) = 0 ⇒ log a + log e − log(1 − a) − log e = 0 ⇒ a = 1/2 da a 1−a With this value of a, the resulting channel capacity is : C = I (X ; Y )|a=1/2 = 1 − p bits/channel use | (c) I (x; y ) = log PP(yyx) . Hence : () 1p I (0; 0) = log (1−−)/2 = 1 p 1p I (1; 1) = log (1−−)/2 = 1 p I (0; e) = log p = 0 p I (1; e) = log p = 0 p Problem 7.11 : (a) The cutoff rate for the binary input, ternary output channel is given by : 2 i=0 R3 = max − log pj 1 j =0 Pj 2 P (i|j ) To maximize the term inside the brackets we want to minimize the argument S of the log function : S = 2 i=0 1 j =0 Pj 2 P (i|j ) . Suppose that P0 = x, P1 = 1 − x. Then : √ √ √ √2 √2 √ S = x 1 − p − a + (1 − x) p + (x a + (1 − x) a) + x p + (1 − x) 1 − p − a √ √ = 2 1 − a − 2 p − p2 − ap x2 − 2 1 − a − 2 p − p2 − ap x + 1 By setting : 0. Then : dS dx = 0, we obtain x = 1/2 which corresponds to a minimum for S, since √ 1 + a + 2 p − p2 − ap R3 = − log S = − log 2 142 2 d2 S | dx2 x=1/2 = 1 − log 1 + a + 2 p(1 − p − a) > (b) For β = 0.65 N0 /2, we have : p= a= √1 πN0 √1 πN0 √2 ∞ Ec ) /N0) = Q β exp(−(x + √2 β Ec ) /N0 ) = Q −β exp(−(x + 0.65 + 2Ec /N0 2Ec /N0 − 0.65 − Q 2Ec /N0 + 0.65 The plot of R3 is given in the following figure. In this figure, we have also included the plot of 2 √ R∞ = log . As we see the difference in performance between continuous-output 1+exp(− Ec /N0 ) (soft-decision-decoding , R∞ ) and ternary output (R3 ) is approximately 1 dB. Problem 7.11 0 10 Ro Bits R3 −1 10 −2 10 −15 −10 −5 0 5 10 SNR (dB) Problem 7.12 : The overall channel is a binary symmetric channel with crossover probability p. To find p note that an error occurs if an odd number of channels produce an error. Thus : p= k =odd n k k (1 − )n−k Using the results of Problem 5.45, we find that : p= 1 1 − (1 − 2 )2 2 and therefore : C = 1 − H (p ) If n → ∞, then (1 − 2 )n → 0 and p → 1 . In this case 2 1 C = lim C (n) = 1 − H ( ) = 0 n→∞ 2 143 Problem 7.13 : (a) The capacity of the channel is : C1 = max[H (Y ) − H (Y |X )] P (x) But, H (Y |X ) = 0 and therefore, C1 = maxP (x) H (Y ) = 1 which is achieved for P (0) = P (1) = 1 . 2 (b) Let q be the probability of the input symbol 0, and thus (1 − q ) the probability of the input symbol 1. Then : P (x)H (Y |X = x) H (Y | X ) = x = qH (Y |X = 0) + (1 − q )H (Y |X = 1) = (1 − q )H (Y |X = 1) = (1 − q )H (0.5) = (1 − q ) The probability mass function of the output symbols is : P (Y = c) = qP (Y = c|X = 0) + (1 − q )P (Y = c|X = 1) = q + (1 − q )0.5 = 0.5 + 0.5q P (Y = d) = (1 − q )0.5 = 0.5 − 0.5q Hence : C2 = max[H (0.5 + 0.5q ) − (1 − q )] q To find the probability q that achieves the maximum, we set the derivative of C2 with respect to q equal to 0. Thus, 1 0.5 ϑC2 = 0 = 1 − [0.5 log2 (0.5 + 0.5q ) + (0.5 + 0.5q ) ϑq 0.5 + 0.5q ln 2 −0.5 1 −[−0.5 log2 (0.5 − 0.5q ) + (0.5 − 0.5q ) 0.5 − 0.5q ln 2 = 1 + 0.5 log2 (0.5 − 0.5q ) − 0.5 log2 (0.5 + 0.5q ) Therefore : log2 3 0.5 − 0.5q = −2 =⇒ q = 0.5 + 0.5q 5 and the channel capacity is : 2 1 C2 = H ( ) − = 0.3219 5 5 (c) The transition probability matrix of the third channel can be written as : 1 1 Q = Q1 + Q2 2 2 144 where Q1 , Q2 are the transition probability matrices of channel 1 and channel 2 respectively. We have assumed that the output space of both channels has been augmented by adding two new symbols so that the size of the matrices Q, Q1 and Q2 is the same. The transition probabilities to these newly added output symbols is equal to zero. Using the fact that the function I (p; Q) is a convex function in Q we obtain : C = max I (X ; Y ) = max I (p; Q) p p 1 1 = max I (p; Q1 + Q2 ) p 2 2 1 1 max I (p; Q1 ) + max I (p; Q2 ) ≤ 2p 2p 1 1 C1 + C2 = 2 2 Since Q1 and Q2 are different, the inequality is strict. Hence : 1 1 C < C1 + C2 2 2 Problem 7.14 : The capacity of a channel is : C = max I (X ; Y ) = max[H (Y ) − H (Y |X )] = max[H (X ) − H (X |Y )] p(x) p(x) p(x) Since in general H (X |Y ) ≥ 0 and H (Y |X ) ≥ 0, we obtain : C ≤ min{max[H (Y )], max[H (X )]} However, the maximum of H (X ) is attained when X is uniformly distributed, in which case max[H (X )] = log |X |. Similarly : max[H (Y )] = log |Y| and by substituting in the previous inequality, we obtain C ≤ min{max[H (Y )], max[H (X )]} = min{log |Y|, log |X |} = min{log M, log N } Problem 7.15 : (a) Let q be the probability of the input symbol 0, and therefore (1 − q ) the probability of the input symbol 1. Then : H (Y | X ) = P (x)H (Y |X = x) x 145 = qH (Y |X = 0) + (1 − q )H (Y |X = 1) = (1 − q )H (Y |X = 1) = (1 − q )H ( ) The probability mass function of the output symbols is : P (Y = 0) = qP (Y = 0|X = 0) + (1 − q )P (Y = 0|X = 1) = q + (1 − q )(1 − ) = 1 − + q P (Y = 1) = (1 − q ) = − q Hence : C = max[H ( − q ) − (1 − q )H ( )] q To find the probability q that achieves the maximum, we set the derivative of C with respect to q equal to 0. Thus : ϑC = 0 = H ( ) + log2 ( − q ) − log2 (1 − + q ) ϑq Therefore : H( ) −q ( − 1) H( ) + 2− log2 =− =⇒ q = H( ) 1− +q (1 + 2− ) and the channel capacity is H( ) H( ) 2− H ( )2 − − C =H H( ) H( ) 1 + 2− (1 + 2− ) (b) If → 0, then using L’Hospital’s rule we find that lim →0 H( ) = ∞, lim →0 H( ) 2− H( ) =0 and therefore lim C ( ) = H (0) = 0 →0 If = 0.5, then H ( ) = 1 and C = H ( 1 ) − 2 = 0.3219. In this case the probability of the input 5 5 symbol 0 is H( ) + 2− 0.5 + 0.25 × (0.5 − 1) ( − 1) 3 q= = = H( ) 0.5 × (1 + 0.25) 5 (1 + 2− ) If = 1, then C = H (0.5) = 1. The input distribution that achieves capacity is P (0) = P (1) = 0.5. 146 (c) The following figure shows the topology of the cascade channels. If we start at the input labeled 0, then the output will be 0. If however we transmit a 1, then the output will be zero with probability P (Y = 0|X = 1) = (1 − ) + (1 − ) + 2 (1 − ) + · · · = (1 − )(1 + + 2 + · · ·) 1− n = 1− =1− n 1− Thus, the resulting system is equivalent to a Z channel with 0 1 (d) As n → ∞, n 1 1 ✚ ✚ 1 − ✚✚ 1 − ✚✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ ✚ 1 1 ... = n . ✚ 1 − ✚✚ ✚ ✚ 0 1 → 0 and the capacity of the channel goes to 0. Problem 7.16 : The SNR is : P 10 2P = = −9 = 104 6 N0 2W 2W 10 × 10 Thus the capacity of the channel is : SNR = C = W log2 (1 + P ) = 106 log2 (1 + 10000) ≈ 13.2879 × 106 bits/sec N0 W Problem 7.17 : The capacity of the additive white Gaussian channel is : C= P 1 log 1 + 2 N0 W For the nonwhite Gaussian noise channel, although the noise power is equal to the noise power in the white Gaussian noise channel, the capacity is higher, The reason is that since noise samples are correlated, knowledge of the previous noise samples provides partial information on the future noise samples and therefore reduces their effective variance. 147 Problem 7.18 : (a) The capacity of the binary symmetric channel with crossover probability is : C = 1 − H( ) where H ( ) is the binary entropy function. The rate distortion function of a zero mean Gaussian source with variance σ 2 per sample is : R (D ) = 1 2 log2 0 σ2 D D ≤ σ2 D > σ2 Since C > 0, we obtain : σ2 σ2 1 log2 ≤ 1 − H ( ) =⇒ 2(1−H ( )) ≤ D 2 D 2 and therefore, the minimum value of the distortion attainable at the output of the channel is : Dmin = σ2 22(1−H ( )) (b) The capacity of the additive Gaussian channel is : C= Hence : 1 P log2 1 + 2 2 σn σ2 σ2 σ2 1 log2 ≤ C =⇒ 2C ≤ D =⇒ P ≤D 2 D 2 1 + σ2 n The minimum attainable distortion is : Dmin = σ2 P 1 + σ2 n (c) Here the source samples are dependent and therefore one sample provides information about the other samples. This means that we can achieve better results compared to the memoryless case at a given rate. In other words the distortion at a given rate for a source with memory is less than the distortion for a comparable source with memory. Differential coding methods discussed in Chapter 3 are suitable for such sources. Problem 7.19 : (a) The entropy of the source is : H (X ) = H (0.3) = 0.8813 148 and the capacity of the channel : C = 1 − H (0.1) = 1 − 0.469 = 0.531 If the source is directly connected to the channel, then the probability of error at the destination is : P (error) = P (X = 0)P (Y = 1|X = 0) + P (X = 1)P (Y = 0|X = 1) = 0.3 × 0.1 + 0.7 × 0.1 = 0.1 (b) Since H (X ) > C , some distortion at the output of the channel is inevitable. To find the minimum distortion, we set R(D ) = C . For a Bernoulli type of source : H (p) − H (D ) 0 ≤ D ≤ min(p, 1 − p) 0 otherwise R (D ) = and therefore, R(D ) = H (p) − H (D ) = H (0.3) − H (D ). If we let R(D ) = C = 0.531, we obtain H (D ) = 0.3503 =⇒ D = min(0.07, 0.93) = 0.07 The probability of error is : P (error) ≤ D = 0.07 (c) For reliable transmission we must have : H (X ) = C = 1 − H ( ). Hence, with H (X ) = 0.8813 we obtain 0.8813 = 1 − H ( ) =⇒ < 0.016 or > 0.984 Problem 7.20 : Both channels can be viewed as binary symmetric channels with crossover probability the probability of decoding a bit erroneously. Since : Pb = Q Q 2Eb N0 Eb N0 antipodal signalling orthogonal signalling the capacity of the channel is : C= 1−H Q 1−H Q 2Eb N0 Eb N0 antipodal signalling orthogonal signalling 149 In the next figure we plot the capacity of the channel as a function of schemes. Eb N0 for the two signalling 1 0.9 0.8 Antipodal Signalling Capacity C 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 Orthogonal Signalling 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 SNR dB 4 6 8 10 Problem 7.21 : (a) Since for each time slot [mT, (m + 1)T ] we have f1 (t) = ±f2 (t), the signals are dependent and thus only one dimension is needed to represent them in the interval [mT, (m + 1)T ]. In this case the dimensionality of the signal space is upper bounded by the number of the different time slots used to transmit the message signals. (b) If f1 (t) = αf2 (t), then the dimensionality of the signal space over each time slot is at most 2. Since there are n slots over which we transmit the message signals, the dimensionality of the signal space is upper bounded by 2n. (c) Let the decoding rule be that the first codeword is decoded when r is received if p(r|x1) > p(r|x2 ) The set of r that decode into x1 is R1 = {r : p(r|x1 ) > p(r|x2 )} The characteristic function of this set χ1 (r) is by definition equal to 0 if r ∈ R1 and equal to 1 if r ∈ R1 . The characteristic function can be bounded as 1 − χ1 (r) ≤ 150 p(r|x2 ) p(r|x1 ) 1 2 This inequality is true if χ(r) = 1 because the right side is nonnegative. It is also true if χ(r) = 0 because in this case p(r|x2 ) > p(r|x1) and therefore, p(r|x2 ) p(r|x1 ) p(r|x2 ) 1≤ =⇒ 1 ≤ p(r|x1 ) 1 2 Given that the first codeword is sent, then the probability of error is P (error|x1 ) = ··· = ··· ≤ RN ··· = RN −R1 ··· RN p(r|x1 )dr p(r|x1 )[1 − χ1 (r)]dr p(r|x2 ) p(r|x1 ) p(r|x1 ) 1 2 dr p(r|x1 )p(r|x2)dr RN (d) The result follows immediately if we use the union bound on the probability of error. Thus, assuming that xm was transmitted, then taking the signals xm , m = m, one at a time and ignoring the presence of the rest, we can write P (error|xm ) ≤ ··· RN 1≤m ≤M m =m p(r|xm )p(r|xm )dr (e) Let r = xm + n with n an N -dimensional zero-mean Gaussian random variable with variance per dimension equal to σ 2 = N0 . Then, 2 p(r|xm ) = p(n) p(r|xm ) = p(n + xm − xm ) and and therefore : ··· RN ··· = − =e − =e − =e p(r|xm )p(r|xm )dr 1 RN (πN0 ) 4 |xm −x |2 m 4N0 |xm −xm |2 4N0 ··· ··· |n|2 1 − 2N Ne RN 1 RN − |n+xm −x |2 m 2N0 dn (πN0 ) 4 2|n|2 +|xm −x |2 /2+2n·(xm −x ) m m 1 − 2N0 e dn N (πN0 ) 2 0 Ne − N (πN0 ) 2 |xm −x |2 m 4N0 151 e |n+ xm −x m |2 2 N0 dn Using the union bound in part (d), we obtain : − P (error|xm (t) sent) ≤ e |xm −x |2 m 4N0 1≤m ≤M m =m Problem 7.22 : Equation (7.3-2) gives that the cutoff rate R2 with two quantization levels is R2 = max − log2 p in 1 2 1 out=0 in=0 pin P (out|in) By naming the argument of the log2 function as S , the above corresponds to R2 = − log2 min S pin Suppose the probabilities of the input symbols are p0 = x, p1 = 1 − x. Also, the probability of error for the BSC is p, where p is the error rate for the modulation method employed. Then √ √ √ √ S = [x 1 − p + (1 − x) x]2 + [x p + (1 − x) 1 − p]2 = 2x2 (1 − 2 p(1 − p)) − 2x(1 − 2 p(1 − p)) + 1 By taking the first derivative of S w.r.t. x we find that the extremum point is dS = 0 ⇒ 4x(1 − 2 p(1 − p)) − 2(1 − 2 p(1 − p)) = 0 ⇒ x = 1/2 dx and the corresponding S is min S = S|x=1/2 = 1 + 2 p(1 − p) 2 Hence, R2 = − log2 min S = 1 − log2 1 + 4p(1 − p) The plot of the comparison between R0 and R2 is given in the following figure: 152 R0 vs R2 for BSC 1 0.9 0.8 bits/dimension 0.7 0.6 R 0 0.5 R2 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 γ (dB) c As we see, the loss in performance when a two-level hard decision (instead of a soft-decision) is employed is approximately 2 dB. Problem 7.23 : The plot with the cutoff rate R2 for the BSC, when the three different modulation schemes are employed is given in the following figure: R2 for BSC 1 0.9 Antipodal Orthogonal DPSK 0.8 bits/dimension 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 γc (dB) As we see, orthogonal signaling is 3 dB worse than antipodal signaling. Also, DPSK is the worst scheme in very low SNR’s, but approaches antipodal signaling performance as the SNR goes up. Both these conclusions agree with the well-known results on the performance of these schemes, as given by their error probabilities given in Chapter 5. 153 Problem 7.24 : Remember that the capacity of the BSC is C = p log2 2p + (1 − p) log2 (2(1 − p)) where p is the error probability (for binary antipodal modulation for this particular case). Then, the plot with the comparison of the capacity vs the cutoff rate R2 for the BSC, with antipodal signaling, is given in the following figure: C vs R2 for BSC 1 0.9 0.8 bits/dimension 0.7 0.6 C 0.5 R2 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 γ (dB) c We notice that the difference between the hard-decision cutoff rate and the capacity of the channel is approximately 2.5 to 3 dB. Problem 7.25 : From expression (7.2-31) we have that R0 = − log2 M M l=1 m=1 2 pl pm e−dlm /4N0 and, since we are given that equiprobable input symbols maximize R0 , pl = pm = 1/M and the above expression becomes R0 = − log2 1 M2 M M 2 e−dlm /4N0 l=1 m=1 The M-ary PSK constellation points are symmetrically spaced around the unit circle. Hence, the sum of the distances between them is the same, independent of the reference point, or M −d2 /4N0 lm is the same for any l = 0, 1, ...M − 1. Hence, m=1 e 154 2 M R0 = − log2 M 2 M e−d0m /4N0 l=1 2 = log2 M − log2 M e−d0m /4N0 l=1 The distance of equally spaced points around a circle with radius R0 = log2 M − log2 M √ √ Ec is dm = 2 Ec sin mπ . So M 2 mπ M e−(Ec /N0 ) sin l=1 The plot of R0 for the various levels of M -ary PSK is given in the following figure: R0 for M−ary PSK 4 M=16 3.5 3 M=8 bits/dimension 2.5 2 M=4 1.5 1 M=2 0.5 0 −10 −5 0 5 10 γ (dB) c 155 15 20 25 CHAPTER 8 Problem 8.1 : (a) Interchanging the first and third rows, we obtain the systematic form : 1001110 G= 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0011101 (b) H = P T |I4 = 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 (c) Since we have a (7,3) code, there are 23 = 8 valid codewords, and 24 possible syndromes. From these syndromes the all-zero one corresponds to no error, 7 will correspond to single errors and 8 will correspond to double errors (the choice is not unique) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Error 00 00 00 00 00 01 10 00 00 00 00 00 01 10 10 00 pattern 000 000 001 010 100 000 000 000 000 001 010 100 000 000 001 110 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Syndrome 0000 0001 0010 0100 1000 1101 0111 1110 1111 1100 1010 0110 0011 1001 0101 1011 (d) We note that there are 3 linearly independent columns in H, hence there is a codeword Cm with weight wm =4 such that Cm HT = 0. Accordingly : dmin = 4. This can be also obtained by generating all 8 codewords for this code and checking their minimum weight. 156 (e) 101 generates the codeword : 101 → C = 1010011. Then : CHT = [0000]. Problem 8.2 : Ga = 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Message Xm 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cma 00 00 01 01 10 10 11 11 01 01 00 00 11 11 10 10 0 0 0 1 Gb = = Xm Ga 000 101 011 110 110 011 101 000 100 001 111 010 010 111 001 100 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 Cmb = Xm Gb 00000 00101 01011 01110 10011 10110 11000 11101 00010 00111 01001 01100 10001 10100 11010 11111 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 As we see, the two generator matrices generate the same set of codewords. Problem 8.3 : The weight distribution of the (7,4) Hamming code is (n = 7) : A(x) = 1 [(1 + x)7 + 7(1 + x)3 (1 − x)4 ] 8 = 1 [8 + 56x3 + 56x4 + 8x7 ] 8 = 1 + 7x3 + 7x4 + x7 Hence, we have 1 codeword of weight zero, 7 codewords of weight 3, 7 codewords of weight 4, and one codeword of weight 7. which agrees with the codewords given in Table 8-1-2. 157 Problem 8.4: (a) The generator polynomial for the (15,11) Hamming code is given as g (p) = p4 + p + 1. We will express the powers pl as : pl = Ql (p)g (p) + Rl (p) l = 4, 5, ...14, and the polynomial Rl (p) will give the parity matrix P, so that G will be G = [I11 |P] . We have : p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 p11 p12 p13 p14 = = = = = = = = = = = g (p ) + p + 1 pg (p) + p2 + p p 2 g (p ) + p 3 + p 2 (p3 + 1)g (p) + p3 + p + 1 (p4 + p + 1)g (p) + p2 + 1 (p5 + p2 + p)g (p) + p3 + p (p6 + p3 + p2 + 1)g (p) + p2 + p + 1 (p7 + p4 + p3 + p)g (p) + p3 + p2 + p (p8 + p5 + p4 + p2 + 1)g (p) + p3 + p2 + p + 1 (p9 + p6 + p5 + p3 + p + 1)g (p) + p3 + p2 + 1 (p10 + p7 + p6 + p4 + p2 + p + 1)g (p) + p3 + 1 Using Rl (p) (with l = 4 corresponding to the last row of G,... l = 14 corresponding to the first row) for the parity matrix P we obtain : G= 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 (b) In order to obtain the generator polynomial for the dual code, we first factor p15 + 1 into : p15+1 = g (p)h(p) to obtain the parity polynomial h(p) = (p15 + 1)/g (p) = p11 + p8 + p7 + p5 + p3 + p2 + p + 1. Then, the generator polynomial for the dual code is given by : p11 h(p−1 ) = 1 + p3 + p4 + p6 + p8 + p9 + p10 + p11 158 Problem 8.5 : We can determine G, in a systematic form, from the generator polynomial g (p) = p3 + p2 + 1: p6 p5 p4 p3 = (p3 + p2 + p)g (p) + p2 + p = (p2 + p + 1)g (p) + p + 1 = (p + 1)g (p) + p2 + p + 1 = g (p ) + p 2 + 1 G= 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1011100 H= 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0111001 Hence, the parity check matrix for the extended code will be (according to 8-1-15) : He = 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 and in systematic form (we add rows 1,2,3 to the last one) : Hes = 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 ⇒ Ges = 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 Note that Ges can be obtained from the generator matrix G for the initial code, by adding an overall parity check bit. The code words for the extended systematic code are : Message 000 000 001 001 010 010 011 011 100 100 101 101 110 110 111 111 Xm 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Codeword Cm 00000 01101 10111 11010 00011 01110 10100 11001 00110 01011 10001 11100 00101 01000 10010 11111 159 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 An alternative way to obtain the codewords for the extended code is to add an additional check bit to the codewords of the initial (7,4) code which are given in Table 8-1-2. As we see, the minimum weight is 4 and hence : dmin = 4. Problem 8.6 : (a) We have obtained the generator matrix G for the (15,11) Hamming code in the solution of Problem 8.4. The shortened code will have a generator matrix Gs obtained by G, by dropping its first 7 rows and the first 7 columns or : 10001011 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Gs = 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 00010011 Then the possible messages and the codewords corresponding to them will be : Message Xm 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Codeword Cm 000000 001001 010011 011010 100110 101111 110101 111100 000101 001100 010110 011101 100011 101010 110000 111001 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 (b) As we see the minimum weight and hence the minimum distance is 3 : dmin = 3. Problem 8.7 : (a) g (p) = (p4 + p3 + p2 + p + 1)(p4 + p + 1)(p2 + p + 1) = p10 + p8 + p5 + p4 + p2 + p + 1 160 Factoring pl , l = 14, ...10, into pl = g (p)Ql (p) + Rl (p) we obtain the generator matrix in systematic form : p14 p13 p12 p11 p10 = (p4 + p2 + 1)g (p) + p9 + p7 + p4 + p3 + p + 1 = (p3 + p)g (p) + p9 + p8 + p7 + p6 + p4 + p2 + p = (p2 + 1)g (p) + p8 + p7 + p6 + p5 + p3 + p + 1 = pg (p) + p9 + p6 + p5 + p3 + p2 + p = g (p ) + p 8 + p 5 + p 4 + p 2 + p + 1 G= 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 ⇒ The codewords are obtained from the equation : Cm = Xm G, where Xm is the row vector containing the five message bits. (b) dmin = 7 (c) The error-correcting capability of the code is : t= dmin − 1 =3 2 (d) The error-detecting capability of the code is : dmin − 1 = 6. (e) Then : g (p) = (p15 + 1)/(p2 + p + 1) = p13 + p12 + p10 + p9 + p7 + p6 + p4 + p3 + p + 1 p14 = (p + 1)g (p) + p12 + p11 + p9 + p8 + p6 + p5 + p3 + p2 + 1 p13 = g (p) + p12 + p10 + p9 + p7 + p6 + p4 + p3 + p + 1 Hence, the generator matrix is : G= 101101101101101 011011011011011 and the valid codewords : Xm 00 01 10 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Codeword 000 101 110 011 161 Cm 00 10 11 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 The minimum distance is : dmin = 10 Problem 8.8 : The polynomial p7 +1 is factors as follows : p7 +1 = (p +1)(p3 + p2 +1)(p3 + p +1). The generator polynomials for the matrices G1 , G2 are : g1 (p) = p3 + p2 +1, g2 (p) = p3 + p +1. Hence the parity polynomials are : h1 (p) = (p7 +1)/g1(p) = p4 + p3 + p2 +1, h2 (p) = (p7 +1)/g2(p) = p4 + p2 + p +1. The generator polynomials for the matrices H1 , H2 are : p4 h1 (p−1 ) = 1+ p + p2 + p4 , p4 h2 (p−1 ) = 1 + p2 + p3 + p4 . The rows of the matrices H1 , H2 are given by : pi p4 h1/2 (p−1 ), i = 0, 1, 2, so : 1011100 H1 = 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0010111 1110100 H2 = 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0011101 Problem 8.9 : We have already generated an extended (8,4) code from the (7,4) Hamming code in Probl. 8.5. Since the generator matrix for the (7,4) Hamming code is not unique, in this problem we will construct the extended code, starting from the generator matrix given in 8-1-7 : G= Then : 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 He = 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1110100 ⇒H= 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1101001 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 We can bring this parity matrix into systematic form by adding rows 1,2,3 into the fourth row : Hes = Then : Ge,s = 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 162 Problem 8.10 : 100110 101100 G= 0 1 0 0 1 1 ⇒H= 1 1 0 0 1 0 001101 011001 Then the standard array is : 000 000000 000001 000010 000100 001000 010000 100000 100001 001 001101 001100 001111 001001 000101 011101 101101 101100 010 010011 010010 010001 010111 011011 000011 110011 110010 011 011110 011111 011100 011010 010110 001110 111110 111111 100 100110 100111 100100 100010 101110 110110 000110 000111 101 101011 101010 101001 101111 100011 111011 001011 001010 110 110101 110100 110111 110001 111101 100101 010101 010100 111 111000 111001 111010 111100 110000 101000 011000 011001 For each column, the first row is the message, the second row is the correct codeword corresponding to this message, and the rest of the rows correspond to the received words which are the sum of the valid codeword plus the corresponding error pattern (coset leader). The error patterns that this code can correct are given in the first column (all-zero codeword), and the corresponding syndromes are : Ei Si = Ei H T 000 000000 001 000001 010 000010 100 000100 101 001000 011 010000 110 100000 111 100001 We note that this code can correct all single errors and one two-bit error pattern. Problem 8.11 : G= 1001011 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 ⇒H= 0010111 163 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Then, the standard array will be : 000 0000000 0000001 0000010 0000100 0001000 0010000 0100000 1000000 1100000 1010000 1001000 1000100 1000010 1000001 0010001 0001101 001 0010111 0010110 0010101 0010011 0011111 0000111 0110111 1010111 1110111 1000111 1011111 1010011 1010101 1010110 0000110 0011010 010 0101110 0101111 0101101 0101010 0100110 0111110 0001110 1101110 1001110 1111110 1100110 1101010 1101100 1101111 0111111 0100011 011 0111001 0111000 0111011 0111101 0110001 0101001 0011001 1111001 1011001 1101001 1110001 1111101 1111010 1111001 0101001 0110101 100 1001011 1001010 1001001 1001111 1000011 1011011 1101011 0001011 0101011 0011011 0000011 0001111 0001001 0001010 1011010 1000110 101 1011100 1011101 1011110 1011000 1010100 1001100 1111100 0011100 0111100 0001100 0010100 0011000 0011110 0011101 1001101 1010001 110 1100101 1100100 1100111 1100001 1101101 1110101 1000101 0100101 0000101 0110101 0101101 0100001 0100111 0100100 1110100 1101000 111 1110010 1110011 1110000 1110110 1111010 1100010 1010010 0110010 0010010 0100010 0111010 0110110 0110000 0110011 1100011 1111111 For each column, the first row is the message, the second row is the correct codeword corresponding to this message, and the rest of the rows correspond to the received words which are the sum of the valid codeword plus the corresponding error pattern (coset leader). The error patterns that this code can correct are given in the first column (all-zero codeword), and the corresponding syndromes are : Ei Si = Ei H T 0000 0000000 0001 0000001 0010 0000010 0100 0000100 1000 0001000 0111 0010000 1110 0100000 1011 1000000 0101 1100000 11000 1010000 0011 1001000 1111 1000100 1001 1000010 1010 1000001 0110 0010001 1101 0001101 We note that this code can correct all single errors, seven two-bit error patterns, and one three164 bit error pattern. Problem 5.12 : The generator matrix for the systematic (7,4) cyclic Hamming code is given by (8-1-37) as : G= 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1110100 ⇒H= 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1101001 Then, the correctable error patterns Ei with the corresponding syndrome Si = Ei H T are : Si 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Ei 0000000 0000001 0000010 0001000 0000100 1000000 0100000 0010000 Problem 8.13 : We know that : e1 + e2 = C, where C is a valid codeword. Then : S1 + S2 = e1 HT + e2 HT = (e1 + e2 )HT = CHT = 0 since a valid codeword is orthogonal to the parity matrix. Hence : S1 + S2 = 0, and since modulo-2 addition is the same with modulo-2 subtraction : S1 − S2 = 0 ⇒ S1 = S2 Problem 8.14 : (a) Let g (p) = p8 + p6 + p4 + p2 + 1 be the generator polynomial of an (n, k ) cyclic code. Then, n − k = 8 and the rate of the code is 8 k R= =1− n n 165 8 The rate R is minimum when n is maximum subject to the constraint that R is positive. Thus, the first choice of n is n = 9. However, the generator polynomial g (p) does not divide p9 + 1 and therefore, it can not generate a (9, 1) cyclic code. The next candidate value of n is 10. In this case p10 + 1 = g (p)(p2 + 1) and therefore, n = 10 is a valid choice. The rate of the code is R = k n = 2 10 = 1. 5 (b) In the next table we list the four codewords of the (10, 2) cyclic code generated by g (p). Input X (p) 00 0 01 1 10 p 11 p+1 As it is observed from the table, the minimum linear dmin = wmin = 5. Codeword 0000000000 0101010101 1010101010 1111111111 weight of the code is 5 and since the code is (c) The coding gain of the (10, 2) cyclic code in part (a) is Gcoding = dmin R = 5 × 2 =1 10 Problem 8.15 : (a) For every n pn + 1 = (p + 1)(pn−1 + pn−2 + · · · + p + 1) where additions are modulo 2. Since p + 1 divides pn + 1 it can generate a (n, k ) cyclic code, where k = n − 1. (b) The ith row of the generator matrix has the form gi = [ 0 · · · 0 1 0 · · · 0 pi,1 ] where the 1 corresponds to the i-th column (to give a systematic code) and the pi,1 , i = 1, . . . , n − 1, can be found by solving the equations pn−i + pi,1 = pn−i mod p + 1, 1≤i≤n−1 Since pn−i mod p + 1 = 1 for every i, the generator and the parity check matrix are given by 1 ··· . . . G = . .. 0|1 . . . . , . . 0 ··· 1 | 1 H = [ 1 1 ··· 1 | 1 ] 166 (c) A vector c = [c1 , c2 , . . . , cn ] is a codeword of the (n, n − 1) cyclic code if it satisfies the condition cHt = 0. But, 1 1 cHt = 0 = c . = c1 + c2 + · · · cn . . 1 Thus, the vector c belongs to the code if it has an even weight. Therefore, the cyclic code generated by the polynomial p + 1 is a simple parity check code. Problem 8.16 : (a) The generator polynomial of degree 4 = n − k should divide the polynomial p6 + 1. Since the polynomial p6 + 1 assumes the factorization p6 + 1 = (p + 1)3 (p + 1)3 = (p + 1)(p + 1)(p2 + p + 1)(p2 + p + 1) we find that the shortest possible generator polynomial of degree 4 is g (p ) = p 4 + p 2 + 1 The ith row of the generator matrix G has the form gi = 0 · · · 0 1 0 · · · 0 pi,1 · · · pi,4 where the 1 corresponds to the i-th column (to give a systematic code) and the pi,1 , . . . , pi,4 are obtained from the relation p6−i + pi,1 p3 + pi,2 p2 pi,3 p + pi,4 = p6−i ( mod p4 + p2 + 1) Hence, p5 mod p4 + p2 + 1 = (p2 + 1)p mod p4 + p2 + 1 = p3 + p p4 mod p4 + p2 + 1 = p2 + 1 mod p4 + p2 + 1 = p2 + 1 and therefore, G= 10 01 c1 c2 c3 c4 [ [ [ [ 1010 0101 The codewords of the code are = = = = 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 167 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 (b) The minimum distance of the linear (6, 2) cyclic code is dmin = wmin = 3. Therefore, the code can correct dmin − 1 ec = = 1 error 2 Problem 8.17 : Consider two n-tuples in the same row of a standard array. Clearly, if Y1 , Y2 denote the ntuples, Y1 = Cj + e, Y2 = Ck + e, where Ck , Cj are two valid codewords, and the error pattern e is the same since they are in the same row of the standard array. Then : Y 1 + Y 2 = C j + e + C k + e = C j + Ck = C m where Cm is another valid codeword (this follows from the linearity of the code). Problem 8.18 : From Table 8-1-6 we find that the coefficients of the generator polynomial for the (15,7) BCH code are 721 → 111010001 or g (p) = p8 + p7 + p6 + p4 + 1. Then, we can determine the l-th row of the generator matrix G, using the modulo Rl (p) : pn−l = Ql (p)g (p) + Rl (p), l = 1, 2, ..., 7. Since the generator matrix of the shortened code is obtained by removing the first three rows of G, we perform the above calculations for l = 4, 5, 6, 7, only : p11 = (p3 + p2 + 1)g (p) + p4 + p3 + p2 + 1 p10 = (p2 + p)g (p) + p7 + p6 + p5 + p2 + p p9 = (p + 1)g (p) + p6 + p5 + p4 + p + 1 p8 = (p + 1)g (p) + p7 + p6 + p4 + 1 Hence : Gs = 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 Problem 8.19 : For M -ary FSK detected coherently, the bandwidth expansion factor is : W R = F SK 168 M 2 log 2 M For the Hadamard code : In time T (block transmission time), we want to transmit n bits, so for each bit we have time : Tb = T /n. Since for each bit we use binary PSK, the bandwidth requirement is approximately : W = 1/Tb = n/T. But T = k/R, hence : W= W n n R⇒ = k R k (this is a general result for binary block-encoded signals). For the specific case of a Hadamard code the number of waveforms is M = 2n, and also k = log 2 M. Hence : W R = H ad M 2 log 2 M which is the same as M -ary FSK. Problem 8.20 : From (8-1-47) of the text, the correlation coefficient between the all-zero codeword and the l-th codeword is ρl = 1 − 2wl /n, where wl is the weight of the l-th codeword. For the maximum length shift register codes : n = 2m − 1 = M − 1 (where m is the parameter of the code) and wl = 2m−1 for all codewords except the all-zero codeword. Hence : ρl = 1 − 1 1 22m−1 =− m =− m−1 2 2 −1 M −1 for all l. Since the code is linear if follows that ρ = −1/(M − 1) between any pair of codewords. Note : An alternative way to prove the above is to express each codeword in vector form as E E E ,± , ..., ± sl = ± n n n (n elements in all) where E = nEb is the energy per codeword and note that any one codeword differs from each other at exactly 2m−1 bits and agrees with the other at 2m−1 − 1 bits. Then the correlation coefficient is : Re [ρmk ] = sl · sk = | sl | | sk | E n (2m−1 · 1 + (2m−1 − 1) · (−1)) 1 1 =− =− E n M −1 n n Problem 8.21 : We know that the (7,4) Huffman code has dmin = 3 and weight distribution (Problem 8.3) : w=0 (1 codeword), w=3 (7 codewords), w=4 (7 codewords), w=7 (1 codeword). 169 Hence, for soft-decision decoding (8-1-51) : PM 24 32 γ b + 7Q γb + Q ≤ 7Q 7 7 or a looser bound (8-1-52) : PM 8γ b 24 ≤ 15Q γb 7 For hard-decision decoding (8-1-82): PM ≤ 7 m=2 where p = Q √ 1 7m 7m p (1 − p)7−m = 1 − p (1 − p)7−m = 1 − 7p(1 − p)6 − (1 − p)7 m m=0 m 2Rc γb = Q 8 γ 7b or (8-1-90) : PM ≤ 7 [4p(1 − p)]3/2 + 7 [4p(1 − p)]2 + [4p(1 − p)]7/2 or (8-1-91) : PM ≤ 14 [4p(1 − p)]3/2 Problem 8.22 : We assume that the all-zero codeword is transmitted and we determine the probability that we select codeword Cm having weight wm . We define a random variable Xi , i = 1, 2, ...wm as : Xi = 1, with probability p −1, with probability 1 − p where p is the error probability for a bit. Then, we will erroneously select a codeword Cm of weight wm , if more than wm /2 bits are in error or if wm Xi ≥ 0. We assume that p < 1/2 ; i=1 then, following the exact same procedure as in Example 2-1-7 (page 60 of the text), we show that : w m P i=1 Xi ≥ 0 ≤ [4p(1 − p)]wm /2 By applying the union bound we obtain the desired result : PM ≤ M [4p(1 − p)]wm /2 m=2 170 Problem 8.23 : (a) The encoder for the (3, 1) convolutional code is depicted in the next figure. ✛✘ ❅ ❅ ❅ ❘ ✚✙ ✒s ❅ ❅ ❅ ✲ Input k=1 1 ❅ ❅ ❘ ❅❄ ✠ ✛✘ ✒ 2 ✶ ✏✏ 3 ✏✏ ✚✙ n=3 Output æ (b) The state transition diagram for this code is depicted in the next figure. ✎ 0/000 ..... ✍✌ ❥. 00 ✒ 0/111 ✛ ❅ 1/111 0/011 ❅ ❘ ❅ ✲ 10 s ❅ ❅ 0/100❅ 1/000 1/100 01 ✠ 11 ...... ✎ ✍✌ 1/011 (c) In the next figure we draw two frames of the trellis associated with the code. Solid lines indicate an input equal to 0, whereas dotted lines correspond to an input equal to 1. 00 01 10 11 ✈ .✈000 .✈ . 111 ✑ . ✑ . ✑ ✑ . ✑✑ . . 111 . ✑ ✑ . ✈000 ✈ .✑ . .✑ . . . . ✑ . . . ✑✈ ✑ ✑  . . . . . . ✑ ✑ . . 011 ✑  ... ✑  ... ✈100 ✈ ✈ .✑ .✑ . .. .. .. ..  ..  .. 100 ✈ ✈ ✈ .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . 011 (d) The diagram used to find the transfer function is shown in the next figure. 171 D 2 NJ ✎ ❄ ✍✌ d X ✒ ❅ DNJ ❅ DJ ❅ 3 2 3 D NJ DJ ❅ D J✲ ❘ ❅ ✲ ✲ o ❙ Xb Xa Xc ❙ Xa NJ Using the flow graph results, we obtain the system Xc Xb Xd Xa = = = = D 3 NJXa + NJXb D 2 JXc + DJXd DNJXc + D 2 NJXd D 3 JXb Eliminating Xb , Xc and Xd results in T (D, N, J ) = D 8 NJ 3 (1 + NJ − D 2 NJ ) Xa = Xa 1 − D 2 NJ (1 + NJ 2 + J − D 2 J 2 ) To find the free distance of the code we set N = J = 1 in the transfer function, so that D 8 (1 − 2D 2) = D 8 + 2D 10 + · · · T1 (D ) = T (D, N, J )|N =J =1 = 2 (3 − D 2 ) 1−D Hence, dfree = 8 (e) Since there is no self loop corresponding to an input equal to 1 such that the output is the all zero sequence, the code is not catastrophic. Problem 8.24 : The code of Problem 8-23 is a (3, 1) convolutional code with K = 3. The length of the received sequence y is 15. This means that 5 symbols have been transmitted, and since we assume that the information sequence has been padded by two 0’s, the actual length of the information sequence is 3. The following figure depicts 5 frames of the trellis used by the Viterbi decoder. The numbers on the nodes denote the metric (Hamming distance) of the survivor paths (the non-survivor paths are shown with an X). In the case of a tie of two merging paths at a node, we have purged the upper path. 172 101 00 001 011 2 3 110 X X 3 X 01 111 2 X 5 4 4 4 X 10 1 4 X 4 X 11 3 3 The decoded sequence is {111, 100, 011, 100, 111} (i.e the path with the minimum final metric heavy line) and corresponds to the information sequence {1, 1, 1} followed by two zeros. Problem 8.25 : (a) The encoder for the (3, 1) convolutional code is depicted in the next figure. k =✲ 1 ✐ ✲+ ✻ ❄ ✐ ✲+ ❄ s ❅ ✲ ❄ ✲+ ✐ ✻ (b) The state transition diagram for this code is shown below ✏ 0/000 ..... ❥. ✒✑ 00 ✒ 0/011 ✛ ❅ 1/111 ❅ ❘ 0/101 ❅ ✲ 10 s ❅ ❅ 0/110 ❅ 1/100 1/010 01 ✠ 11 ...... ✏ 1/001 ✒✑ 173 n=3 (c) In the next figure we draw two frames of the trellis associated with the code. Solid lines indicate an input equal to 0, whereas dotted lines correspond to an input equal to 1. 00 01 10 11 ✈ .✈000 .✈ . 111 ✑ . ✑ . ✑ ✑ . ✑✑ . . 011 . ✑ ✑ . ✈100 ✈ .✑ . .✑ . . . . ✑ . . . ✑✈ ✑ ✑ . . . . . . ✑ . ✑ . .. .. 101 ✑ ✑ ✈010 ✈ ✈ .✑  . .✑  . . .. .. .. ..  ..  .. 110 ✈ ✈ ✈ .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . 001 (d) The diagram used to find the transfer function is shown in the next figure. ✎ ❄ ✍✌d X ✒ ❅ DNJ ❅ D2J ❅ 3 2 2 D NJ DJ ❅ D J✲ ❘ ❅ ✲ ✲ o ❙ Xb Xa Xc ❙ Xa DNJ Using the flow graph results, we obtain the system Xc Xb Xd Xa = = = = D 3 NJXa + DNJXb D 2 JXc + D 2 JXd DNJXc + DNJXd D 2 JXb Eliminating Xb , Xc and Xd results in T (D, N, J ) = D 7 NJ 3 Xa = Xa 1 − DNJ − D 3 NJ 2 To find the free distance of the code we set N = J = 1 in the transfer function, so that T1 (D ) = T (D, N, J )|N =J =1 = D7 = D7 + D8 + D9 + · · · 1 − D − D3 Hence, dfree = 7 (e) Since there is no self loop corresponding to an input equal to 1 such that the output is the all zero sequence, the code is not catastrophic. 174 Problem 8.26 : (a) The state transition diagram for this code is depicted in the next figure. ✎ 0/000 ..... ✍✌ ❥. 00 ✒ 0/011 ✛ ❅ 1/111 ❘ ❅ 0/001 ❅ ✲ 10 s ❅ ❅ 0/010❅ 1/100 1/110 01 ✠ 11 ...... ✎ ✍✌ 1/101 (b) The diagram used to find the transfer function is shown in the next figure. ✎ ❄ ✍✌d X ✒ ❅ D 2 NJ ❅ DJ ❅ 3 2 DJ D NJ ❅ D J✲ ❘ ❅ ✲ ✲ o ❙ Xb Xa Xc ❙ Xa DNJ Using the flow graph results, we obtain the system Xc Xb Xd Xa = = = = D 3 NJXa + DNJXb DJXc + DJXd D 2 NJXc + D 2 NJXd D 2 JXb Eliminating Xb , Xc and Xd results in T (D, N, J ) = Xa D 6 NJ 3 = Xa 1 − D 2 NJ − D 2 NJ 2 (c) To find the free distance of the code we set N = J = 1 in the transfer function, so that T1 (D ) = T (D, N, J )|N =J =1 = D6 = D 6 + 2D 8 + 4D 10 + · · · 1 − 2D 2 Hence, dfree = 6 175 (d) The following figure shows 7 frames of the trellis diagram used by the Viterbi decoder. It is assumed that the input sequence is padded by two zeros, so that the actual length of the information sequence is 5. The numbers on the nodes indicate the Hamming distance of the survivor paths. The deleted branches have been marked with an X. In the case of a tie we deleted the upper branch. The survivor path at the end of the decoding is denoted by a thick line. 110 110 00 2 110 4 111 X X 6 010 101 4 100 X 3 7 6 X 01 4 X 2 X 10 1 X X 6 5 X 4 XX 3 5 5 X 11 4 X X 1 X 3 5 4 The information sequence is 11110 and the corresponding codeword 111 110 101 101 010 011 000... (e) An upper to the bit error probability of the code is given by Pb ≤ But dT (D, N, J = 1) dN N =1,D = √ 4p(1−p) d D6N dT (D, N, 1) D 6 − 2D 8 (1 − N ) = = dN dN 1 − 2D 2 N (1 − 2D 2 N )2 and since p = 10−5 , we obtain Pb ≤ D6 (1 − 2D 2 )2 D= √ 4p(1−p) ≈ 6.14 · 10−14 Problem 8.27 : (a) The state transition diagram for this code is shown below 176 ✎ 0/000 ..... ✍✌ ❥. 00 ✒ 0/011 ✛ ❅ 1/111 ❘ ❅ 0/101 ❅ ✲ 10 s ❅ ❅ 0/110❅ 1/100 1/010 01 ✠ 11 ...... ✎ ✍✌ 1/001 (b) The diagram used to find the transfer function is shown in the next figure. ✎ ❄ ✍✌d X ✒ ❅ DNJ ❅ D2J ❅ 2 D 3 NJ D2 J ❅ D J✲ ❘ ❅ ✲ ✲ o ❙ Xb Xa Xc ❙ Xa DNJ Using the flow graph results, we obtain the system Xc Xb Xd Xa = = = = D 3 NJXa + DNJXb D 2 JXc + D 2 JXd DNJXc + DNJXd D 2 JXb Eliminating Xb , Xc and Xd results in T (D, N, J ) = D 7 NJ 3 Xa = Xa 1 − DNJ − D 3 NJ 2 (c) To find the free distance of the code we set N = J = 1 in the transfer function, so that T1 (D ) = T (D, N, J )|N =J =1 = D7 = D7 + D8 + D9 + · · · 3 1−D−D Hence, dfree = 7. The path, which is at a distance dfree from the all zero path, is the path X a → Xc → X b → X a . (d) The following figure shows 6 frames of the trellis diagram used by the Viterbi algorithm to decode the sequence {111, 111, 111, 111, 111, 111}. The numbers on the nodes indicate the 177 Hamming distance of the survivor paths from the received sequence. The branches that are dropped by the Viterbi algorithm have been marked with an X. In the case of a tie of two merging paths, we delete the upper path. 111 111 00 3 111 111 111 x 6 111 x x x X 01 2 4 5 4 4 3 1 3 x x 10 3 x 0 x 3 X 2 x 11 2 4 6 The decoded sequence is {111, 101, 011, 111, 101, 011} which coresponds to the information sequence {x1 , x2 , x3 , x4 } = {1, 0, 0, 1} followed by two zeros. Problem 8.28 : (a) The state transition diagram and the flow diagram used to find the transfer function for this code are depicted in the next figure. ✏ 0/00 ..... ❥. ✒✑ 00 ✒ 0/10 01 ✛ s ❅ ❅ 0/11 ❅ ❅ 1/01 ❅ 0/01 ❅ ❘ ✲ 10 1/11 1/00 ✠ 11 ...... ✏ ✎ ❄ ✍✌d X ✒ ❅ NJ ❅ D2J ❅ DNJ✲ DJ ❅ DJ ✲ ❘ ❅ ✲ X o ❙ b Xa Xc ❙ Xa DNJ D 2 NJ 1/10 ✒✑ Thus, Xc = DNJXa + D 2 NJXb Xb = DJXc + D 2 JXd Xd = NJXc + DNJXd 178 Xa = DJXb and by eliminating Xb , Xc and Xd , we obtain T (D, N, J ) = D 3 NJ 3 Xa = Xa 1 − DNJ − D 3 NJ 2 To find the transfer function of the code in the form T (D, N ), we set J = 1 in T (D, N, J ). Hence, D3N T (D, N ) = 1 − DN − D 3 N (b) To find the free distance of the code we set N = 1 in the transfer function T (D, N ), so that T1 (D ) = T (D, N )|N =1 = D3 = D 3 + D 4 + D 5 + 2D 6 + · · · 1 − D − D3 Hence, dfree = 3 (c) An upper bound on the bit error probability, when hard decision decoding is used, is given by (see (8-2-34)) 1 dT (D, N ) Pb ≤ √ k dN N =1,D = 4p(1−p) Since dT (D, N ) dN N =1 = D3N d dN 1 − (D + D 3 )N N =1 = D3 (1 − (D + D 3 ))2 with k = 1, p = 10−6 we obtain Pb ≤ D3 (1 − (D + D 3 ))2 D= √ 4p(1−p) = 8.0321 × 10−9 Problem 8.29 : (a) g1 = [10], g2 = [11], states : (a) = [0], (b) = [1] The tree diagram, trellis diagram and state diagram are given in the following figures : 179 00 a 00 a 11 b 01 a 00 a 11 b 0 ✻ ❄ 1 10 b 00 a 01 a 11 b 01 a 11 b 10 b 10 bæ State (a) 00 00 00 11 11 11 01 01 (b) 10 10 01 00 10 a b 11 (b) Redrawing the state diagram : 180 a JND(2) b JD c JND Xb = JND 2 Xa + JNDXb ⇒ Xb = Xc = JDXb ⇒ JND 2 Xa 1 − JND Xc J 2 ND 3 = J 2 ND 3 + J 3 N 2 D 4 + ... = T (D, N, J ) = Xa 1 − JND Hence : dmin = 3 Problem 8.30 : (a) g1 = [111], g2 = [101], states : (a) = [00], (b) = [01], (c) = [10], (d) = [11] The tree diagram, trellis diagram and state diagram are given in the following figures : 00 a 00 a 00 c a 10 b 11 0 c 01 d a 11 a 1 10 b 00 c 11 c 01 b 01 d 10 d 181 State a 00 00 00 11 00 11 11 11 11 b 11 00 10 00 10 10 c 01 01 01 01 01 d 10 10 b 11 00 01 10 a 11 c 01 d 00 10 (b) Redrawing the state diagram : JND d JD JND a JND(2) c JD b JN 182 JD(2) e Xc = JND 2 Xa + JNXb X = JDXc + JDXd b Xd = JNDXd + JNDXc = NXb Xe = JD 2 Xb ⇒ ⇒ Xb = J 2 ND 3 Xa 1 − JND (1 + J ) Xe J 3 ND 5 = J 3 ND 5 + J 4 N 2 D 6 (1 + J ) + ... = T (D, N, J ) = Xa 1 − JND (1 + J ) Hence : dmin = 5 Problem 8.31 : (a) g1 = [23] = [10011], g2 = [35] = [11101] Input 1 Output 2 (b) g1 = [25] = [10101], g2 = [33] = [11011], g3 = [37] = [11111] 183 1 Input 2 Output 3 (c) g1 = [17] = [1111], g2 = [06] = [0110], g3 = [15] = [1101] Input 1 2 3 Problem 8.32 : For the encoder of Probl. 8.31(c), the state diagram is as follows : 184 Output 011 c 10 000 101 001 110 010 100 a 111 b 00 01 101 000 111 010 110 100 011 d 11 001 The 2-bit input that forces the transition from one state to another is the 2-bits that characterize the terminal state. Problem 8.33 : The encoder is shown in Probl. 8.30. The channel is binary symmetric and the metric for Viterbi decoding is the Hamming distance. The trellis and the surviving paths are illustrated in the following figure : State a d=0 b 1 4 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 c d=2 1 2 1 3 2 3 3 d=2 2 2 2 3 3 3 d 185 Problem 8.34 : In Probl. 8.30 we found : T (D, N, J ) = J 3 ND 5 1 − JND (1 + J ) Setting J = 1 : ND 5 dT (D, N ) D5 ⇒ = 1 − 2ND dN (1 − 2ND )2 For soft-decision decoding the bit-error probability can be upper-bounded by : T (D, N ) = Pbs ≤ D5 1 dT (D, N ) 1 1 exp(−5γb /2) | = |N =1,D=exp(−γb Rc ) = 2 N =1,D =exp(−γb /2) 2 dN 2 (1 − 2ND ) 2 (1 − exp(−γb /2))2 For hard-decision decoding, the Chernoff bound is : 5/2 Pbh 4p(1 − p) dT (D, N ) ≤ |N =1,D=√4p(1−p) = dN 1 − 2 4p(1 − p) 2 √ where p = Q γb Rc = Q γb /2 (assuming binary PSK). A comparative plot of the bit-error probabilities is given in the following figure : −2 10 Hard−dec. decoding −3 Bit−error probability 10 −4 10 Soft−dec. decoding −5 10 −6 10 3 4 5 6 7 SNR/bit (dB) 8 9 10 Problem 8.35 : For the dual-3 (k=3), rate 1/2 code, we have from Table 8-2-36 : g1 100100 g2 = 010010 , 001001 g3 g4 110100 g5 = 001010 100001 g6 186 Hence, the encoder will be : 1,1 1 1,2 Input 1,3 Output Symbols 3 bits 2,1 2 2,2 2,3 The state transitions are given in the following figures : Beginning State Beginning State 0 0 24 JND(2) 12 JND(2) 1 1 35 JND(2) 03 JND 2 2 06 JND 30 JND 3 3 17 JND(2) 21 JND(2) 2 1 4 4 60 JND 56 JND(2) 5 5 71 JND(2) 47 JND(2) 6 6 42 JND(2) 74 JND(2) 7 7 53 JND(2) 65 JND(2) 187 Beginning State Beginning State 0 0 45 JND(2) 36 JND(2) 1 1 27 JND(2) 54 JND(2) 2 2 14 JND(2) 67 JND(2) 3 3 76 JND(2) 35 JND 3 4 4 4 72 JND(2) 01 JND 5 5 65 JND(2) 10 JND 6 6 50 JND 23 JND(2) 7 7 41 JND(2) 32 JND(2) Beginning State Beginning State 0 0 61 JND(2) 57 JND(2) 1 1 46 JND(2) 70 JND 2 2 75 JND(2) 43 JND(2) 3 3 64 JND(2) 52 JND(2) 5 6 4 4 13 JND(2) 25 JND(2) 5 5 34 JND(2) 02 JND 6 6 31 JND(2) 07 JND 7 7 20 JND 16 JND(2) 188 Beginning State Beginning State Self-loop is 0 0 discarded 00 73 JND(2) 1 1 62 JND(2) 11 JD(2) 2 2 22 JD(2) 51 JND(2) 3 3 33 JD(2) 40 JND 7 0’ Output node 4 4 44 JD(2) 37 JND(2) 5 5 55 JD(2) 26 JND(2) 6 6 66 JD(2) 15 JND(2) 7 7 77 JD(2) 04 JND The states are : (1) = 000, (2) = 001, (3) = 010, (4) = 011, (5) = 100, (6) = 101, (7) = 110, (8) = 111. The state equations are : X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X0 = D 2 NJ (X0 + X3 + X4 + X5 + X6 + X7 ) + DNJ (X1 + X2 ) = D 2 NJ (X0 + X1 + X3 + X5 + X6 + X7 ) + DNJ (X2 + X4 ) = D 2 NJ (X0 + X1 + X2 + X4 + X5 + X7 ) + DNJ (X3 + X6 ) = D 2 NJ (X0 + X1 + X2 + X3 + X6 + X7 ) + DNJ (X4 + X5 ) = D 2 NJ (X0 + X1 + X2 + X3 + X4 + X6 ) + DNJ (X5 + X7 ) = D 2 NJ (X0 + X2 + X3 + X4 + X5 + X7 ) + DNJ (X1 + X6 ) = D 2 NJ (X0 + X1 + X2 + X4 + X5 + X6 ) + DNJ (X3 + X7 ) = D 2 J ( X 1 + X 2 + X3 + X4 + X5 + X6 + X7 ) where, note that D, N correspond to symbols and not bits. If we add the first seven equations, we obtain : 7 i=1 Hence : = 7D 2 NJX0 + 2DNJ 7 i=1 Xi = 7 i=1 Xi + 5D 2 NJ 7 i=1 Xi 7D 2 NJ 1 − 2DNJ − 5D 2 NJ Substituting the result into the last equation we obtain : 7D 4 NJ 2 7D 4 NJ 2 X0 = = T (D, N, J ) = X0 1 − 2DNJ − 5D 2 NJ 1 − DNJ (2 + 5D ) which agrees with the result (8-2-37) in the book. 189 Problem 8.36 : g1 = [110], g2 = [011], states : (a) = [00], (b) = [01], (c) = [10], (d) = [11] The state diagram is given in the following figure : 01 11 01 11 00 10 10 01 10 00 11 00 We note that this is a catastrophic code, since there is a zero-distance path from a non-zero state back to itself, and this path corresponds to input 1. A simple example of an K = 4, rate 1/2 encoder that exhibits error propagation is the following : Output Input The state diagram for this code has a self-loop in the state 111 with input 1, and output 00. A more subtle example of a catastrophic code is the following : 190 Output Input In this case there is a zero-distance path generated by the sequence 0110110110..., which encompasses the states 011,101, and 110. that is, if the encoder is in state 011 and the input is 1, the output is 00 and the new state is 101. If the next bit is 1, the output is again 00 and the new state is 110. Then if the next bit is a zero, the output is again 00 and the new state is 011, which is the same state that we started with. Hence, we have a closed path in the state diagram which yields an output that is identical to the output of the all-zero path, but which results from the input sequence 110110110... For an alternative method for identifying rate 1/n catastrophic codes based on observation of the code generators, please refer to the paper by Massey and Sain (1968). Problem 8.37 : There are 4 subsets corresponding to the four possible outputs from the rate 1/2 convolutional encoder. Each subset has eight signal points, one for each of the 3-tuples from the uncoded bits. If we denote the sets as A,B,C,D, the set partitioning is as follows : 191 GA GB GA GB GD GC GD GC GD GC GB GA GB GA GB GA GD GC GD GC GD GC GB GA GB GA GB GA GC GD GC GD The minimum distance between adjacent points in the same subset is doubled. Problem 8.38 : (a) Let the decoding rule be that the first codeword is decoded when yi is received if p(yi |x1 ) > p(yi |x2 ) The set of yi that decode into x1 is Y1 = {yi : p(yi |x1 ) > p(yi |x2 )} The characteristic function of this set χ1 (yi ) is by definition equal to 0 if yi ∈ Y1 and equal to 1 if yi ∈ Y1 . The characteristic function can be bounded as 1 − χ1 (yi ) ≤ p(yi |x2 ) p(yi |x1 ) 1 2 This inequality is true if χ(yi ) = 1 because the right side is nonnegative. It is also true if χ(yi ) = 0 because in this case p(yi |x2 ) > p(yi |x1 ) and therefore, p(yi |x2 ) =⇒ 1 ≤ 1≤ p(yi |x1 ) 192 p(yi |x2 ) p(yi |x1 ) 1 2 Given that the first codeword is sent, then the probability of error is P (error|x1 ) = yi ∈Y −Y1 ≤ yi ∈Y 2n = i=1 p(yi |x1 ) = yi ∈Y p(yi |x1 )[1 − χ1 (yi )] p(yi |x2 ) p(yi |x1 ) p(yi |x1 ) 1 2 = yi ∈Y p(yi |x1 )p(yi |x2 ) p(yi |x1 )p(yi |x2 ) where Y denotes the set of all possible sequences yi . Since, each element of the vector yi can take two values, the cardinality of the set Y is 2n . (b) Using the results of the previous part we have P (error) ≤ 2n i=1 p(yi |x1 )p(yi |x2 ) = 2n p(x1 |yi ) = p(yi ) p(x1 ) i=1 2n i=1 p(yi |x1 ) p(yi ) p(yi ) p(x2 |yi ) = p(x2 ) 2n i=1 p(yi |x2 ) p(yi ) 2p(yi ) p(x1 |yi )p(x2 |yi ) However, given the vector yi , the probability of error depends only on those values that x1 and x2 are different. In other words, if x1,k = x2,k , then no matter what value is the k th element of yi , it will not produce an error. Thus, if by d we denote the Hamming distance between x1 and x2 , then p(x1 |yi )p(x2 |yi ) = pd (1 − p)d and since p(yi ) = 1 , 2n we obtain d d d P (error) = P (d) = 2p 2 (1 − p) 2 = [4p(1 − p)] 2 Problem 8.39 : Over P frames, the number of information bits that are being encoded is J kP = P j =1 NJ The number of bits that are being transmitted is determined as follows: For a particular group of bits j , j = 1, ..., J , we may delete, with the corresponding puncturing matrix, xj out of nP bits, on the average, where x may take the values x = 0, 1, ...(n − 1)P − 1. Remembering that 193 each frame contains Nj bits of the particular group, we arrive at the total average number of bits for each group n(j ) = Nj (nP − xj ) ⇒ n(j ) = Nj (P + Mj ), Mj = 1, 2, ..., (n − 1)P In the last group j = J we should also add the K − 1 overhead information bits, that will add up another (K − 1)(P + MJ ) transmitted bits to the total average number of bits for the J th group. Hence, the total number of bits transmitted over P frames be nP = (K − 1)(P + MJ ) + j =1 JNj (P + Mj ) and the average effective rate of this scheme will be Rav kP = = nP J j =1 NJ P j =1 JNj (P + Mj ) + (K − 1)(P + MJ ) Problem 8.39 : Over P frames, the number of information bits that are being encoded is J kP = P j =1 NJ The number of bits that are being transmitted is determined as follows: For a particular group of bits j , j = 1, ..., J , we may delete, with the corresponding puncturing matrix, xj out of nP bits, on the average, where x may take the values x = 0, 1, ...(n − 1)P − 1. Remembering that each frame contains Nj bits of the particular group, we arrive at the total average number of bits for each group n(j ) = Nj (nP − xj ) ⇒ n(j ) = Nj (P + Mj ), Mj = 1, 2, ..., (n − 1)P In the last group j = J we should also add the K − 1 overhead information bits, that will add up another (K − 1)(P + MJ ) transmitted bits to the total average number of bits for the J th group. Hence, the total number of bits transmitted over P frames be nP = (K − 1)(P + MJ ) + j =1 JNj (P + Mj ) and the average effective rate of this scheme will be Rav = kP = nP J j =1 NJ P j =1 JNj (P + Mj ) + (K − 1)(P + MJ ) 194 CHAPTER 9 Problem 9.1 : We want y (t) = Kx(t − t0 ). Then : X (f ) = Y (f ) = ∞ −j 2πf t dt −∞ x(t)e ∞ y (t)e−j 2πf tdt = −∞ K exp(−j 2πf t0 )X (f ) Therefore : A(f ) = K, for all f θ(f ) = 2πf t0 ± nπ, n = 0, 1, 2, ... A(f )e−jθ(f ) = Ke−j 2πf t0 ⇒ Note that nπ, n odd, results in a sign inversion of the signal. Problem 9.2 : (a) Since cos(a + π/2) = − sin(a), we can write : T, X (f ) = T 2 − 0 ≤ |f | ≤ 12Tβ − , 12Tβ ≤ |f | ≤ 1+β 2T 1 2T 1 − sin πT f − β Then, taking the first two derivatives with respect to f : 2 X (f ) = and : X (f ) = 1 2T , 1−β 2T 1 2T , 1−β 2T − T2βπ cos πT f − β 0, T 3 π2 2β 2 sin πT f − β 0, ≤ |f | ≤ 1+β 2T otherwise ≤ |f | ≤ 1+β 2T otherwise Therefore the second derivative can be expressed as : X (f ) = − π2T 2 T T 1−β 1+β f − rect f X (f ) − rect β2 2 2T 2 2T where : rect(af ) = 1, | f | ≤ a 0, o.w Since the Fourier transform of dx/dt is j 2πf X (f ), we exploit the duality between (f, t), take the inverse Fourier transform of X (f ) and obtain : −4π 2 t2 x(t) = − 1−β T1 1+β π2T 2 T1 sin 2πt − − sin 2πt x(t) − 2 β 2 πt 2T 2 πt 2T 195 Solving for x(t) we obtain : x(t) = 1 1−4β 2 t2 /T 1 2πt/T = 1 1−4β 2 t2 /T 1 πt/T − sin 12Tβ 2πt + sin 1+β 2πt 2T sin πt cos πβt T T (b) When β = 1, X (f ) is non-zero in |f | ≤ 1/T, and : X (f ) = T (1 + cos πT f ) 2 The Hilbert transform is : ˆ X (f ) = Then : x(t) = ˆ = −j T (1 + cos πT f ) , 0 ≤ f ≤ 1/T 2 j T (1 + cos πT f ) , −1/T ≤ f ≤ 0 2 ∞ˆ −∞ X (f ) exp(j 2πf t)dt 0 ˆ −1/T X (f ) exp(j 2πf t)dt + 1/T 0 ˆ X (f ) exp(j 2πf t)dt ˆ Direct substitution for X (f ) yields the result : x(t) = ˆ T sin 2 πt/T − 4t2 /T 2 πt 1 − 4t2 /T 2 Note that x(t) is an odd function of t. ˆ (c) No, since x(0) = 0 and x(nT ) = 0, for n = 0. Also ˆ ˆ |f | ≤ 1/2T. ∞ n=−∞ ˆ X (f + n/2T ) = constant for (d) The single-sideband signal is : ˆ ˆ x(t) cos 2πfc t ± x(t) sin 2πfc t = Re (x(t) ± j x(t)) ej 2πfc t The envelope is a(t) = a(t) = x2 (t) + x2 (t). For β = 1 : ˆ 1 1 (1 − 8t2 /T 2 ) sin 2 (πt/T ) + 16t4 /T 4 πt/T 1 − 4t2 /T 2 Problem 9.3 : (a) k h(t − kT ) = u(t) is a periodic signal with period T. Hence, u(t) can be expanded in the Fourier series : ∞ u(t) = n=−∞ un ej 2πnt/T 196 where : un = 1 T T /2 −T /2 = 1 T T /2 −T /2 ∞ k =−∞ 1 T ∞ −∞ h(t − kT ) exp(−j 2πnt/T )dt T /2 −T /2 ∞ 1 k =−∞ T = = u(t) exp(−j 2πnt/T )dt h(t − kT ) exp(−j 2πnt/T )dt 1 h(t) exp(−j 2πnt/T )dt = T H 1 n Then : u(t) = T ∞ −∞ H T ej 2πnt/T ⇒ U (f ) = n= u(t)g (t), it follows that X (f ) = U (t) ∗ G(f ). Hence : X (f ) = (b) (i) 1 T ∞ n=−∞ ∞ k =−∞ ∞ h(t − kT ) = u(t) = k =−∞ (iii) Let ∞ v (t) = h(t) 1 T 1 T δ (t − kT ) = k =−∞ Hence : H n T δ f− n T . Since x(t) = n n G f− T T H h(kT ) = u(0) = (ii) ∞ n=−∞ 1 T n T ∞ n=−∞ ∞ n=−∞ H ∞ n T H n j 2πnt/T e T h(kT )δ (t − kT ) k =−∞ ∞ h(kT )e−j 2πf kT V (f ) = k =−∞ But V (f ) = H (f ) ∗ Fourier transform of 1 n = H (f ) ∗ T ∞ −∞ δ (f − T ) = n= 1 T ∞ k =−∞ δ (t − kT ) ∞ n n=−∞ H (f − T ) (c) The criterion for no intersymbol interference is {h(kT ) = 0, k = 0 and h(0) = 1} . If the above condition holds, then from (iii) above we have : 1 T ∞ ∞ n H (f − ) = h(kT )e−j 2πf kT = 1 T n=−∞ k =−∞ 1 n Conversely, if T ∞ −∞ H (f − T ) = 1, ∀f ⇒ ∞ −∞ h(kT )e−j 2πf kT = 1, ∀f. This is possible n= k= only if the left-hand side has no dependence on f, which means h(kT ) = 0, for k = 0. Then ∞ −j 2πf kT = h(0) = 1. k =−∞ h(kT )e 197 Problem 9.4 : 2 t2 x(t) = e−πa Hence : 1 2 2 ⇒ X (f ) = e−πf /a a 1 1 2 2 X (0) = , X (W ) = e−πW /a a a We have : X (W ) a2 2 2 = 0.01 ⇒ e−πW /a = 0.01 ⇒ W 2 = − ln(0.01) X (0) π But due to the condition for the reduced ISI : 2T 2 x(T ) = e−πa Hence W T = −1 π = 0.01 ⇒ T 2 = − 1 ln(0.01) πa2 ln(0.01) = 1.466 or : 1.466 T For the raised cosine spectral characteristic (with roll-off factor 1) W = 1/T. Hence, the Gaussian shaped pulse requires more bandwidth than the pulse having the raised cosine spectrum. W= Problem 9.5 : The impulse response of a square-root raised cosine filter is given by 1+β 2T xST (t) = − 1+β 2T Xrc (f )ej 2πf t df where Xrc (f ) is given by (9.2-26). Splitting the integral in three parts we obtain xST (t) = + + − − 12Tβ T /2 1 + cos − 1+β 2T 1−β 2T − − 12Tβ 1+β 2T 1−β 2T √ 1−β πT (−f − ) ej 2πf t df β 2T T ej 2πf t df (2) T /2 1 + cos 1−β πT (f − ) ej 2πf t df β 2T The second term (2) gives immediately √ (2) = (1) T sin(π (1 − β )t/T ) πt 198 (3) The third term can be solved with the transformation λ = f − β T 1−β . 2T Then π T λ j 2πt(λ+ 1+β ) 2T dλ e β 0 √ √ √ Using the relationship 1 + cos 2A = 2 cos2 A ⇒ 1 + cos 2A = 2| cos A| = 2 cos A, we can rewrite the above expression as (3) = (3) = T /2 1 + cos β T 0 √ T cos π T λ j 2πt(λ+ 1+β ) 2T dλ e 2β −jA Since cos A = e +e , the above integral simplifies to the sum of two simple exponential 2 argument intregrals. − Similarly to (3), the first term (1) can be solved with the transformation λ = f + 12Tβ (notice − − that cos( πT (−f − 12Tβ )) = cos( πT (f + 12Tβ ))). Then again, the integral simplifies to the sum of β β two simple exponential argument integrals. Proceeding with adding (1),(2),(3) we arrive at the desired result. jA Problem 9.6 : (a)(b) In order to calculate the frequency response based on the impulse response, we need the values of the impulse response at t = 0, ±T /2, which are not given directly by the expression of Problem 9.5. Using L’Hospital’s rule it is straightforward to show that: √ 2 (2 + π ) 12 x(0) = + , x(±T /2) = 2π 2 2π Then, the frequency response of the filters with N = 10, 15, 20 compared to the frequency response of the ideal square-root raised cosine filter are depicted in the following figure. 199 Frequency response of truncated SQRT Raised Cosine filters 10 Ideal N=10 N=15 N=20 0 −10 dB −20 −30 −40 −50 −60 −70 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t/T 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 As we see, there is no significant difference in the passband area of the filters, but the realizable, truncated filters do have spectral sidelobes outside their (1 + β )/T nominal bandwidth. Still, depending on how much residual ISI an application can tolerate, even the N = 10 filter appears an acceptable approximation of the ideal (non-realizable) square-root raised cosine filter. Problem 9.7 : (a),(b) Given a mathematical package like MATLAB, the implementation in software of the digital modulator of Fig P9.7 is relatively straightforward. One comment is that the interpolating filters should have a nominal passband of [−π/3, π/3], since the interpolation factor applied to the samples at the output of the shaping filter is 3. We chose our interpolation filters (designed with the MATLAB fir1 function) to have a cutoff frequency (-3 dB frequency) of π/5. This corresponds to the highest frequency with significant signal content, since with the spectrum of the baseband signal should be (approximately, due to truncation effects) limited to (1+0.25)/2T , so samled at 6T it should be limited to a discrete frequency of (2 ∗ π ∗ (1+0.25)/2T )/6 ≈ 0.21 ∗ π . The plot with the power spectrum of the digital signal sequence is given in the following figure. We have also plotted the power spectrum of the baseband in-phase (I component) of the signal. 200 Spectrum of baseband (In−phase part) and modulated bandpass signal 0 Baseband (I) Modulated −10 −20 −30 −40 −50 −60 −70 −80 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Frequency (Hz) 5000 6000 7000 We notice the rather significant sidelobe that is due to the non-completely eliminated image of the spectrum that was generated by the interpolating process. We could mitigate it by choosing an interpolation filter with lower cut-off frequency, but then, we would lose a larger portion of the useful signal as well. The best solution would be to use a longer interpolation filter. (c) By repeating the experiment for a total of 6 runs we get the following figure Spectrum modulated bandpass signal over 6 runs 0 −10 −20 −30 −40 −50 −60 −70 −80 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Frequency (Hz) 5000 6000 7000 We notice the smoother shape of the PSD, and we can verify that indeed the spectrum is centered around 1800 Hz. 201 Problem 9.8 : (a) The alternative expression for s(t) can be rewritten as s(t) ? = = = = = = n In Q(t − nT ) j 2πfc nT g (t n In e − nT )[cos 2πfc (t − nT ) + j sin(2πfc (t − nT )] { n In g (t − nT )[cos 2πfc nT + j sin 2πfc nT ][cos 2πfc (t − nT ) + j sin(2πfc (t − nT )]} { n In g (t − nT )[cos 2πfc nT cos 2πfc (t − nT ) − sin 2πfc nT sin 2πfc (t − nT ) +j sin 2πfc nT cos 2πfc (t − nT ) + j cos 2πfc nT sin 2πfc (t − nT )]} { n In g (t − nT )[cos 2πfc t + j sin 2πfc t]} 2πfc t = s(t) n In g (t − nT )e So, indeed the alternative expression for s(t) is a valid one. (b) -j2pfnT j2pfnT e e q(t) q(t) Inr I’nr I’ni Ini - To Detector ^ q(t) ^ q(t) Demodulator (with phase derotator) Modulator (with phase rotator) Problem 9.9 : (a) From the impulse response of the pulse having a square-root raised cosine characteristic, which is given in problem 9.5, we can see immediately that xSQ (t) = xSQ (−t), i.e. the pulse g (t) is an even function. We know that the product of an even function times and even function has even symmetry, while the product of even times odd has odd symmetry. Hence q (t) is even, while q (t) is odd. Hence, the product q (t)ˆ(t) has odd symmetry. We know that the (symettric ˆ q around 0) integral of an odd function is zero, or ∞ −∞ q (t)ˆ(t)dt = q (1+β )/2T −(1+β )/2T 202 q (t)ˆ(t)dt = 0 q (b) We notice that when fc = k/T , where k is an integer, then the rotator/derotaror of a carrierless QAM system (described in Problem 9.8) gives a trivial rotation of an integer number of full circles (2πkn), and the carrierless QAM/PSK is equivalent to CAP. Problem 9.10 : (a) (i) x0 = 2, x1 = 1, x2 = −1, otherwise xn = 0. Then : x(t) = 2 sin(2πW t) sin(2πW (t − 1/2W )) sin(2πW (t − 1/W )) + − 2πW t 2πW (t − 1/2W ) 2πW (t − 1/W ) and : X (f ) = |X (f )| = 1 2W 1 2W 2 + e−jπf /W − e−j 2πf /W , 6 + 2 cos πf − 4 cos W 2πf 1/2 W |f | ≤ W ⇒ |f | ≤ W , The plot of |X (f )| is given in the following figure : 2 1.8 1.6 1.4 W|X(f)| 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 −1.5 −1 −0.5 0 fW 0.5 1 1.5 (ii) x−1 = −1, x0 = 2, x1 = −1, otherwise xn = 0. Then : x(t) = 2 sin(2πW t) sin(2πW (t + 1/2W )) sin(2πW (t − 1/2W )) − − 2πW t 2πW (t + 1/2W ) 2πW (t − 1/2W ) and : X (f ) = 1 1 πf 1 πf 2 − e−jπf /W − e+jπf /W = 2 − 2 cos = 1 − cos , |f | ≤ W 2W 2W W W W The plot of |X (f )| is given in the following figure : 203 2.5 2 W|X(f)| 1.5 1 0.5 0 −1.5 −1 −0.5 0 fW 0.5 1 1.5 (b) Based on the results obtained in part (a) : 2.5 2 1.5 (i): x(t) 1 0.5 0 −0.5 −1 −3 −2 −1 0 tW 1 2 3 −2 −1 0 tW 1 2 3 2 1.5 (ii): x(t) 1 0.5 0 −0.5 −1 −1.5 −3 204 (c) The possible received levels at the receiver are given by : (i) Bn = 2In + In−1 − In−2 where Im = ±1. Hence : P (Bn = 0) = 1/4 P (Bn = −2) = 1/4 P (Bn = 2) = 1/4 P (Bn = −4) = 1/8 P (Bn = 4) = 1/8 (ii) Bn = 2In − In−1 − In+1 where Im = ±1. Hence : P (Bn = 0) = 1/4 P (Bn = −2) = 1/4 P (Bn = 2) = 1/4 P (Bn = −4) = 1/8 P (Bn = 4) = 1/8 Problem 9.11 : The bandwidth of the bandpass channel is W = 4 KHz. Hence, the rate of transmission should be less or equal to 4000 symbols/sec. If a 8-QAM constellation is employed, then the required symbol rate is R = 9600/3 = 3200. If a signal pulse with raised cosine spectrum is used for shaping, the maximum allowable roll-off factor is determined by : 1600(1 + β ) = 2000 which yields β = 0.25. Since β is less than 50%, we consider a larger constellation. With a 16-QAM constellation we obtain : 9600 R= = 2400 4 and : 1200(1 + β ) = 2000 or β = 2/3, which satisfies the required conditions. The probability of error for an M -QAM constellation is given by : PM = 1 − (1 − P√M )2 where : 1 P√ M = 2 1 − √ M 205 Q 3Eav (M − 1)N0 With PM = 10−6 we obtain P√M = 5 × 10−7 and therefore using the last equation and the table of values for the Q(·) function, we find that the average transmitted energy is : Eav = 24.70 × 10−9 Note that if the desired spectral characteristic Xrc (f ) is split evenly between the transmitting and receiving filter, then the energy of the transmitting pulse is : ∞ −∞ 2 gT (t)dt = ∞ −∞ |GT (f )|2 df = ∞ −∞ Xrc (f )df = 1 Hence, the energy Eav = Pav T depends only on the amplitude of the transmitted points and the 1 symbol interval T . Since T = 2400 , the average transmitted power is : Pav = Eav = 24.70 × 10−9 × 2400 = 592.8 × 10−7 T If the points of the 16-QAM constellation are evenly spaced with minimum distance between them equal to d, then there are four points with coordinates (± d , ± d ), four points with coordi2 2 nates (± 32d , ± 32d ), and eight points with coordinates (± 32d , ± d ), or (± d , ± 32d ). Thus, the average 2 2 transmitted power is : Pav = 16 1 1 d2 5 9d 2 10d2 (A2 + A2 ) = 4× = d2 +4× +8× mc ms 2 × 16 i=1 32 2 2 4 4 Since Pav = 592.8 × 10−7 , we obtain d= 4 Pav = 0.0069 5 Problem 9.12 : The channel (bandpass) bandwidth is W = 4000 Hz. Hence, the lowpass equivalent bandwidth will extend from -2 to 2 KHz. (a) Binary PAM with a pulse shape that has β = 1 . Hence : 2 1 (1 + β ) = 2000 2T 1 so T = 2667, and since k = 1 bit/symbols is transmitted, the bit rate is 2667 bps. 1 (b) Four-phase PSK with a pulse shape that has β = 1 . From (a) the symbol rate is T = 2667 2 and the bit rate is 5334 bps. 1 (c) M = 8 QAM with a pulse shape that has β = 1 . From (a), the symbol rate is T = 2667 and 2 3 hence the bit rate T = 8001 bps. 206 (d) Binary FSK with noncoherent detection. Assuming that the frequency separation between 1 1 the two frequencies is ∆f = T , where T is the bit rate, the two frequencies are fc + 21 and T 1 1 fc − 2T . Since W = 4000 Hz, we may select 21 = 1000, or, equivalently, T = 2000. Hence, the T bit rate is 2000 bps, and the two FSK signals are orthogonal. (e) Four FSK with noncoherent detection. In this case we need four frequencies with separation 1 . of T between adjacent frequencies. We select f1 = fc − 1T5 , f2 = fc − 21 , f3 = fc + 21 , and T T . 1 f4 = fc + 1T5 , where 21 = 500 Hz. Hence, the symbol rate is T = 1000 symbols per second and T since each symbol carries two bits of information, the bit rate is 2000 bps. (f) M = 8 FSK with noncoherent detection. In this case we require eight frequencies with 1 frequency separation of T = 500 Hz for orthogonality. Since each symbol carries 3 bits of information, the bit rate is 1500 bps. Problem 9.13 : (a) The bandwidth of the bandpass channel is : W = 3000 − 600 = 2400 Hz Since each symbol of the QPSK constellation conveys 2 bits of information, the symbol rate of transmission is : 2400 1 = 1200 symbols/sec R= = T 2 Thus, for spectral shaping we can use a signal pulse with a raised cosine spectrum and roll-off 1 factor β = 1, since the spectral requirements will be 21 (1 + β ) = T = 1200Hz. Hence : T 1 π |f | T [1 + cos(πT |f |)] = cos2 2 1200 2400 Xrc (f ) = If the desired spectral characteristic is split evenly between the transmitting filter GT (f ) and the receiving filter GR (f ), then G T (f ) = G R (f ) = 1 π |f | cos , 1200 2400 |f | < 1 = 1200 T A block diagram of the transmitter is shown in the next figure. an ✲ QPSK ✲× ❧✲ G T (f ) to Channel ✻ cos(2πfc t) (b) If the bit rate is 4800 bps, then the symbol rate is R= 4800 = 2400 symbols/sec 2 207 In order to satisfy the Nyquist criterion, the the signal pulse used for spectral shaping, should have roll-off factor β = 0 with corresponding spectrum : X (f ) = T, |f | < 1200 Thus, the frequency response of the transmitting filter is GT (f ) = √ T , |f | < 1200. Problem 9.14 : The bandwidth of the bandpass channel is : W = 3300 − 300 = 3000 Hz In order to transmit 9600 bps with a symbor rate R = of information bits per symbol should be : k= 1 T = 2400 symbols per second, the number 9600 =4 2400 Hence, a 24 = 16 QAM signal constellation is needed. The carrier frequency fc is set to 1800 Hz, which is the mid-frequency of the frequency band that the bandpass channel occupies. If a pulse with raised cosine spectrum and roll-off factor β is used for spectral shaping, then for the bandpass signal with bandwidth W : W 1 (1 + β ) = = 1500 ⇒ β = 0.25 2T 2 A sketch of the spectrum of the transmitted signal pulse is shown in the next figure. 1/2T -3300 -1800 300 900 1800 -300 3300 2700 Problem 9.15 : The SNR at the detector is : Pb T Pb (1 + β ) Eb = 30 dB = = N0 N0 N0 W 208 f Since it is desired to expand the bandwidth by a factor of 10 while maintaining the same SNR, 3 the received power Pb should increase by the same factor. Thus the additional power needed is Pa = 10 log10 10 = 5.2288 dB 3 Hence, the required transmitted power is : PS = −3 + 5.2288 = 2.2288 dBW Problem 9.16 : The pulse x(t) having the raised cosine spectrum given by (9-2-26/27) is : x(t) = sinc(t/T ) cos(πβt/T ) 1 − 4β 2 t2 /T 2 The function sinc(t/T ) is 1 when t = 0 and 0 when t = nT . Therefore, the Nyquist criterion will be satisfied as long as the function g (t) is : g (t) = cos(πβt/T ) = 1 − 4β 2 t2 /T 2 1 t=0 bounded t = 0 The function g (t) needs to be checked only for those values of t such that 4β 2t2 /T 2 = 1 or βt = T . However : 2 cos( π x) cos(πβt/T ) 2 = lim lim 22 2 x→ 1 1 − x βt→ T 1 − 4β t /T 2 and by using L’Hospital’s rule : cos( π x) π π π 2 = lim sin( x) = < ∞ x→ 1 1 − x x→ 1 2 2 2 lim Hence : x(nT ) = 1 n=0 0 n=0 meaning that the pulse x(t) satisfies the Nyquist criterion. Problem 9.17 : Substituting the expression of Xrc (f ) given by (8.2.22) in the desired integral, we obtain : ∞ −∞ Xrc (f )df = − − 12Tβ − 1+β 2T 1−β T πT (−f − ) df + 1 + cos 2 β 2T 209 1−β 2T − − 12Tβ T df + = 1+β 2T 1−β 2T − − 12Tβ − 1+β 2T 1−β T πT (f − ) df 1 + cos 2 β 2T − − 12Tβ + − 1+β 2T = 1+ = 1+ 1−β T T df + T 2 0 β −T β T β −T cos 1+β 2T + 1−β 2T T df 2 1+β 2T 1−β πT (f + )df + β 2T β T cos πT xdx + β cos 1−β 2T cos 1−β πT (f − )df β 2T πT xdx = 1 + 0 = 1 β 0 cos πT xdx β Problem 9.18 : Let X (f ) be such that 1 T Π(f T ) + U (f ) |f | < T 0 otherwise Re[X (f )] = 1 V (f ) | f | < T 0 otherwise Im[X (f )] = with U (f ) even with respect to 0 and odd with respect to f = 21 Since x(t) is real, V (f ) is odd T with respect to 0 and by assumption it is even with respect to f = 21 . Then, T x(t) = F −1[X (f )] 1 2T = j 2πf t X (f )e 1 −T 1 2T = − 21 T Consider first the integral 1 T 1 −T df + T ej 2πf t df + = sinc(t/T ) + 1 T 1 2T 1 T 1 −T − 21 T 1 T 1 −T 1 −T X (f )e df + 1 T 1 2T X (f )ej 2πf t df [U (f ) + jV (f )]ej 2πf t df [U (f ) + jV (f )]ej 2πf t df U (f )ej 2πf t df . Clearly, 1 −T j 2πf t U (f )e df = 0 1 −T j 2πf t U (f )e and by using the change of variables f = f + right hand side respectively, we obtain 1 T j 2πf t 1 2T U (f )ej 2πf t df 210 df + 1 T 0 U (f )ej 2πf t df and f = f − 1 2T for the two integrals on the 1 2T 1 π 1 j 2πf t 1 j 2πf t 2T )e )e =e U (f − df + ej T t U (f + df 1 1 2T 2T − 2T − 2T 1 π π 1 j 2πf t 2T a )e = ej T t − e−j T t U (f + df 1 2T − 2T 1 π 1 j 2πf t 2T )e = 2j sin( t) U (f + df 1 T 2T − 2T π −j T t where for step (a) we used the odd symmetry of U (f ) with respect to f = U (f − For the integral 1 T 1 −T 1 T 1 −T 1 , 2T that is 1 1 ) = −U (f + ) 2T 2T V (f )ej 2πf t df we have V (f )ej 2πf t df 0 = 1 −T V (f )ej 2πf t df + π −j T t =e 1 2T − 21 T 1 T 0 V (f )ej 2πf t df 1 j 2πf t π V (f − df + ej T t )e 2T 1 2T − 21 T However, V (f ) is odd with respect to 0 and since V (f + translated spectra satisfy 1 2T − 21 T 1 j 2πf t )e V (f − df = − 2T 1 2T − 21 T V (f + 1 2T V (f + 1 j 2πf t df )e 2T ) and V (f − 1 j 2πf t )e df 2T Hence, 1 π 1 j 2πf t 2T )e x(t) = sinc(t/T ) + 2j sin( t) U (f + df 1 T 2T − 2T 1 π 1 j 2πf t 2T )e −2 sin( t) U (f + df T 2T − 21 T and therefore, x(nT ) = 1 n=0 0 n=0 Thus, the signal x(t) satisfies the Nyquist criterion. Problem 9.19 : The bandwidth of the channel is : W = 3000 − 300 = 2700 Hz 211 1 ) 2T are even, the Since the minimum transmission bandwidth required for bandpass signaling is R, where R is the rate of transmission, we conclude that the maximum value of the symbol rate for the given channel is Rmax = 2700. If an M -ary PAM modulation is used for transmission, then in order to achieve a bit-rate of 9600 bps, with maximum rate of Rmax , the minimum size of the constellation is M = 2k = 16. In this case, the symbol rate is : R= 9600 = 2400 symbols/sec k 1 1 and the symbol interval T = R = 2400 sec. The roll-off factor β of the raised cosine pulse used for transmission is is determined by noting that 1200(1 + β ) = 1350, and hence, β = 0.125. Therefore, the squared root raised cosine pulse can have a roll-off of β = 0.125. Problem 9.20 : Since the one-sided bandwidth of the ideal lowpass channel is W = 2400 Hz, the rate of transmission is : R = 2 × 2400 = 4800 symbols/sec (remember that PAM can be transmitted single-sideband; hence, if the lowpass channel has bandwidth from -W to W, the passband channel will have bandwidth equal to W ; on the other hand, a PSK or QAM system will have passband bandwidth equal to 2W ). The number of bits per symbol is 14400 =3 k= 4800 Hence, the number of transmitted symbols is 23 = 8. If a duobinary pulse is used for transmission, then the number of possible transmitted symbols is 2M − 1 = 15. These symbols have the form bn = 0, ±2d, ±4d, . . . , ±12d where 2d is the minimum distance between the points of the 8-PAM constellation. The probability mass function of the received symbols is P (b = 2md) = 8 − |m| , 64 m = 0, ±1, . . . , ±7 An upper bound of the probability of error is given by (see (9-3-18)) PM 1 < 2 1− 2 Q M π 4 2 With PM = 10−6 and M = 8 we obtain k Eb,av = 1.3193 × 103 =⇒ Eb,av = 0.088 N0 212 k Eb,av 6 2−1 N M 0 Problem 9.21 : (a) The spectrum of the baseband signal is (see (4-4-12)) ΦV (f ) = where T = 1 2400 1 1 Φi i(f )|Xrc (f )|2 = |Xrc (f )|2 T T and Xrc (f ) = T 0 T (1 2 + cos(2πT (|f | − 1 )) 4T 0 ≤ |f | ≤ 41 T 1 ≤ |f | ≤ 43 4T T otherwise If the carrier signal has the form c(t) = A cos(2πfc t), then the spectrum of the DSB-SC modulated signal, ΦU (f ), is A ΦU (f ) = [ΦV (f − fc ) + ΦV (f + fc )] 2 A sketch of ΦU (f ) is shown in the next figure. AT2 2 -fc-3/4T -fc -fc+3/4T fc-3/4T fc fc+3/4T (b) Assuming bandpass coherent demodulation using a matched filter, the received signal r (t) is first passed through a linear filter with impulse response gR (t) = Axrc (T − t) cos(2πfc (T − t)) The output of the matched filter is sampled at t = T and the samples are passed to the detector. The detector is a simple threshold device that decides if a binary 1 or 0 was transmitted depending on the sign of the input samples. The following figure shows a block diagram of the optimum bandpass coherent demodulator. Bandpass r (t) ✲ matched filter gR (t) t= ✗ ❅ ❅ .. ✂. ❘ 213 T ✲ Detector (Threshold device) ✲ Problem 9.22 : (a) The power spectral density of X (t) is given by (see (4-4-12)) Φx (f ) = 1 Φa (f )|GT (f )|2 T The Fourier transform of g (t) is GT (f ) = F [g (t)] = AT Hence, sin πf T −jπf T e πf T |GT (f )|2 = (AT )2 sinc2 (f T ) and therefore, Φx (f ) = A2 T Φa (f )sinc2 (f T ) = A2 T sinc2 (f T ) (b) If g1 (t) is used instead of g (t) and the symbol interval is T , then 1 Φa (f )|G2T (f )|2 T 1 (A2T )2 sinc2 (f 2T ) = 4A2 T sinc2 (f 2T ) = T Φx (f ) = (c) If we precode the input sequence as bn = an + αan−3 , then 1 + α2 m = 0 α m = ±3 φb (m) = 0 otherwise and therefore, the power spectral density Φb (f ) is Φb (f ) = 1 + α2 + 2α cos(2πf 3T ) To obtain a null at f = 1 , 3T the parameter α should be such that 1 + α2 + 2α cos(2πf 3T )|f = 1 = 0 =⇒ α = −1 3 (c) The answer to this question is no. This is because Φb (f ) is an analytic function and unless it is identical to zero it can have at most a countable number of zeros. This property of the analytic functions is also referred as the theorem of isolated zeros. 214 Problem 9.23 : The roll-off factor β is related to the bandwidth by the expression 1+β = 2W , or equivalently T R(1 + β ) = 2W . The following table shows the symbol rate for the various values of the excess bandwidth and for W = 1500 Hz. β R .25 .33 .50 .67 .75 1.00 2400 2256 2000 1796 1714 1500 The above results were obtained with the assumption that double-sideband PAM is employed, so the available lowpass bandwidth will be from −W = 3000 to W Hz. If single-sideband 2 transmission is used, then the spectral efficiency is doubled, and the above symbol rates R are doubled. Problem 9.24 : The following table shows the precoded sequence, the transmitted amplitude levels, the received signal levels and the decoded sequence, when the data sequence 10010110010 modulates a duobinary transmitting filter. Data seq. Dn : Precoded seq. Pn : Transmitted seq. In : Received seq. Bn : Decoded seq. Dn : 1 01 -1 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 2 0 1 01 0 01 -1 -1 1 0 -2 0 1 01 1 0 01 0 0 01 -1 -1 -1 1 0 -2 -2 0 1 0 01 0 1 1 2 0 Problem 9.25 : The following table shows the precoded sequence, the transmitted amplitude levels, the received signal levels and the decoded sequence, when the data sequence 10010110010 modulates a modified duobinary transmitting filter. Data seq. Dn : Precoded seq. Pn : Transmitted seq. In : Received seq. Bn : Decoded seq. Dn : 1 001 0 01 011 -1 -1 1 -1 1 1 2 002 1 001 215 0 1 1 0 01 0 1 0 0 0 01 0 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 -1 0 -2 -2 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 01 0 Problem 9.26 : Let X (z ) denote the Z -transform of the sequence xn , that is xn z −n X (z ) = n Then the precoding operation can be described as P (z ) = D (z ) X (z ) mod − M where D (z ) and P (z ) are the Z -transforms of the data and precoded dequences respectively. For example, if M = 2 and X (z ) = 1 + z −1 (duobinary signaling), then P (z ) = D (z ) =⇒ P (z ) = D (z ) − z −1 P (z ) 1 + z −1 which in the time domain is written as pn = d n − pn − 1 and the subtraction is mod-2. However, the inverse filter X1z ) exists only if x0 , the first coefficient of X (z ) is relatively prime ( with M . If this is not the case, then the precoded symbols pn cannot be determined uniquely from the data sequence dn . In the example given in the book, where x0 = 2 we note that whatever the value of dn (0 or 1), the value of (2dn mod 2) will be zero, hence this precoding scheme cannot work. Problem 9.27 : (a) The frequency response of the RC filter is C (f ) = R 1 j 2πRCf 1 + j 2πRCf = 1 1 + j 2πRCf The amplitude and the phase spectrum of the filter are : | C (f )| = 1 2 (RC )2 f 2 1 + 4π 1 2 , θc (f ) = arctan(−2πRCf ) The envelope delay is τc (f ) = − 1 1 dθc (f ) RC −2πRC =− = 2π df 2π 1 + 4π 2 (RC )2 f 2 1 + 4π 2 (RC )2 f 2 216 A plot of τ (f ) with RC = 10−6 is shown in the next figure : 10 x -7 10 9.999 9.998 9.997 Tc(f) 9.996 9.995 9.994 9.993 9.992 9.991 9.99 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 Frequency (f) (b) The following figure is a plot of the amplitude characteristics of the RC filter, |C (f )|. The values of the vertical axis indicate that |C (f )| can be considered constant for frequencies up to 2000 Hz. Since the same is true for the envelope delay, we conclude that a lowpass signal of bandwidth ∆f = 1 KHz will not be distorted if it passes the RC filter. |C(f)| 1 0.999 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 Frequency (f) Problem 9.28 : Let GT (f ) and GR (f ) be the frequency response of the transmitting and receiving filter. Then, the condition for zero ISI implies T, T 1 GT (f )C (f )GR (f ) = Xrc (f ) = 2 [1 + cos(2πT (|f | − T )], 0, 0 ≤ |f | ≤ 41 T 1 ≤ |f | ≤ 43 4T T |f | > 43 T Since the additive noise is white, the optimum tansmitting and receiving filter characteristics 217 are given by (see (9-2-81)) 1 | G T (f )| = |Xrc (f )| 2 1 | C (f )| 2 Thus, | G T (f )| = | G R (f )| = 1 | G R (f )| = , T 1+0.3 cos 2πf T 1 2 , 1 T (1+cos(2πT (|f |− T ) 2(1+0.3 cos 2πf T ) |Xrc (f )| 2 1 2 1 | C (f )| 2 0 ≤ |f | ≤ , 1 4T 0, 1 4T 3 4T ≤ |f | ≤ otherwise Problem 9.29 : A 4-PAM modulation can accomodate k = 2 bits per transmitted symbol. Thus, the symbol interval duration is : k 1 T= = sec 9600 4800 Since, the channel’s bandwidth is W = 2400 = 21 , in order to achieve the maximum rate of T transmission, Rmax = 21 , the spectrum of the signal pulse should be : T X (f ) = T Π f 2W Then, the magnitude frequency response of the optimum transmitting and receiving filter is (see (9-2-81)) | G T (f )| = | G R (f )| = 1 + 2 f 2400 1 4 Π f 2W = 1+ Problem 9.30 : We already know that 2 σv = ∞ −∞ Pav = | G T (f )| = Φnn (f )|GR (f )|2 df d2 T W −W |GT (f )|2 df |Xrc (f )| , |f | ≤ W |GR (f )||C (f )| 218 2 f 2400 0, 1 4 , |f | < 2400 otherwise From these 2 σv 1 = 2 d Pav T W −W Φnn (f )|GR (f )|2 df W −W |Xrc (f )|2 df | G R (f )| 2 | C (f )| 2 (4) The optimum |GR (f )| can be found by applying the Cauchy-Schwartz inequality ∞ −∞ ∞ |U1 (f )|2df −∞ |U2 (f )|2df ≥ ∞ −∞ |U1 (f )||U2 (f )|df 2 where |U1 (f )|, |U2 (f )| are defined as |U1 (f )| = | Φnn (f )||GR (f )| |U2 (f )| = |Xrc (f )| |GR (f )||C (f )| The minimum value of (1) is obtained when |U1 (f )| is proportional to |U2 (f )|, i.e. |U1 (f )| = K |U2 (f )| or, equivalently, when | G R (f )| = √ K |Xrc (f )|1/2 , [N0 /2]1/4 |C (f )|1/2 |f | ≤ W where K is an arbitrary constant. By setting it appropriately, | G R (f )| = |Xrc (f )|1/2 , |C (f )|1/2 |f | ≤ W The corresponding modulation filter has a magnitude characteristic of | G T (f )| = |Xrc (f )|1/2 |Xrc (f )| = , |GR (f )||C (f )| |C (f )|1/2 |f | ≤ W Problem 9.31 : In the case where the channel distortion is fully precompensated at the transmitter, the loss of SNR is given by W X (f ) rc 10 log L1 , with L1 = − W | C (f )| 2 whereas in the case of the equally split filters, the loss of SNR is given by 10 log[L2 ]2 , with L2 = W −W Xrc (f ) | C (f )| Assuming that 1/T = W , so that we have a raised cosine characteristic with β = 0, we have 219 Xrc (f ) = Then 1 π |f | 1 + cos 2W W πf W 1 [1+cos W ] 0 2W |C (f )|2 πf W /2 1 [1+cos W ] 20 2W 1 5π −6 2π L1 = 2 = = + πf W 1 [1+cos W ] W/2 2W 1/4 Hence, the loss for the first type of filters is 10 log L1 = 1.89 dB. In a similar way, πf 1 [1+cos L2 = 2 0W 2W |C (f )W | W /2 1 [1+cos 0 2W 1 3π −2 2π =2 = πf W + πf W 1 [1+cos W ] W/2 2W 1/2 Hence, the loss for the second type of filters is 10 log[L2 ]2 = 1.45 dB. As expected, the second type of filters which split the channel characteristics between the transmitter and the receiver exhibit a smaller SNR loss. Problem 9.32 : The state transition matrix of the (0,1) runlength-limited code is : D= 11 10 The eigenvalues of D are the roots of det(D − λI ) = −λ(1 − λ) − 1 = λ2 − λ − 1 The roots of the characteristic equation are : λ1,2 √ 1± 5 = 2 Thus, the capacity of the (0,1) runlength-limited code is : √ 1± 5 C (0, 1) = log2 ( ) = 0.6942 2 The capacity of a (1, ∞) code is found from Table 9-4-1 to be 0.6942. As it is observed, the two codes have exactly the same capacity. This result is to be expected since the (0,1) runlengthlimited code and the (1, ∞) code produce the same set of code sequences of length n, N (n), 220 with a renaming of the bits from 0 to 1 and vise versa. For example, the (0,1) runlength-limited code with a renaming of the bits, can be described as the code with no minimum number of 1’s between 0’s in a sequence, and at most one 1 between two 0’s. In terms of 0’s, this is simply the code with no restrictions on the number of adjacent 0’s and no consequtive 1’s, that is the (1, ∞) code. Problem 9.33 : Let S0 represent the state that the running polarity is zero, and S1 the state that there exists some polarity (dc component). The following figure depicts the transition state diagram of the AMI code : 1/s ✛✘ (t) ✏ S0 0/0 ✒✑ ✕✚✙ ✛ ✲ ✏ ✛✘ S 1❑ 0/0 ✒✑ ✚✙ 1/ − s(t) The state transition matrix is : D= 11 11 The eigenvalues of the matrix D can be found from det(D − λI ) = 0 =⇒ (1 − λ)2 − 1 = 0 or λ(2 − λ) = 0 The largest real eigenvalue is λmax = 2, so that : C = log2 λmax = 1 Problem 9.34 : Let {bk } be a binary sequence, taking the values 1, 0 depending on the existence of polarization at the transmitted sequence up to the time instant k . For the AMI code, bk is expressed as bk = ak ⊕ bk−1 = ak ⊕ ak−1 ⊕ ak−2 ⊕ . . . where ⊕ denotes modulo two addition. Thus, the AMI code can be described as the RDS code, with RDS (=bk ) denoting the binary digital sum modulo 2 of the input bits. 221 Problem 9.35 : Defining the efficiency as : efficiency = k n log2 3 we obtain : Code 1B1T 3B2T 4B3T 6B4T Efficiency 0.633 0.949 0.844 0.949 Problem 9.36 : (a) The characteristic polynomial of D is : det(D − λI ) = det 1−λ 1 = λ2 − λ − 1 1 −λ The eigenvalues of D are the roots of the characteristic polynomial, that is √ 1± 5 λ1,2 = 2 Thus, the largest eigenvalue of D is λmax = √ 1+ 5 2 and therefore : √ 1+ 5 C = log2 = 0.6942 2 (b) The characteristic polynomial is det(D − λI ) = (1 − λ)2 with roots λ1,2 = 1. Hence, C = log2 1 = 0. The state diagram of this code is depicted in the next figure. 1 ✛✘ ✏ ✲ ✏ ✛✘ S0 0 ✒✑ ✕✚✙ 1❑ 1 ✒✑ ✚✙ S (c) As it is observed the second code has zero capacity. This result is to be expected since with the second code we can have at most n + 1 different sequences of length n, so that C = lim n→∞ 1 1 log2 N (n) = lim log2 (n + 1) = 0 n→∞ n n 222 The n + 1 possible sequences are 0...01...1 k (n sequences) n−k and the sequence 11 . . . 1, which occurs if we start from state S1 . Problem 9.37 : (a) The two symbols, dot and dash, can be represented as 10 and 1110 respectively, where 1 denotes line closure and 0 an open line. Hence, the constraints of the code are : • A 0 is always followed by 1. • Only sequences having one or three repetitions of 1, are allowed. The next figure depicts the state diagram of the code, where the state S0 denotes the reception of a dot or a dash, and state Si denotes the reception of i adjacent 1’s. ✛✘✛✘✛✘ 1✲ 1✲ S1 S2 S3 ✚✙✚✙✚✙ s ❅❅ 0 ❅ ❅❅ 0 ❘ ✛✘ ❅❅ ✠ 1 ❅S 0 ✚✙ (b) The state transition matrix is : 0 1 0 1 D= 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 (c) The characteristic equation of the matrix D is : det(D − λI ) = 0 =⇒ λ4 − λ2 − 1 = 0 The roots of the characteristic equation are : λ1,2 √ 1+ 5 =± 2 1 2 λ3,4 223 √ 1− 5 =± 2 1 2 Thus, the capacity of the code is : C = log2 λmax = log2 λ1 = log2 √ 1+ 5 2 1 2 = 0.3471 Problem 9.38 : The state diagram of Fig. P9-31 describes a runlength constrained code, that forbids any sequence containing a run of more than three adjacent symbols of the same kind. The state transition matrix is : 000100 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 D= 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 001000 The corresponding trellis is shown in the next figure : History 111 t ✟ t ✟ t ✟ t ❏ ✟ ✟ ✟❏ ✟ t t t 11 ✟✟ ❏❏ ✟✟✟ t ❏ ❅ ✟ ✟✟ ❅ ✟ t❏ ❍ ❍ t ✟ ✟ ❅ ✟✟ ✟t 1 ❍✟ ❅ t ✟ ... ❏✟❅ ❏ ❅ ✟❍ ✟❍ t ❅❏ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✟❍ t ✡ t ✡ t✡ ❍❍ ❅ ❍ ❏ ❏ ❏❅ 0 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍❍ t t ✡ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ t✡ t✡ 00 ❍ t ❍ t ❍t ❍ 000 ✡ ❍ ✡ ❍ ✡ ❍ t Problem 9.39 : The state transition matrix of the (2,7) runlength-limited code is the 8 × 8 matrix : D= 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 CHAPTER 10 Problem 10.1 : Suppose that am = +1 is the transmitted signal. Then the probability of error will be : Pe|1 = P (ym < 0|am = +1) = P (1 + nm + im < 0) 1 P (1/2 + nm < 0) + = 4 1 3 1 1 = +Q Q 4 2σn 4 2σn 1 1 P (3/2 + nm < 0) + P (1 + nm < 0) 4 2 1 1 +Q 2 σn Due to the symmetry of the intersymbol interference, the probability of error, when am = −1 is transmitted, is the same. Thus, the above result is the average probability of error. Problem 10.2 : (a) If the transmitted signal is : ∞ r (t) = n=−∞ In h(t − nT ) + n(t) then the output of the receiving filter is : ∞ y (t) = n=−∞ In x(t − nT ) + ν (t) where x(t) = h(t) h(t) and ν (t) = n(t) h(t). If the sampling time is off by 10%, then the 1 1 samples at the output of the correlator are taken at t = (m ± 10 )T . Assuming that t = (m − 10 )T without loss of generality, then the sampled sequence is : ∞ ym = n=−∞ In x((m − 1 1 T − nT ) + ν ((m − )T ) 10 10 1 If the signal pulse is rectangular with amplitude A and duration T , then ∞ −∞ In x((m − 10 T − n= nT ) is nonzero only for n = m and n = m − 1 and therefore, the sampled sequence is given by : 1 1 1 T ) + Im−1 x(T − T ) + ν ((m − )T ) 10 10 10 9 12 1 = Im A2 T + Im−1 A T + ν ((m − )T ) 10 10 10 ym = Im x(− 225 The variance of the noise is : N0 2 AT 2 2 σν = and therefore, the SNR is : 9 SNR = 10 As it is observed, there is a loss of 10 log10 2 2(A2 T )2 81 2A2 T = N0 A2 T 100 N0 81 100 = −0.9151 dB due to the mistiming. (b) Recall from part (a) that the sampled sequence is ym = 9 1 Im A2 T + Im−1 A2 T + νm 10 10 2 The term Im−1 A10T expresses the ISI introduced to the system. If Im = 1 is transmitted, then the probability of error is 1 1 P (e|Im = 1, Im−1 = 1) + P (e|Im = 1, Im−1 = −1) 2 2 8 −A2 T − ν 2 − 10 A2 T − ν 2 1 1 =√ e N0 A2 T dν + √ e N0 A2 T dν 2 πN0 A2 T −∞ 2 πN0 A2 T −∞ P (e|Im = 1) = 1 2A2 T 1 Q +Q = 2 N0 2 8 10 2 2A2 T N0 Since the symbols of the binary PAM system are equiprobable the previous derived expression is the probability of error when a symbol by symbol detector is employed. Comparing this with the probability of error of a system with no ISI, we observe that there is an increase of the probability of error by 1 Pdiff (e) = Q 2 8 10 2 2A2 T 1 2A2 T −Q N0 2 N0 Problem 10.3 : (a) Taking the inverse Fourier transform of H (f ), we obtain : h(t) = F −1[H (f )] = δ (t) + α α δ (t − t0 ) + δ (t + t0 ) 2 2 y (t) = s(t) h(t) = s(t) + α α s(t − t0 ) + s(t + t0 ) 2 2 Hence, 226 (b) If the signal s(t) is used to modulate the sequence {In }, then the transmitted signal is : ∞ u(t) = n=−∞ In s(t − nT ) The received signal is the convolution of u(t) with h(t). Hence, ∞ y (t) = u(t) h(t) = ∞ = n=−∞ n=−∞ In s(t − nT ) + In s(t − nT ) δ (t) + α α δ (t − t0 ) + δ (t + t0 ) 2 2 α∞ α∞ In s(t − t0 − nT ) + In s(t + t0 − nT ) 2 n=−∞ 2 n=−∞ Thus, the output of the matched filter s(−t) at the time instant t1 is : ∞ w (t1 ) = n=−∞ + + In ∞ −∞ α∞ In 2 n=−∞ α∞ In 2 n=−∞ s(τ − nT )s(τ − t1 )dτ ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ s(τ − t0 − nT )s(τ − t1 )dτ s(τ + t0 − nT )s(τ − t1 )dτ If we denote the signal s(t) s(t) by x(t), then the output of the matched filter at t1 = kT is : ∞ w (kT ) = n=−∞ In x(kT − nT ) α∞ α∞ In x(kT − t0 − nT ) + In x(kT + t0 − nT ) + 2 n=−∞ 2 n=−∞ (c) With t0 = T and k = n in the previous equation, we obtain : wk = Ik x0 + n=k In xk−n α α α α + Ik x−1 + In xk−n−1 + Ik x1 + In xk−n+1 2 2 n=k 2 2 n=k α α α α = Ik x0 + x−1 + x1 + In xk−n + xk−n−1 + xk−n+1 2 2 2 2 n=k The terms under the summation is the ISI introduced by the channel. If the signal s(t) is designed so as to satisfy the Nyquist criterion, then : xk = 0, k = 0 227 and the aobove expression simplifies to : wk = Ik + α (Ik+1 + Ik−1 ) 2 Problem 10.4 : (a) Each segment of the wire-line can be considered as a bandpass filter with bandwidth W = 1200 Hz. Thus, the highest bit rate that can be transmitted without ISI by means of binary PAM is : R = 2W = 2400 bps (b) The probability of error for binary PAM trasmission is : P2 = Q 2E b N0 Hence, using mathematical tables for the function Q[·], we find that P2 = 10−7 is obtained for : 2E b Eb = 5.2 =⇒ = 13.52 = 11.30 dB N0 N0 (c) The received power PR is related to the desired SNR per bit through the relation : PR 1 Eb Eb = =R N0 T N0 N0 Hence, with N0 = 4.1 × 10−21 we obtain : PR = 4.1 × 10−21 × 1200 × 13.52 = 6.6518 × 10−17 = −161.77 dBW Since the power loss of each segment is : Ls = 50 Km × 1 dB/Km = 50 dB the transmitted power at each repeater should be : PT = PR + Ls = −161.77 + 50 = −111.77 dBW Problem 10.5 : xn = ∞ −∞ h(t + nT )h∗ (t)dt 228 ∞ vk = Then : 1 E 2 ∗ [vj vk ] = = 1 E 2 −∞ ∞ ∞ −∞ −∞ ∞ ∞1 −∞ −∞ 2 E = N0 ∞ −∞ z (t)h∗ (t − kT )dt z (a)h∗ (a − jT )z ∗ (b)h(b − kT )dadb [z (a)z ∗ (b)] h∗ (a − jT )h(b − kT )dadb h∗ (a − jT )h(a − kT )da = N0 xj −k Problem 10.6 : In the case of duobinary signaling, the output of the matched filter is : x(t) = sinc(2W t) + sinc(2W t − 1) and the samples xn−m are given by : xn−m = x(nT − mT ) = 1 n−m= 0 1 n−m= 1 0 otherwise Therefore, the metric CM (I) in the Viterbi algorithm becomes In rn − CM (I) = 2 n In Im xn−m n In rn − =2 n n m 2 In − In In−1 n In (2rn − In − In−1 ) = n Problem 10.7 : (a) The output of the matched filter demodulator is : ∞ Ik y (t) = k =−∞ ∞ = ∞ −∞ gT (τ − kTb )gR (t − τ )dτ + ν (t) Ik x(t − kTb ) + ν (t) k =−∞ where, x(t) = gT (t) gR (t) = 229 sin πt cos πt T T πt t2 1 − 4T2 T Hence, ∞ y (mTb ) = Ik x(mTb − kTb ) + v (mTb ) k =−∞ = Im + The term mission. 1 I π m−1 1 1 Im−1 + Im+1 + ν (mTb ) π π 1 + π Im+1 represents the ISI introduced by doubling the symbol rate of trans- (b) In the next figure we show one trellis stage for the ML sequence detector. Since there is postcursor ISI, we delay the received signal, used by the ML decoder to form the metrics, by one sample. Thus, the states of the trellis correspond to the sequence (Im−1 , Im ), and the transition labels correspond to the symbol Im+1 . Two branches originate from each state. The upper branch is associated with the transmission of −1, whereas the lower branch is associated with the transmission of 1. (Im−1 , Im ) Im+1 ✉ -1 -1 €€-1 -1 1 1 -1 11 ✉ ✑ €€ ✑✑ €€ ✑€ ✉ -1 €€ ✑ 1 € ✉ ✏ ◗ € ✏✏✏ ✑ 1 -1◗◗€€€ ✑✏✏ ✑✏ ◗ 1 € ✉ ✏ € ✉ ✏ ✏ ✏✏ ✏◗◗ -1 ✏ ◗✉ ◗ ✏ ✉✏ 1 Problem 10.8 : (a) The output of the matched filter at the time instant mT is : ym = k 1 Im xk−m + νm = Im + Im−1 + νm 4 The autocorrelation function of the noise samples νm is E [νk νj ] = N0 xk−j 2 Thus, the variance of the noise is N0 N0 x0 = 2 2 √ If a symbol by symbol detector is employed and we assume that the symbols Im = Im−1 = Eb √ have been transmitted, then the probability of error P (e|Im = Im−1 = Eb ) is : 2 σν = P (e|Im = Im−1 = Eb ) = P (ym < 0|Im = Im−1 = 230 Eb ) 5 1 = P (νm < − Eb ) = √ 4 πN0 1 =√ 2π −5 4 2Eb N0 −∞ ν2 e− 2 dν = Q −5 4 √ Eb −∞ 5 4 ν2 m −N e 0 dνm 2E b N0 √ If however Im−1 = − Eb , then : P (e|Im = Since the two symbols √ Eb , Im−1 = − Eb ) = P ( 3 3 Eb + νm < 0) = Q 4 4 2E b N0 √ Eb , − Eb are used with equal probability, we conclude that : P (e) = P (e|Im = 5 1 Q 2 4 = Eb) = P (e|Im = − Eb ) 2E b 3 1 +Q N0 2 4 2E b N0 (b) In the next figure we plot the error probability obtained in part (a) (log10 (P (e))) vs. the SNR per bit and the error probability for the case of no ISI. As it observed from the figure, the relative difference in SNR of the error probability of 10−6 is 2 dB. -2 -2.5 -3 log(P(e) -3.5 -4 -4.5 -5 -5.5 -6 -6.5 -7 6 7 8 9 10 11 SNR/bit, dB 12 Problem 10.9 : For the DFE we have that : ˆ Ik = 0 j =−K 1 K2 cj u k − j + 231 j =1 cj Ik−j 13 14 ˆ2 We want to minimize J = E Ik − Ik . Taking the derivative of J, with respect to the real and imaginary parts of cl = al + jbl , 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 , we obtain : ∂J ∂al ∗ ∗ ˆ∗ ˆ = 0 ⇒ E −Ik−l Ik − Ik − Ik−l Ik − Ik ∗ ˆ =0 E Re Ik−l Ik − Ik =0⇒ and similarly : ∂J ∗ ˆ = 0 ⇒ E I m Ik−l Ik − Ik ∂bl Hence, ∗ ˆ E Ik−l Ik − Ik =0 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 = 0, (1) Since the information symbols are uncorrelated : E [Ik Il∗ ] = δkl . We also have : E [Ik u∗ ] = E Ik l = fl∗ k − L m=0 ∗ fm Il∗ m + n∗ − l Hence, equation (1) gives : ∗ ˆ∗ E Ik Ik−l = E Ik Ik−l , 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 ⇒ K2 0 ∗ 0=E j =1 cj Ik −j Ik −l ⇒ j = − K 1 cj u k − j + 0 0= j =−K1 cj fl−j + cl ⇒ cl = − 0=−K1 cj fl−j , 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 j which is the desired equation for the feedback taps. Problem 10.10 : (a) The equivalent discrete-time impulse response of the channel is : 1 h(t) = n=−1 hn δ (t − nT ) = 0.3δ (t + T ) + 0.9δ (t) + 0.3δ (t − T ) If by {cn } we denote the coefficients of the FIR equalizer, then the equalized signal is : 1 qm = n=−1 cn hm−n which in matrix notation is written as : 0.9 0.3 0. c− 1 0 0.3 0.9 0.3 c0 = 1 0. 0.3 0.9 0 c1 232 The coefficients of the zero-force equalizer can be found by solving the previous matrix equation. Thus, c− 1 −0.4762 c0 = 1.4286 −0.4762 c1 (b) The values of qm for m = ±2, ±3 are given by 1 q2 = n=−1 1 q−2 = n=−1 cn h2−n = c1 h1 = −0.1429 cn h−2−n = c−1 h−1 = −0.1429 1 q3 = q−3 = n=−1 1 n=−1 cn h3−n = 0 cn h−3−n = 0 Problem 10.11 : (a) The output of the zero-force equalizer is : 1 qm = n=−1 cn xmn With q0 = 1 and qm = 0 for m = 0, we obtain the system : 1.0 0.1 −0.5 c− 1 0 1.0 0.1 c0 = 1 −0.2 0.05 −0.2 1.0 0 c1 Solving the previous system in terms of the equalizer’s coefficients, we obtain : c− 1 0.000 c0 = 0.980 c1 0.196 233 (b) The output of the equalizer is : qm = 0 c−1 x−2 = 0 c−1 x−1 + c0 x−2 = −0.49 0 1 0 c0 x2 + x1 c1 = 0.0098 c1 x2 = 0.0098 0 m ≤ −4 m = −3 m = −2 m = −1 m=0 m=1 m=2 m=3 m≥4 Hence, the residual ISI sequence is residual ISI = {. . . , 0, −0.49, 0, 0, 0, 0.0098, 0.0098, 0, . . .} and its span is 6 symbols. Problem 10.12 : (a) If {cn } denote the coefficients of the zero-force equalizer and {qm } is the sequence of the equalizer’s output samples, then : 1 qm = n=−1 cn xm−n where {xk } is the noise free response of the matched filter demodulator sampled at t = kT . With q−1 = 0, q0 = q1 = Eb , we obtain the system : Eb 0.9Eb 0.1Eb c− 1 0 Eb 0.9Eb c0 = Eb 0.9Eb 0.1Eb 0.9Eb Eb c1 Eb The solution to the system is : c− 1 c0 c1 = 0.2137 −0.3846 1.3248 (b) The set of noise variables {νk } at the output of the sampler is a gaussian distributed sequence with zero-mean and autocorrelation function : Rν (k ) = N0 x 2k 0 |k | ≤ 2 otherwise Thus, the autocorrelation function of the noise at the output of the equalizer is : Rn (k ) = Rν (k ) c(k ) c(−k ) 234 where c(k ) denotes the discrete time impulse response of the equalizer. Therefore, the autocorrelation sequence of the noise at the output of the equalizer is : Rn (k ) = N0 Eb 2 0.9402 k=0 1.3577 k = ±1 −0.0546 k = ±2 0.1956 k = ±3 0.0283 k = ±4 0 otherwise To find an estimate of the error probability for the sequence detector, we ignore the residual interference due to the finite length of the equalizer, and we only consider paths of length two. Thus, if we start at state I0 = 1 and the transmitted symbols are (I1 , I2 ) = (1, 1) an error is made by the sequence detector if the path (−1, 1) is more probable, given the received values of r1 and r2 . The metric for the path (I1 , I2 ) = (1, 1) is : r1 − 2 E b r2 − 2 E b µ2 (1, 1) = [ r1 − 2Eb r2 − 2Eb ]C−1 where : C= N0 Eb 2 0.9402 1.3577 1.3577 0.9402 Similarly, the metric of the path (I1 , I2 ) = (−1, 1) is µ2 (−1, 1) = [ r1 r2 ]C−1 r1 r2 Hence, the probability of error is : P2 = P (µ2 (−1, 1) < µ2 (1, 1)) and upon substitution of r1 = 2Eb + n1 , r2 = 2Eb + n2 , we obtain : P2 = P (n1 + n2 < −2Eb ) Since n1 and n2 are zero-mean Gaussian variables, their sum is also zero-mean Gaussian with variance : N0Eb N0 Eb = 4.5958 σ2 = (2 × 0.9402 + 2 × 1.3577) 2 2 and therefore : 8E b P2 = Q 4.5958N0 The bit error probability is P2 . 2 235 Problem 10.13 : The optimum tap coefficients of the zero-force equalizer can be found by solving the system: 1.0 0.3 0.0 c− 1 0 0.2 1.0 0.3 c0 = 1 c1 0.0 0.2 1.0 0 Hence, c− 1 −0.3409 c0 = 1.1364 −0.2273 c1 The output of the equalizer is : qm = m ≤ −3 m = −2 m = −1 m=0 m=1 m=2 m≥3 0 c−1 x−1 = −0.1023 0 1 0 c1 x1 = −0.0455 0 Hence, the residual ISI sequence is : residual ISI = {. . . , 0, −0.1023, 0, 0, 0, −0.0455, 0, . . .} Problem 10.14 : (a) If we assume that the signal pulse has duration T , then the ouput of the matched filter at the time instant t = T is : y (T ) = = = T 0 T 0 T 0 r (τ )s(τ )dτ (s(τ ) + αs(τ − T ) + n(τ ))s(τ )dτ s2 (τ )dτ + = Es + n T 0 n(τ )s(τ )dτ where Es is the energy of the signal pulse and n is a zero-mean Gaussian random variable with 2 variance σn = N0 Es . Similarly, the output of the matched filter at t = 2T is : 2 y (2T ) = α T 0 s2 (τ )dτ + = α Es + n 236 T 0 n(τ )s(τ )dτ (b) If the transmitted sequence is : ∞ x(t) = n=−∞ In s(t − nT ) with In taking the values 1, −1 with equal probability, then the output of the demodulator at the time instant t = kT is yk = Ik Es + αIk−1Es + nk The term αIk−1Es expresses the ISI due to the signal reflection. If a symbol by symbol detector is employed and the ISI is ignored, then the probability of error is : 1 1 P (error|In = 1, In−1 = 1) + P (error|In = 1, In−1 = −1) 2 2 1 1 = P ((1 + α)Es + nk < 0) + P ((1 − α)Es + nk < 0) 2 2 2E 1 2(1 + α) s 1 2(1 − α)2 Es +Q Q = 2 N0 2 N0 P (e) = (c) To find the error rate performance of the DFE, we assume that the estimation of the parameter α is correct and that the probability of error at each time instant is the same. Since the transmitted symbols are equiprobable, we obtain : P (e) = P (error at k |Ik = 1) = P (error at k − 1)P (error at k |Ik = 1, error at k − 1) +P (no error at k − 1)P (error at k |Ik = 1, no error at k − 1) = P (e)P (error at k |Ik = 1, error at k − 1) +(1 − P (e))P (error at k |Ik = 1, no error at k − 1) = P (e)p + (1 − P (e))q where : p = P (error at k |Ik = 1, error at k − 1) 1 P (error at k |Ik = 1, Ik−1 = 1, error at k − 1) = 2 1 + P (error at k |Ik = 1, Ik−1 = −1, error at k − 1) 2 1 1 P ((1 + 2α)Es + nk < 0) + P ((1 − 2α)Es + nk < 0) = 2 2 2E 1 2(1 + 2α) s 1 2(1 − 2α)2 Es Q = +Q 2 N0 2 N0 237 and q = P (error at k |Ik = 1, no error at k − 1) 2E s N0 = P (Es + nk < 0) = Q Solving for P (e), we obtain : 2Es N0 Q q = P (e) = 1−p+q 1 − 1Q 2 2(1+2α)2 Es N0 2(1−2α)2 Es N0 − 1Q 2 +Q 2Es N0 A sketch of the detector structure is shown in the next figure. Input rk ✲ +n ✲+ − ✻ Estimate α ✲ Threshold device ✲ ×✛ n Output ak ˆ ✲ Delay ✛ Problem 10.15 : A discrete time transversal filter equivalent to the cascade of the trasmitting filter gT (t), the channel c(t), the matched filter at the receicer gR (t) and the sampler, has tap gain coefficients {xm }, where : 0.9 m = 0 xm = 0.3 m = ±1 0 otherwise The noise νk , at the output of the sampler, is a zero-mean Gaussian sequence with autocorrelation function : E [νk νl ] = σ 2 xk−l , |k − l | ≤ 1 If the Z -transform of the sequence {xm }, X (z ), assumes the factorization : X (z ) = F (z )F ∗ (z − 1 ) then the filter 1/F ∗ (z −1 ) can follow the sampler to white the noise sequence νk . In this case the output of the whitening filter, and input to the MSE equalizer, is the sequence : un = Ik fn−k + nk k 238 where nk is zero mean Gaussian with variance σ 2 . The optimum coefficients of the MSE equalizer, ck , satisfy : 1 n=−1 k = 0, ±1 cn Γkn = ξk , where : Γ(n − k ) = ξ( k ) = With xn−k + σ 2 δn,k , |n − k | ≤ 1 0 otherwise f−k , −1 ≤ k ≤ 0 0 otherwise X (z ) = 0.3z + 0.9 + 0.3z −1 = (f0 + f1 z −1 )(f0 + f1 z ) we obtain the parameters f0 and f1 as : √ ±√0.7854 f0 = , ± 0.1146 √ ±√0.1146 ± 0.7854 f1 = The parameters f0 and f1 should have the same sign since f0 f1 = 0.3. However, the sign itself does not play any role if the data are differentially encoded. To have a stable inverse system system F ∗ (z −1 ) = f0 + f1 z 1/F ∗ (z −1 ), we select f0 and f1 in such a way that the zero of the √ √ is inside the unit circle. Thus, we choose f0 = 0.1146 and f1 = 0.7854 and therefore, the desired system for the equalizer’s coefficients is √ 0.9 + 0.1 0.3 0.0 c− 1 √0.7854 0.3 0.9 + 0.1 0.3 c0 = 0.1146 0.0 0.3 0.9 + 0.1 c1 0 Solving this system, we obtain c−1 = 0.8596, c1 = −0.0266 c0 = 0.0886, Problem 10.16 : (a) The spectrum of the band limited equalized pulse is X (f ) = 1 2W = 1 2W = 1 W ∞ n=−∞ x( 2n )e−j W 0 2 + 2 cos πf W 0 1 + 1 cos πf W 0 239 πnf W |f | ≤ W otherwise |f | ≤ W otherwise |f | ≤ W otherwise where W = 1 2Tb (b) The following table lists the possible transmitted sequences of length 3 and the corresponding output of the detector. -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1 -1 11 11 As it is observed there are 5 possible output P (bm = ±2) = 1 and P (bm = ±4) = 1 . 4 8 -1 -4 1 -2 -1 0 12 -1 -2 10 -1 2 14 levels bm , with probability P (bm = 0) = 1 , 4 (c) The transmitting filter GT (f ), the receiving filter GR (f ) and the equalizer GE (f ) satisfy the condition G T (f )G R (f )G E (f ) = X (f ) The power spectral density of the noise at the output of the equalizer is : Sν (f ) = Sn (f )|GR (f )GE (f )|2 = σ 2 |GR (f )GE (f )|2 With G T (f ) = G R (f ) = P (f ) = πT50 −πT50 |f | e 2 the variance of the output noise is : 2 σν =σ = = 2 ∞ −∞ 2 |GR (f )GE (f )| df = σ 2 ∞ −∞ 2 X (f ) df G T (f ) W |1 + cos πf |2 4 2 W df σ 2 −W π 2 T50 W 2 e−2πT50 |f | 2 W 8σ 2 πf 1 + cos e2πT50 f df 2 π 2 T50 W 2 0 W The value of the previous integral can be found using the formula : eax cosn bxdx = a2 1 (a cos bx + nb sin bx)ea x cosn−1 bx + n(n − 1)b2 + n2 b2 240 eax cosn−2 bxdx Thus, we obtain : 2 σν = 8σ 2 × 2 π 2 T50 W 2 − 2πT50 + π W 21T50 1 + π2 2 2πT50 4π 2 T50 + 4 W 2 e2πT50 W − 1 4πT50 e2πT50 W + 1 π2 2 4π 2 T50 + W 2 To find the probability of error using a symbol by symbol detector, we follow the same procedure as in Section 9.3.2. The results are the same with that obtained from a 3-point PAM constellation (0, ±2) used with a duobinary signal with output levels having the probability mass function given in part (b). An upper bound of the symbol probability of error is : P (e) < P (|ym| > 1|bm = 0)P (bm = 0) + 2P (|ym − 2| > 1|bm = 2)P (bm = 2) +2P (ym + 4 > 1|bm = −4)P (bm = −4) = P (|ym| > 1|bm = 0) [P (bm = 0) + 2P (bm = 2) + P (bm = −4)] 7 P (|ym| > 1|bm = 0) = 8 But P (|ym | > 1|bm = 0) = √ 2 2πσν ∞ 1 e−x 2 /2σ 2 ν dx Therefore, P (e) < 1 14 Q 8 σν Problem 10.17 : Since the partial response signal has memory length equal to 2, the corresponding trellis has 4 states which we label as (In−1 , In ). The following figure shows three frames of the trellis. The labels of the branches indicate the output of the partial response system. As it is observed the free distance between merging paths is 3, whereas the Euclidean distance is equal to dE = 22 + 42 + 22 = 24 (In−1 , In ) ✉ -4 ✲ ✉ -4 ✲ ✉ -4 ✲ ✉ (-1,-1) ❍ ❍❍ -2 ✒ ✒ (-1,1) ❍ ❍❍✉ ❥ ✉ ✉ -2 ✉ ✯ ✟ ❅❍✟✟ ❍❍ 0 (1,-1) ✟❅❍❍❍✉ ❍❍❍ ❥✉ ✟ ❥ ✉ ✉ (1,1) ✯ ✟ ❅✟ ✟❅ ❘ ✟✟ ❅ ✉ ✉ ✲ 241 ✉ ✉ Problem 10.18 : (a) X (z ) = F (z )F ∗ (z −1 ) = 1 z + 1 + 1 z −1 . Then, the covariance matrix Γ is : 2 2 √ 1 + N0 1/2 0 1/√2 1/2 and ξ = 1/ 2 1 + N0 Γ = 1/2 0 1/2 1 + N0 0 The optimum equalizer coefficients are given by : Copt = Γ−1 ξ (1 + N0 )2 − 1/4 1 = det(Γ) − 1 (1 + N0 ) 2 1/4 2 N0 + 3 N0 + 1 2 4 1 2 = √2 det(Γ) N0 + 3 N0 + 1 2 2 − N0 − 1 2 4 where det(Γ) = (1 + N0 ) (1 + N0 )2 − (b) √ − 1 (1 + N0 ) 1/4 1 / √2 2 (1 + N0 )2 − 1 (1 + N0 ) 1/ 2 2 − 1 (1 + N0 ) (1 + N0 )2 − 1/4 0 2 1 2 det(Γ − λI) = (1 + N0 − λ) (1 + N0 − λ)2 − 1 ⇒ 2 1 1 λ1 = 1 + N0 , λ2 = √2 + 1 + N0 , λ3 = 1 − √2 + N0 and the corresponding eigenvectors are : √ 1/2 1/√ 2 −1/ 2 √ 0 v1 = √ , v2 = 1/ 2 , v3 = −1/ 2 1/2 1/2 1/ 2 (c) Jmin (K )|K =1 = Jmin (1) = 1 − ξ Γ−1 ξ = (d) γ= 3 2 2N0 + 4N0 + 2N0 + 3/4 3 2 2N0 + 4N0 + 5N0 + 1 2 1 − Jmin (1) 2N0 + 3N0 + 3/4 = 3 2 Jmin (1) 2N0 + 4N0 + 1/4 Note that as N0 → 0, γ → 3. For N0 = 0.1, γ = 2.18 for the 3-tap equalizer and γ = 2 1 + N0 − 1 = 3.58, for the infinite-tap equalizer (as in example 10-2-1). Also, note that 1 γ = N0 = 10 for the case of no intersymbol interference. 242 Problem 10.19 : For the DFE we have that : ˆ Ik = 0 K2 j =−K 1 cj u k − j + The orthogonality principle is simply : E E ∗ k u k −l ∗ k Ik −l k ˆ = Ik − Ik = 0, for − K1 ≤ l ≤ 0 = 0, for 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 cj Ik−j , and j =1 ˆ E Ik u∗ −l = E Ik u∗ −l , −K1 ≤ l ≤ 0 k k ⇒ ˆ∗ E Ik I ∗ = E Ik Ik−l , 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 k −l Since the information symbols are uncorrelated : E [Ik Il∗ ] = aδkl , where a = E |Ik |2 is a constant whose value is not needed since it will be present in all terms and thus, cancelled out. In order to solve the above system, we also need E [uk u∗ ] , E [Ik u∗ ] . We have : l l E [uk u∗ ] = E l =a and L L n=0 fn Ik −n + nk m=0 L ∗ fm fm+k−l + N0 δkl m=0 E [Ik u∗ ] = E Ik l = afl∗ k − L m=0 ∗ fm Il∗ m + n∗ − l ∗ fm Il∗ m + n∗ − l Hence, the second equation of the orthogonality principle gives : ∗ ˆ∗ E Ik Ik−l = E Ik Ik−l , 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 ⇒ 0=E 0=a cl = − 0 j = − K 1 cj u k − j ∗ + K2 cj Ik−j Ik−l ⇒ j =1 0 j =−K1 cj fl−j + acl ⇒ 0 j =−K1 cj fl−j , 1 ≤ l ≤ K2 which is the desired equation for the feedback taps. The first equation of the orthogonality principle will give : ˆ E Ik u∗ −l = E Ik u∗ −l , −K1 ≤ l ≤ 0 ⇒ k k 0 j = − K 1 cj u k − j ∗ af−l = E ∗ af−l = 0 j = − K 1 cj a L m=0 + u ∗ −l ⇒ k K2 j =1 cj Ik −j ∗ fm fm+l−j + N0 δkl + a K2 ∗ j =1 cj fj −l , −K1 ≤ l ≤ 0 Substituting the expression for cj , 1 ≤ j ≤ K2 , that we found above : ∗ f−l = 0 j = − K 1 cj L m=0 ∗ fm fm+l−j + N0 δkl − K2 j =1 ∗ f−l = 0 j = − K 1 cj L m=0 ∗ fm fm+l−j + N0 δkl − 0 j = − K 1 cj 0 j =−K1 cj ψlj 0 m=−K1 cm fj −m fj∗−l , −K1 ≤ l ≤ 0 ⇒ K2 m=1 ∗ = f−l , −K1 ≤ l ≤ 0 243 ∗ fm−j fm−l , −K1 ≤ l ≤ 0 ⇒ where ψlj = the equalizer. −l m=0 ∗ fm fm+l−j + N0 δlj , which is the desired expression for the feedforward taps of Problem 10.20 : The tap coefficients for the feedback section of the DFE are given by the equation : ck = − 0=−K1 cj fk−j , k = 1, 2, ..., K2 j = − (c0 fk + c−1 fk+1 + ... + c−K1 fk+K1 ) But fk = 0 for k < 0 and k > L. Therefore : cL = −c0 fL , cL+1 = 0, cL+2 = 0, etc Problem 10.21 : (a) The tap coefficients for the feedback section of the DFE are given by the equation : ck = − 0=−K1 cj fk−j , 1 ≤ k ≤ K2 , and for the feedforward section as the solution to the equations : j 0 0 ∗ ∗ j =−K1 cj ψlj = −f−l , K1 ≤ l ≤ 0. In this case, K1 = 1, and hence : j =−K1 cj ψlj = −f−l , l = −1, 0 or : ∗ ψ0,0 c0 + ψ0,−1 c−1 = f0 ∗ ψ−1,0 c0 + ψ−1,−1 c−1 = f1 But ψlj = −l m=0 ∗ fm fm+l−j + N0 δlj , so the above system can be written : √ 1 1 + N0 c0 1 / √2 2 2 = 1 1 + N0 c− 1 1/ 2 2 so : c0 c− 1 =√ 1 2 1 2 2 N0 + 3 N0 + 2 1 4 + N0 N0 √ √2 2 2N0 ≈ , for N0 << 1 The coefficient for the feedback section is : 1 c1 = −c0 f1 = − √ c0 ≈ −1, for N0 << 1 2 (b) Jmin (1) = 1 − 0 j =−K 1 cj f−j = 2 2N0 + N0 2 2 N0 + 3 N0 + 2 244 1 4 ≈ 2N0 , for N0 << 1 (c) γ= 1 + 4N0 1 1 − Jmin (1) = ≈ , N0 << 1 Jmin (1) 2N0 (1 + 2N0 ) 2N0 (d) For the infinite tap DFE, we have from example 10-3-1 : Jmin = γ∞ = 1+N0 + 1−Jmin Jmin 2 √N0 = (1+N0 )2 −1 1−N0 ≈ 2N0 , N0 << 1 √ (1+N0 )2 −1 2N0 (e) For N0 = 0.1, we have : Jmin(1) = 0.146, γ = 5.83 (7.66 dB) Jmin = 0.128, γ∞ = 6.8 (8.32 dB) For N0 = 0.01, we have : γ = 51 (17.1 dB) Jmin (1) = 0.0193, Jmin = 0.0174, γ∞ = 56.6 (17.5 dB) The three-tap equalizer performs very wee compared to the infinite-tap equalizer. The difference in performance is 0.6 dB for N0 = 0.1 and 0.4 dB for N0 = 0.01. Problem 10.22 : (a) We have that : = 900, 1+β = 1200 ⇒ 2T 1 + β = 1200/900 = 4/3 ⇒ β = 1/3 1 2T (b) Since 1/2T = 900, the pulse rate 1/T is 1800 pulses/sec. (c) The largest interference is caused by the sequence : {1, −1, s, 1, −1, 1} or its opposite in sign. This interference is constructive or destructive depending on the sign of the information symbol s. The peak distortion is 3 =−2,k=0 fk = 1.6 k 5 (d) The probability of the worst-case interference given above is 1 = 1/32, and the same is 2 the probability of the sequence that causes the opposite-sign interference. 245 Problem 10.23 : (a) F (z ) = 0.8 − 0.6z −1 ⇒ X (z ) ≡ F (z )F (z ) = (0.8 − 0.6z −1 ) (0.8 − 0.6z ) = 1 − 0.48z −1 − 0.48z ∗ −1 Thus, x0 = 1, x−1 = x1 = −0.48. (b) 1 T ∞ n=−∞ H ω+ 2πn T 2 = X ejωT = 1 − 0.48e−jωT − 0.48ejωT = 1 − 0.96 cos ωT (c) For the linear equalizer base on the mean-square-error criterion we have : Jmin = T 2π π /T N0 −π/T 1+N0 −0.96 cos ωT dω = 1 2π π N0 −π 1+N0 −0.96 cos θ dθ = 1 2π But : 1 2π Therefore : Jmin = π −π π 1 −π 1−a cos θ dθ, N0 1+N0 a= 0.96 1+N0 1 1 dθ = √ , a2 < 1 2 1 − a cos θ 1−a 1 N0 1 + N0 1− 2 0.96 1+N0 N0 = (1 + N0 )2 − (0.96)2 (d) For the decision-feedback equalizer : Jmin = 2N0 1 + N0 + (1 + N0 )2 − (0.96)2 which follows from the result in example 10.3.1. Note that for N0 << 1, Jmin ≈ 2N0 1+ 1 − (0.96)2 ≈ 1.56N0 In contrast, for the linear equalizer we have : Jmin ≈ N0 1 − (0.96)2 246 ≈ 3.57N0 Problem 10.24 : (a) Part of the tree structure is shown in the following figure : ✧ I3 = 3 ✧ ✧ ✧ I3 = 1 ✧ ✥ ✧ ✥✥✥ ✧ ✥✥✥ ✧❜❜ I2 = 3 ✧ ❜ ✧ ❜ I3 = −1 ✧ I2 = 1 ❜ ✧ ✥ ❜ ✧ ✥✥✥ ✧ I3 = − 3 ❜ ✥✥✥ ❜ ✱ ❜ ✱ ❜ ❜ I2 = −1 ✱ ❜ ✱ ❜ ✱ I2 = − 3 ❜ ✱ ✱ ✱ ✧ ✱ I2 = 3 ✧ ✱ ✧ ✧ I2 = 1 I1 = 3 ✱✱ ✧ ✥ ✧✥✥✥✥ ✧ ✥✥ ✱ . ✘ ✘✘❜ ✱ ❜ I1 = 1 ✘✘✘✘ ✱ ❜ ✘✘ ❜ I2 = −1 ✱ ✘✘✘ ❜ ✱ ❜ ✘✘✘ ✱✘✘✘ I2 = − 3 ❜ ✘ ✱✘ ❝ ✧ ❝ I2 = 3 ✧ I1 = −1 ❝ ✧ ✧ I2 = 1 ❝ ✧ ✥✥ ❝ ✧ ✥✥✥✥✥ ❝ ✧ ❜ ❝ ❜ ❝ ❜ ❝ ❜ I2 = −1 ❜ I1 = −3❝ ❜ ❝ I2 = − 3 ❜ ❝ ❝ ❝ ✧ ❝ I2 = 3 ✧ ❝ ✧ ❝ ✧ I2 = 1 ✧ ✥ ❝ ✧✥✥✥✥ ❝ ✥ ❝✥ ✧ ❜ ❜ ❜ ❜ I2 = −1 ❜ ❜ æ I2 = − 3 ❜ (b) There are four states in the trellis (corresponding to the four possible values of the symbol Ik−1 ), and for each one there are four paths starting from it (corresponding to the four possible values of the symbol Ik ). Hence, 16 probabilities must be computed at each stage of the Viterbi algorithm. (c) Since, there are four states, the number of surviving sequences is also four. 247 (d) The metrics are (y1 − 0.8I1 )2 , i = 1 and (yi − 0.8Ii + 0.6Ii−1 )2 , i ≥ 2 i µ1 (I1 µ1 (I1 µ1 (I1 µ1 (I1 = 3) = [0.5 − 3 ∗ 0.8]2 = 3.61 = 1) = [0.5 − 1 ∗ 0.8]2 = 0.09 = −1) = [0.5 + 1 ∗ 0.8]2 = 1.69 = −3) = [0.5 + 3 ∗ 0.8]2 = 8.41 µ2 (I2 = 3, I1 = 3) = µ1 (3) + [2 − 2.4 + 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 5.57 µ2 (3, 1) = µ1 (1) + [2 − 2.4 + 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 0.13 µ2 (3, −1) = µ1 (−1) + [2 − 2.4 − 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 6.53 µ2 (3, −3) = µ1 (−3) + [2 − 2.4 − 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 13.25 µ2 (1, 3) = µ1 (3) + [2 − 0.8 + 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 12.61 µ2 (1, 1) = µ1 (1) + [2 − 0.8 + 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 3.33 µ2 (1, −1) = µ1 (−1) + [2 − 0.8 − 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 2.05 µ2 (1, −3) = µ1 (−3) + [2 − 0.8 − 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 8.77 µ2 (−1, 3) = µ1 (3) + [2 + 0.8 + 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 24.77 µ2 (−1, 1) = µ1 (1) + [2 + 0.8 + 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 11.65 µ2 (−1, −1) = µ1 (−1) + [2 + 0.8 − 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 6.53 µ2 (−1, −3) = µ1 (−3) + [2 + 0.8 − 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 9.41 µ2 (−3, 3) = µ1 (3) + [2 + 2.4 + 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 42.05 µ2 (−3, 1) = µ1 (1) + [2 + 2.4 + 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 25.09 µ2 (−3, −1) = µ1 (−1) + [2 + 2.4 − 1 ∗ 0.6]2 = 16.13 µ2 (−3, −3) = µ1 (−3) + [2 + 2.4 − 3 ∗ 0.6]2 = 15.17 The four surviving paths at this stage are minI1 [µ2 (x, I1 )] , x = 3, 1, −1, −3 or : I2 I2 I2 I2 = 3, I1 = 1 with metric µ2 (3, 1) = 0.13 = 1, I1 = −1 with metric µ2 (1, −1) = 2.05 = −1, I1 = −1 with metric µ2 (−1, −1) = 6.53 = −3, I1 = −3 with metric µ2 (−3, −3) = 15.17 Now we compute the metrics for the next stage : µ3 (I3 = 3, I2 = 3, I1 = 1) = µ2 (3, 1) + [−1 − 2.4 + 1.8]2 = 2.69 µ3 (3, 1, −1) = µ2 (1, −1) + [−1 − 2.4 + 0.6]2 = 9.89 µ3 (3, −1, −1) = µ2 (−1, −1) + [−1 − 2.4 − 0.6]2 = 22.53 µ3 (3, −3, −3) = µ2 (−3, −3) + [−1 − 2.4 − 1.8]2 = 42.21 248 µ3 (1, 3, 1) = µ2 (3, 1) + [−1 − 0.8 + 1.8]2 = 0.13 µ3 (1, 1, −1) = µ2 (1, −1) + [−1 − 0.8 + 0.6]2 = 7.81 µ3 (1, −1, −1) = µ2 (−1, −1) + [−1 − 0.8 − 0.6]2 = 12.29 µ3 (1, −3, −3) = µ2 (−3, −3) + [−1 − 0.8 − 1.8]2 = 28.13 µ3 (−1, 3, 1) = µ2 (3, 1) + [−1 + 0.8 + 1.8]2 = 2.69 µ3 (−1, 1, −1) = µ2 (1, −1) + [−1 + 0.8 + 0.6]2 = 2.69 µ3 (−1, −1, −1) = µ2 (−1, −1) + [−1 + 0.8 − 0.6]2 = 7.17 µ3 (−1, −3, −3) = µ2 (−3, −3) + [−1 + 0.8 − 1.8]2 = 19.17 µ3 (−3, 3, 1) = µ2 (3, 1) + [−1 + 2.4 + 1.8]2 = 10.37 µ3 (−3, 1, −1) = µ2 (1, −1) + [−1 + 2.4 + 0.6]2 = 2.69 µ3 (−3, −1, −1) = µ2 (−1, −1) + [−1 + 2.4 − 0.6]2 = 7.17 µ3 (−3, −3, −3) = µ2 (−3, −3) + [−1 + 2.4 − 1.8]2 = 15.33 The four surviving sequences at this stage are minI2 ,I1 [µ3 (x, I2 , I1 )] , x = 3, 1, −1, −3 or : I3 I3 I3 I3 = 3, I2 = 3, I1 = 1 with metric µ3 (3, 3, 1) = 2.69 = 1, I2 = 3, I1 = 1 with metric µ3 (1, 3, 1) = 0.13 = −1, I2 = 3, I1 = 1 with metric µ3 (−1, 3, 1) = 2.69 = −3, I2 = 1, I1 = −1 with metric µ3 (−3, 1, −1) = 2.69 2 (e) For the channel, δmin = 1 and hence : 6 P4 = 8Q γav 15 Problem 10.25 : (a) bk = K −1 n=0 = 1 K K −1 n=0 = But 1 K 1 K K −1 l=0 cl K −1 En ej 2πnk/K K −1 −j 2πnl/K j 2πnk/K e l=0 cl e K −1 j 2πn(k −l)/K n=0 e ej 2πn(k−l)/K = n=0 Hence, bk = ck . 249 0, k = l K, k = l (b) K −1 −k k =0 ck z E (z ) = K −1 k =0 = K −1 j 2πnk/K n=0 En e 1 K K −1 k =0 = 1 K K −1 n=0 En = 1 K 1−z −K K k 1−z −K K −1 n=0 En 1−exp(j 2πn/K )z −1 = z −k ej 2πn/K z −1 K −1 En n=0 1−exp(j 2πn/K )z −1 (c) The block diagram is as shown in the following figure : Parallel Bank of Single − Pole Filters y0 (n) ✏ ✲X +✏ ✲+ ✒✑ ✻ Comb. Filter x(n) ✏ +✏ ✲X ✲+ ✒✑ ✒✑ ✻ ✻ ✲ z −K ❄ z −1 ❄ ej 2π/K +✏ ✲+ ✒✑ ✻ E0 ❈ ❈ ❈ y1 (n) ✏ ❈ ❈ ✲X ❏❈ ✒✑ +✏ ✲+ ✒✑ ✻ 1/K ❈ ✒✑ ✻ ❈ . . . . z −1 ✻ E1 yK −1 (n✏ ✂ ) ✂ ✲X ❄ −1 ej 2π(K −1)/K z ❏❈ ❏❈ ❏❈ ❏ ❈ ✏n) y( +✲ ✒✑ ✍ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✒✑ ✻ EK −1 æ (d) The adjustable parameters in this structure are {E0 , E1 , ..., EK −1 } , i.e. the DFT coefficients of the equalizer taps. For more details on this equalizer structure, see the paper by Proakis (IEEE Trans. on Audio and Electroacc., pp 195-200, June 1970). 250 CHAPTER 11 Problem 11.1 : (a) 4 3 −1 12 z + z −1 + z ⇒ X (z ) = F (z )F ∗ (z − 1 ) = 1 + 55 25 F (z ) = Hence : Γ= 1 12 25 0 and : Copt 12 25 0 12 25 1 3/5 ξ = 4/5 0 12 25 1 c− 1 1 − a2 −a a2 3/5 1 = c0 = Γ−1 ξ = −a 1 −a 4/5 β 2 2 0 c1 −a 1 − a a where a = 0.48 and β = 1 − 2a2 = 0.539. Hence : Copt 0.145 = 0.95 −0.456 (b) The eigenvalues of the matrix Γ are given by : 1 − λ 0.48 0 0.48 1 − λ 0.48 = 0 ⇒ λ = 1, 0.3232, 1.6768 | Γ − λI | = 0 ⇒ 0 0.48 1 − λ The step size ∆ should range between : 0 ≤ ∆ ≤ 2/λmax = 1.19 (c) Following equations (10-3-3)-(10-3-4) we have : ψ= 1 0.48 0.48 0.64 c− 1 c0 , ψ = c− 1 c0 0 1.25 and the feedback tap is : c1 = −c0 f1 = −0.75 251 = 0.6 0.8 ⇒ Problem 11.2 : (a) ∆max = 2 λmax = 2 1+ 1 √ 2 + N0 = 2 1.707 + N0 (b) From (11-1-31) : J∆ = ∆2 Jmin Since J∆ Jmin 3 3 1 λ2 k ≈ ∆Jmin λk 2 2 k =1 1 − (1 − ∆λk ) k =1 = 0.01 : ∆≈ 0.07 ≈ 0.06 1 + N0 (c) Let C = Vt C, ξ = Vtξ, where V is the matrix whose columns form the eigenvectors of the covariance matrix Γ (note that Vt = V−1). Then : C(n+1) = (I − ∆Γ) C(n) + ∆ξ ⇒ C(n+1) = I − ∆VΛV−1 C(n) + ∆ξ ⇒ V−1 C(n+1) = V−1 I − ∆VΛV−1 C(n) + ∆V−1 ξ ⇒ C(n+1) = (I − ∆Λ) C(n) + ∆ξ which is a set of three de-coupled difference equations (de-coupled because Λ is a diagonal matrix). Hence, we can write : ck,(n+1) = (1 − ∆λk ) ck,(n) + ∆ξk , k = −1, 0, 1 The steady-state solution is obtained when ck,(n+1) = ck , which gives : ck = ξk , λk k = −1, 0, 1 or going back to matrix form : C = Λ−1 ξ ⇒ C = VC = VΛ−1 V−1ξ ⇒ C = VΛV−1 which agrees with the result in Probl. 10.18(a). 252 −1 ξ = Γ−1 ξ Problem 11.3 : Suppose that we have a discrete-time system with frequency response H (ω ); this may be equalized by use of the DFT as shown below : an A(ω ) ✲ yn System H(ω ) (channel) N −1 A(ω ) = n=0 ✲ Y(ω ) an e−jωn N −1 n=0 E (ω ) = output ✲ æ Y (ω ) = Let : Equalizer E(ω ) cn e−jωn = A(ω )H (ω ) A(ω )Y ∗ (ω ) |Y (ω )|2 Then by direct substitution of Y (ω ) we obtain : E (ω ) = A(ω )A∗ (ω )H ∗(ω ) 1 2 2= H (ω ) |A(ω )| |H (ω )| If the sequence {an } is sufficiently padded with zeros, the N-point DFT simply represents the values of E (gw ) and H (ω ) at ω = 2π k = ωk , for k = 0, 1, ...N − 1 without frequency aliasing. N 1 Therefore the use of the DFT as specified in this problem yields E (ωk ) = H (ω) , independent of the properties of the sequence {an } . Since H(ω ) is the spectrum of the discrete-time system, we know that this is equivalent to the folded spectrum of the continuous-time system (i.e the system which was sampled). For further details for the use of a pseudo-random periodic sequence to perform equalization we refer to the paper by Qureshi (1985). Problem 11.4 : The MSE performance index at the time instant k is J (c k ) = E 2 N n=−N ck,n vk−n − Ik If we define the gradient vector Gk as Gk = ϑJ (ck ) 2ϑck 253 then its l − th element is Gk,l ∗ = E − k vk−l = −E Thus, the vector Gk is ϑJ (ck ) 1 N ∗ = = ck,n vk−n − Ik vk−l E2 2ϑck,l 2 n=−N ∗ k vk −l ∗ −E [ k vk+N ] . = −E [ k V∗ ] . Gk = . k ∗ −E [ k vk−N ] ∗ ˆ where Vk is the vector Vk = [vk+N · · · vk−N ]T . Since Gk = − k Vk , its expected value is ∗ ∗ ˆ E [Gk ] = E [− k Vk ] = −E [ k Vk ] = Gk Problem 11.5 : The tap-leakage LMS algorithm is : C(n + 1) = w C(n) + ∆ (n)V∗ (n) = w C(n) + ∆ (ΓC(n) − ξ ) = (w I − ∆Γ) C(n) − ∆ξ Following the same diagonalization procedure as in Problem 11.2 or Section (11-1-3) of the book, we obtain : C (n + 1) = (w I − ∆Λ) C (n) − ∆ξ where Λ is the diagonal matrix containing the eigenvalues of the correlation matrix Γ. The algorithm converges if the roots of the homogeneous equation lie inside the unit circle : |w − ∆λk | < 1, k = −N, ..., −1, 0, 1, ..., N and since ∆ > 0, the convergence criterion is : ∆< 1+w λmax Problem 11.6 : The estimate of g can be written as : g = h0 x0 + ... + hM −1 xM −1 = xT h, where x, h are column ˆ vectors containing the respective coefficients. Then using the orthogonality principle we obtain the optimum linear estimator h : E [x ] = 0 ⇒ E x g − xT h 254 = 0 ⇒ E [xg ] = E xxT h or : hopt = R−1c xx where the M × M correlation matrix Rxx has elements : 2 2 R(m, n) = E [x(m)x(n)] = E g 2 u(m)u(n) + σw δnm = Gu(m)u(n) + σw δnm where we have used the fact that g and w are independent, and that E [g ] = 0. Also, the column vector c =E [xg ] has elements : c(n) = E [x(n)g ] = Gu(n) Problem 11.7 : (a) The time-update equation for the parameters {Hk } is : (n+1) Hk (n) = Hk + ∆ (n) (n) yk (n) where n is the time-index, k is the filter index, and yk is the output of the k-th filter with transfer function : 1 − z −M / 1 − ej 2πk/M z −1 as shown in the figure below : Parallel Bank of Single − Pole Filters y0 (n) ✏ ✲X +✏ ✲+ ✒✑ ✻ Comb. Filter x(n) ✏ +✏ ✲X ✲+ ✒✑ ✒✑ ✻ ✻ ✲ z −M ❄ z −1 ❄ ej 2π/M +✏ ✲+ ✒✑ ✻ H0 ❈ ❈ ❈ y1 (n) ✏ ❈ ✲X ❏❈ ✒✑ +✏ ✲+ ✒✑ ✻ 1/M ❈ ✒✑ ✻ ❈ . . . . z −1 H1 yM −1 (n✏ ✂ ) ✂ ✲X ❄ −1 ej 2π(M −1)/M z 255 ✻ ❏❈ ❏❈ ❏❈ ❏ ❈ ✏n) y( +✲ ✒✑ ✍ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✂ ✒✑ ✻ H M −1 æ The error (n) is calculated as : (n) = In − y (n), and then it is fed back in the adaptive part (n) of the equalizer, together with the quantities yk , to update the equalizer parameters Hk . (b) It is straightforward to prove that the transfer function of the k-th filter in the parallel bank k has a resonant frequency at fk = 2π M , and is zero at the resonant frequencies of the other filters m fm = 2π M , m = k. Hence, if we choose as a test signal sinusoids whose frequencies coincide with the resonant frequencies of the tuned circuits, this allows the coefficient Hk for each filter to be adjusted independently without any interaction from the other filters. Problem 11.8 : (a) The gradient of the performance index J with respect to h is : time update equation becomes : dJ dh = 2h + 40. Hence, the 1 hn+1 = hn − ∆(2hn + 40) = hn (1 − ∆) − 20∆ 2 This system will converge if the homogeneous part will vanish away as n → ∞, or equivalently if : |1 − ∆| < 1 ⇐⇒ 0 < ∆ < 2. (b) We note that J has a minimum at h = −20, with corresponding value : Jmin = −372. To illustrate the convergence of the algorithm let’s choose : ∆ = 1/2. Then : hn+1 = hn /2 − 10, and, using induction, we can prove that : hn+1 = 1 2 n h0 − 10 n−1 1 2 k =0 k where h0 is the initial value for h. Then, as n → ∞, the dependence on the initial condition h0 vanishes and hn → −10 1−1 /2 = −20, which is the desired value. The following plot shows the 1 expression for J as a function of n, for ∆ = 1/2 and for various initial values h0 . 50 h0=−25 0 h0=−30 h0=0 −50 −100 J(n) −150 −200 −250 −300 −350 −400 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Iteration n 256 14 16 18 20 Problem 11.9 : The linear estimator for x can be written as : x(n) = a1 x(n−1)+a2 x(n−1) = [x(n − 1) x(n − 2)] ˆ Using the orthogonality principle we obtain : E x(n − 1) x(n − 2) or : =0⇒E γxx (−1) γxx (−2) a1 a2 x(n − 1) x(n − 2) γxx (0) γxx (1) γxx (−1) γxx (0) = = x(n) − [x(n − 1) x(n − 2)] 1b b1 −1 b b2 = a1 a2 a1 a2 =0 ⇒ b 0 This is a well-known fact from Statistical Signal Processing theory : a first-order AR process (which has autocorrelation function γ (m) = a|m| ) has a first-order optimum (MSE) linear estimator : xn = axn−1 . ˆ Problem 11.10 : In Probl. 11.9 we found that the optimum (MSE) linear predictor for x(n), is x(n) = bx(n − 1). ˆ Since it is a first order predictor, the corresponding lattice implementation will comprise of one stage, too, with reflection coefficient a11 . This coefficient can be found using (11-4-28) : a11 = γxx (1) =b γxx (0) Then, we verify that the residue f1 (n) is indeed the first-order prediction error : f1 (n) = x(n) − bx(n − 1) = x(n) − x(n) = e(n) ˆ Problem 11.11 : The system C (z ) = 1−0.1 z −1 has an impulse response : c(n) = (0.9)n , n ≥ 0. Then, we write the 9 input y (n) to the adaptive FIR filter : ∞ y (n) = c(k )x(n − k ) + w (n) k =0 Since the sequence {x(n)} corresponds to the information sequence that is transmitted through a channel, we will assume that is uncorrelated with zero mean and unit variance. Then the optib mum (according to the MSE criterion) estimator of x(n) will be : x(n) = [y (n) y (n − 1)] 0 . ˆ b1 257 a1 a2 . Using the orthogonality criterion we obtain the optimum coefficients {bi }: y (n) y (n − 1) E ⇒ b0 b1 y (n) y (n − 1) =0⇒E =E x(n) − [y (n) y (n − 1)] −1 y (n)y (n) y (n)y (n − 1) y (n − 1)y (n) y (n − 1)y (n − 1) E b0 b1 =0 y (n)x(n) y (n − 1)x(n) The various correlations are as follows : ∞ c(k )x(n − k )x(n) + w (n)x(n) = c(0) = 1 E [y (n)x(n)] = E k =0 where we have used the fact that : E [x(n − k )x(n)] = δk , and that {w (n)} {x(n)} are independent. Similarly : ∞ E [y (n − 1)x(n)] = E c(k )x(n − k − 1)x(n) + w (n)x(n) = 0 k =0 E [y (n)y (n)] = E ∞ ∞ k =0 j =0 2 c(k )c(j )x(n − k )x(n − j ) + σw ∞ = c (j )c (j ) + j =0 2 σw ∞ = 2 (0.9)2j + σw = j =0 1 1 2 2 + σw = + σw = 1 − 0.81 0.19 and : E [y (n)y (n − 1)] = E ∞ ∞ c(k )c(j )x(n − k )x(n − 1 − j ) k =0 j =0 ∞ = ∞ c(j )c(j + 1) = j =0 = 0.9 Hence : b0 b1 = 1 0.19 + 0.1 0.9 0.1 19 (0.9)2j +1 j =0 1 1 = 0.9 1 − 0.81 0.19 0.9 0.1 19 1 + 0.1 0.19 −1 1 0 = 0.85 −0.75 2 It is interesting to note that in the absence of noise (i.e when the term σw = 0.1 is missing from the diagonal of the correlation matrix), the optimum coefficients are : B (z ) = b0 + b1 z −1 = 1 − 0.9z −1 , i.e. the equalizer function is the inverse of the channel function (in this case the MSE criterion coincides with the zero-forcing criterion). However, we see that, in the presence 258 of noise, the MSE criterion gives a slightly different result from the inverse channel function, in order to prevent excessive noise enhancement. Problem 11.12 : (a) If we denote by V the matrix whose columns are the eigenvectors {vi } : V = [v1 |v2 |...|vN ] then its conjugate transpose matrix is : V∗t = and Γ can be written as : Γ= N i=1 ∗ v1t ∗ v2t ... ∗ vNt ∗ λi vi vi t = VΛV∗t where Λ is a diagonal matrix containing the eigenvalues of Γ. Then, if we name X = VΛ1/2 V∗t , we see that : XX = VΛ1/2 V∗t VΛ1/2 V∗t = VΛ1/2 Λ1/2 V∗t = VΛV∗t = Γ where we have used the fact that the matrix V is unitary : VV∗t = I. Hence, since XX = Γ, 1/2 ∗ this shows that the matrix X = VΛ1/2 V∗t = N λi vi vi t is indeed the square root of Γ. i=1 (b) To compute Γ1/2 , we first determine V, Λ (i.e the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the correlation matrix). Then : Γ1/2 = N i=1 1/2 ∗ λi vi vi t = VΛ1/2 V∗t 259 CHAPTER 12 Problem 12.1 : (a) N U= n=1 N E [U ] = n=1 Xn E [Xn ] = Nm 2 σu = E U 2 − E 2 [U ] = E 2 2 n m + N (N − 1)σ 2 − N 2 m2 = Nσ 2 = N σ +m Hence : Xn Xm − N 2 m2 N 2 m2 N m2 (SNR)u = = 2Nσ 2 2 σ2 (b) N V = n=1 N E [V ] = n=1 2 Xn 2 E Xn = N σ 2 + m2 For the variance of V we have : 2 σV = E V 2 − E 2 [V ] = E V 2 − N 2 σ 2 + m2 But : E V2 = n m 22 E Xn X m = N n=1 4 Xn + n m,n=m 2 2 E Xn E Xm = NE X 4 +N (N −1)E 2 X 2 To compute E (X 4 ) we can use the fact that a zero-mean Gaussian RV Y has moments : E Yk = Hence : 0, k : odd 1 · 3 · ...(k − 1)σ k k : even E (X − m)3 = 0 ⇒ E X 4 = m4 + 6σ 2 m2 + 3σ 4 E (X − m)4 = 3σ 4 260 Then : E [V 2 ] = N (m4 + 6σ 2 m2 + 3σ 4 ) + N (N − 1) (σ 2 + m2 ) ⇒ 2 σV = E [V 2 ] − N 2 (σ 2 + m2 ) = 2Nσ 2 (σ 2 + 2m2 ) Note : the above result could be obtained by noting that V is a non-central chi-square RV, with N degrees of freedom and non-centrality parameter equal to Nm2 ; then we could apply directly 2 expression (2-1-125). Having obtained σV , we have : 2 2 N ((m2 /σ 2 ) + 1) N 2 (m2 + σ 2 ) = (SNR)V = 2Nσ 2 (σ 2 + 2m2 ) 4 (2 (m2 /σ 2 ) + 1) (c) The plot is given in the following figure for N=5 : 18 16 SNR(U) 14 SNR(db) 12 SNR(V) 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 5 10 15 m^2 / sigma^2 20 25 (d) In multichannel operation with coherent detection the decision variable is U as given in (a). With square-law detection, the decision variable is of the form N=1 |Xn + jYn |2 where Xn n and Yn are Gaussian. We note that V is not the exact model for square-law detection, but, nevertheless, the effect of the non coherent combining loss is evident in the (SNR)V . Problem 12.2 : (a) r is a Gaussian random variable. If √ Eb is the transmitted signal point, then : E (r ) = E (r1 ) + E (r2 ) = (1 + k ) Eb ≡ mr and the variance is : 2 2 2 σr = σ1 + k 2 σ2 The probability density function of r is p (r ) = √ (r −mr ) 1 − 2 e 2σr 2πσr 261 2 and the probability of error is : 0 P2 = −∞ p(r ) dr m2 r = Q 2 σr where (1 + k )2 Eb m2 r =2 2 2 σr σ1 + k 2 σ2 The value of k that maximizes this ratio is obtained by differentiating this expression and solving for the value of k that forces the derivative to zero. Thus, we obtain k= 2 σ1 2 σ2 Note that if σ1 > σ2 , then k > 1 and r2 is given greater weight than r1 . On the other hand, if σ2 > σ1 , then k < 1 and r1 is given greater weight than r2 . When σ1 = σ2 , k = 1 (equal weight). 2 2 (b) When σ2 = 3σ1 , k = 1 , and 3 (1 + 1 )2 Eb m2 4 r = 2 13 2 = 2 σr 3 σ1 + 9 (3σ1 ) Eb 2 σ1 On the other hand, if k is set to unity we have 4E b Eb m2 r =2 =2 2 2 σr σ1 + 3σ1 σ1 Therefore, the optimum weighting provides a gain of : 4 10 log = 1.25 dB 3 E This is illustrated in the following figure, where γ = σb . 2 1 0 10 −1 10 −2 P(e) 10 K=1 K=1/3 −3 10 −4 10 −5 10 0 2 4 6 gamma(db) 262 8 10 12 Problem 12.3 : 1 ˜ (a) If the sample rate Ts = N · ∆f = W, does not alter with the insertion of the cyclic prefix (which indeed is the case in most multicarrier systems), then the bandwidth requirements for the system remain the same. However, keeping the same sample rate means that the block v 1 length is increased by a factor of N , and the effective throughput is reduced to 1+ v = NN v of + N the previous one. This is usually compensated by the elimination of ISI, which allows the use of higher order alphabets in each one of the subcarriers. −1 , so that the block length after the insertion If the sample rate is increased by a factor of NN v + of the cyclic prefix will be the same as before, then the bandwidth requirements for the system + are increased by the same factor : W = W NN v . However, this second case is rarely used in practice. (b) If the real and imaginary parts of the information sequence {Xk } have the same average energy : E [Re(Xk )]2 = E [Im(Xk )]2 , then it is straightforward to prove that the time-domain samples {xn }, that are the output of the IDFT, have the same average energy: 1 xn = √ N N −1 k =0 (Re(Xk ) + j · Im(Xk )) exp(j 2πnk/N ), and : n = 0, 1, ..., N − 1 E x2 = n for all n = 0, 1, ...N − 1. Hence, the energy of the cyclic-prefixed block, will be increased from N to (N + v ) . However, the power requirements will remain the same, since the duration of the prefixed block is also increased from NTs to (N + v ) Ts . For an analysis of the case where the real and imaginary parts of the information sequence do not have the same average energy, we refer the interested reader to the paper by Chow et al. (1991). Problem 12.4 : N −1 X (k ) = x(n)e−j 2πnk/N , k = 0, ..., N − 1 n=0 and for the padded sequence : N +L−1 X (k ) = n=0 x (n)e−j 2πnk/(N +L) = N −1 x(n)e−j 2πnk/(N +L) , n=0 263 k = 0, ..., N + L − 1 where we have used the fact that : x (n) = 0, n = N, N + 1, ..., N + L − 1. We have also chosen to use the traditional definition of the DFT (without a scaling factor in front of the sum). Then: N −1 X (0) = x(n) = X (0) n=0 If we plot |X (k )| and |X (k )| in the same graph, with the x-axis being the normalized frequency k k f = N or f = N +L , respectively, then we notice that the second graph is just an interpolated version of the first. This can be seen if N + L is an integer multiple of N : N + L = mN. Then : N −1 X (mk ) = x(n)e−j 2πnmk/mN = n=0 N −1 x(n)e−j 2πnk/N = X (k ), k = 0, 1, ...N − 1 n=0 This is illustrated in the following plot, for a random sequence x(n), of length N = 8, which is padded with L = 24 zeros. 15 |X(k)| 10 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 k 5 6 7 8 15 |X"(k)| 10 5 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 k Problem 12.5 : The analog signal is : 1 x(t) = √ N N −1 k =0 Xk ej 2πkt/T , 0≤t<T ˜ The subcarrier frequencies are : Fk = k/T, k = 0, 1, ...N, and, hence, the maximum frequency ˜ ˜ in the analog signal is : N/T. If we sample at the Nyquist rate : 2N/T = N/T, we obtain the discrete-time sequence : 1 x(n) = x(t = nT /N ) = √ N N −1 1 Xk ej 2πk(nT /N )/T = √ N k =0 N −1 k =0 which is simply the IDFT of the information sequence {Xk } . 264 Xk ej 2πkn/N , n = 0, 1, ..., N − 1 Problem 12.6 : The reseting of the filter state every N samples, is equivalent to a filter with system function : H n (z ) = 1 − z −N 1 − exp(j 2πn/N )z −1 We will make use of the relationship that gives the sum of finite geometric series : 1−aN . Using this we can re-write each system function Hn (z ) as : 1−a N −1 1 − z −N 1 − [exp(j 2πn/N )z −1 ] = H n (z ) = 1 − exp(j 2πn/N )z −1 1 − exp(j 2πn/N )z −1 N or : N −1 H n (z ) = exp(j 2πnk/N )z −k , N −1 k =0 exp(j 2πn/N )z −1 = ak = k k =0 n = 0, 1, ...N − 1 k =0 which is exactly the transfer function of the transversal filter which calculates the n-th IDFT point of a sequence. Problem 12.7 : We assume binary (M = 2) orthogonal signalling with square-law detection (DPSK signals wil have the same combining loss). Using (12-1-24) and (12-1-14) we obtain the following graph for P2 (L), where SNR/bit =10log10 γb : 0 10 −1 10 L=2 P2(L) L=1 −2 10 −3 10 −4 10 0 2 4 6 SNR/bit (dB) 8 10 12 From this graph we note that the combining loss for γb = 10 is approximately 0.8 dB. 265 CHAPTER 13 Problem 13.1 : Tc 1 6E c π cos 2 t− , 3Tc Tc 2 g (t) = G (f ) = = π But cos 2 Tc t − Tc 2 = 1 2 ∞ −∞ G(0) = 1 2 g (t)e−j 2πf t dt 16Ec 3Tc 1 + cos 2π t − Tc 0 ≤ t ≤ Tc Tc 0 Tc 2 π cos 2 Tc t − Tc 2 e−j 2πf t dt . Then 1 6E c Tc = 3Tc 4Ec Tc 4Ec Tc ⇒ |G(0)|2 = 3 3 and 16 Ec Tc wm Jav , 3 2 σm = 4wm Jav |G(0)|2 = Ec = Rc Eb Hence, PM ≤ M Q m=2 3 Rc Eb wm Jav Tc This is an improvement of 1.76 dB over the rectangular pulse. Problem 13.2 : The PN spread spectrum signal has a bandwidth W and the interference has a bandwidth W1 , where W >> W1 . Upon multiplication of the received signal r (t) with the PN reference at the receiver, we have the following (approximate) spectral characteristics 266 ✻ W S0 1/Tb = W S0 Tb Spectrum of Interference J0 W1 /W 0 ✛ ✲ W ✛ ✲ 1/Tb æ After multiplication with the PN reference, the interference power in the bandwidth 1/Tb occupied by the signal is J0 W1 1 J0 W1 = W Tb W Tb Prior to multiplication, the noise power is J0 W. Therefore, in the bandwidth of the informationTb bearing signal, there is a reduction in the interference power by a factor W Tb = Tc = Lc , which is just the processing gain of the PN spread spectrum signal. Problem 13.3 : The concatenation of a Reed-Solomon (31,3) code with the Hadamard (16,5) code results in an equivalent binary code of black length n = n1 n2 = 31 × 16 = 496 bits. There are 15 information bits conveyed by each code word, i.e. k = k1 k2 = 15. Hence, the overall code rate is Rc = 15/496, which is the product of the two code rates. The minimum distances are Reed − Solomon code : Dmin = 31 − 3 + 1 = 29 Hadamard code : dmin = n2 = 8 2 Hence, the minimum distance of the overall code is dmin = 28 × 8 = 232. A union bound on the probability of error based on the minimum distance of the code is PM ≤ (M − 1) Q where M = 215 = 32768. Also, Eb = Sav Tb . Thus, PM 2 Eb Rc dmin Jav Tc Sav Tb k dmin ≤ 215 Q 2 Jav Tc n 267 But kTb = nTc and dmn = 232. Hence, PM ≤ 215 Q 464 Jav /Sav Due to the large number of codewords, this union bound is very loose. A much tighter bound is PM ≤ M Q m=2 2w m Jav /Sav but the evaluation of the bound requires the use of the weight distribution of the concatenated code. Problem 13.4 : For hard-decision decoding we have m−2 PM ≤ (M − 1) [4p(1 − p)]dmin /2 = 2m+1 [4p(1 − p)]2 2W/R R Jav /Sav c where p = Q av 2 Sav . Note that in the presence of a strong jammer, the J =Q probability p is large, i.e close to 1/2. For soft-decision decoding, the error probability bound is PM We select W R = n k = 1 Rc 2W/R ≤ (M − 1)Q Rc dmin Jav /Sav and hence: PM ≤ 2m+1 Q 2m Jav /Sav m−1 2 < 2m exp Jav /Sav av < exp − Sav 2m−1 − J Jav m ln 2 Sav For a give jamming margin, we can find an m which is sufficiently large to achieve the desired level of performance. Problem 13.5 : (a) The coding gain is Rc dmin = 1 × 10 = 5 (7dB ) 2 268 (b) The processing gain is W/R, where W = 107 Hz and R = 2000bps. Hence, 107 W = = 5 × 103 (37dB ) R 2 × 103 (c) The jamming margin is ( W )·(Rc dm in) R ⇒ Jav Pav = Jav Pav dB =W + (CG)dB − R dB = 37 + 7 − 10 = 34dB Eb J0 Eb J0 dB Problem 13.6 : We assume that the interference is characterized as a zero-mean AWGN process with power spectral density J0 . To achieve an error probability of 10−5 , the required Eb /J0 = 10 . Then, by using the relation in (13-2-58) and (13-2-38), we have W/R Jav /Pav = W/R Nu − 1 W/R = Eb J0 W =R = Eb J0 (Nu − 1) Eb J0 (Nu − 1) where R = 104 bps, Nu = 30 and Eb /J0 = 10. Therefore, W = 2.9 × 106 Hz The minimum chip rate is 1/Tc = W = 2.9 × 106 chips/sec. Problem 13.7 : To achieve an error probability of 10−6 , we require Eb = 10.5dB J0 dB Then, the number of users of the CDMA system is Nu = = W/R Eb /J0 1000 11.3 +1 + 1 = 89 users 269 If the processing gain is reduced to W/R = 500, then Nu = 500 + 1 = 45users 11.3 Problem 13.8 : (a) We are given a system where (Jav /Pav )dB = 20 dB, R = 1000 bps and (Eb /J0 )dB = 10 dB. Hence, using the relation in (13-2-38) we obtain W R = dB Jav Pav dB + Eb J0 dB W R = 1000 W = 30 dB = 1000R = 106 Hz (b) The duty cycle of a pulse jammer for worst-case jamming is α∗ = 0.71 0.7 = 0.07 = Eb /J0 10 The corresponding probability of error for this worst-case jamming is P2 = 0.083 0.083 = 8.3 × 10−3 = Eb /J0 10 Problem 13.9 : (a) We have Nu = 15 users transmitting at a rate of 10, 000 bps each, in a bandwidth of W = 1 MHz. The Eb/J0 is Eb J0 = W/R Nu − 1 = 106 /104 14 = 100 14 = 7.14 (8.54 dB ) (b) The processing gain is 100. (c) With Nu = 30 and Eb/J0 = 7.14, the processing gain should be increased to W/R = (7.14) (29) = 207 270 Hence, the bandwidth must be increased to W = 2.07MHz. Problem 13.10 : The processing gain is given as W = 500 (27 dB ) R The (Eb /J0 ) required to obtain an error probability of 10−5 for binary PSK is 9.5 dB. Hence, the jamming margin is E Jav =W − Jb Pav R 0 dB dB dB = 27 − 9.5 = 17.5 dB Problem 13.11 : If the jammer is a pulse jammer with a duty cycle α = 0.01, the probability of error for binary PSK is given as 2W/R P2 = αQ Jav /Pav For P2 = 10−5 , and α = 0.01, we have 2W/R Q = 10−3 Jav /Pav Then, 500 W/Rb = =5 Jav /Pav Jav /Pav and Jav = 100 (20 dB ) Pav Problem 13.12 : ∞ c (t) = n=−∞ cn p (t − nTc ) 271 The power spectral density of c (t) is given by (8.1.25) as Φc (f ) = where 1 Φc (f ) |P (f )|2 Tc |P (f )|2 = (ATc )2 sin c2 (f Tc ) , Tc = 1µ sec and Φc (f ) is the power spectral density of the sequence {cn } . Since the autocorrelation of the sequence {cn } is periodic with period N and is given as φc (m) = m = 0, ±N, ±2N, . . . N, −1, otherwise then, φc (m) can be represented in a discrete Fourier series as φc (m) = 1 N N −1 rC (k ) ej 2πmk/N , m = 0, 1, . . . , N − 1 k =0 where {rc (k )} are the Fourier series coefficients, which are given as N −1 r c (k ) = m=0 φc (m) e−j 2πkm/N , k = 0, 1, . . . , N − 1 and rc (k + nN ) = rc (k ) for n = 0, ±1, ±2, . . . . The latter can be evaluated to yield r c (k ) = N + 1 − = N −1 −j 2πkm/N m=0 e 1, k = 0, ±N, ±2N, . . . N + 1, otherwise The power spectral density of the sequence {cn } may be expressed in terms of {rc (k )} . These coefficients represent the power in the spectral components at the frequencies f = k/N. Therefore, we have 1∞ k Φc (f ) = rc (k ) δ f − N k=−∞ NTc Finally, we have Φc (f ) = 1 NTc ∞ k =−∞ r c (k ) P k NTc 2 δ f− k NTc Problem 13.13 : Without loss of generality, let us assume that N1 < N2 . Then, the period of the sequence obtained by forming the modulo-2 sum of the two periodic sequences is N3 = kN2 272 where k is the smallest integer multiple of N2 such that kN2 /N1 is an integer. For example, suppose that N1 = 15 and N2 = 63. Then, we find the smallest multiple of 63 which is divisible by N1 = 15, without a remainder. Clearly, if we take k = 5 periods of N2 , which yields a sequence of N3 = 315, and divide N3 by N1 , the result is 21. Hence, if we take 21N1 and 5N2 , and modulo-2 add the resulting sequences, we obtain a single period of length N3 = 21N1 = 5N2 of the new sequence. Problem 13.14 : (a) The period of the maximum length shift register sequence is N = 210 − 1 = 1023 Since Tb = NTc , then the processing gain is N Tb = 1023 (30dB ) Tc (b) According to (132-38 jamming margin is Jav Pav dB W Rb dB = − Eb J0 dB = 30 − 10 = 20dB where Jav = J0 W ≈ J0 /Tc = J0 × 106 Problem 13.15 : (a) The length of the shift-register sequence is L = 2m − 1 = 215 − 1 = 32767 bits For binary FSK modulation, the minimum frequency separation is 2/T, where 1/T is the symbol (bit) rate. The hop rate is 100 hops/ sec . Since the shift register has L = 32767 states and each state utilizes a bandwidth of 2/T = 200 Hz, then the total bandwidth for the FH signal is 6.5534 MHz. 273 (b) The processing gain is W/R. We have, W 6.5534 × 106 = = 6.5534 × 104 bps R 100 (c) If the noise is AWG with power spectral density N0 , the probability of error expression is P2 = Q Eb N0 W/R = Q PN /Pav Problem 13.16 : (a) If the hopping rate is 2 hops/bit and the bit rate is 100 bits/sec, then, the hop rate is 200 hops/sec. The minimum frequency separation for orthogonality 2/T = 400Hz. Since there are N = 32767 states of the shift register and for each state we select one of two frequencies separated by 400 Hz, the hopping bandwidth is 13.1068 MHz. (b) The processing gain is W/R, where W = 13.1068 MHz and R = 100bps. Hence W = 0.131068 MHz R (c) The probability of error in the presence of AWGN is given by (13-3-2) with L = 2 chips per hop. Problem 13.17 : (a) The total SNR for three hops is 20 ∼ 13 dB.Therefore the SNR per hop is 20/3. The probability of a chip error with noncoherent detection is 1 − Ec p = e 2N0 2 where Ec /N0 = 20/3. The probability of a bit error is Pb = 1 − (1 − p)2 = 1 − (1 − 2p + p2 ) = 2 p − p2 1 − Ec − Ec = e 2N0 − e N0 2 = 0.0013 274 b) In the case of one hop per bit, the SNR per bit is 20, Hence, 1 − 2Ec e N0 2 1 −10 = e 2 = 2.27 × 10−5 Pb = THerefore there is a loss in performance of a factor 57 AWGN due to splitting the total signal energy into three chips and, then, using hard decision decoding. Problem 13.18 : (a) We are given a hopping bandwidth of 2 GHz and a bit rate of 10 kbs. Hence, 2 × 109 W = 2 × 105 (53dB ) = R 104 (b) The bandwidth of the worst partial-band jammer is α∗ W, where α∗ = 2/ (Eb /J0 ) = 0.2 Hence α∗ W = 0.4GHz (c) The probability of error with worst-case partial-band jamming is P2 = e −1 (Eb /J0 ) = e −1 10 = 3.68 × 10−2 Problem 13.19 : The error probability for the binary convolutional code is upper-bounded as : Pb ≤ ∞ d=df ree 275 βd P2 (d) where P2 (d) is the probability of error in a pairwise comparison of two paths that are separated in Hamming distance by d. For square-law detected and combined binary FSK in AWGN, P2 (d) is n d−1 1 γb Rc d d−1−n 2d − 1 1 P2 (d) = 2d−1 exp (−γb Rc d/2) 2 2 r n=0 n! r =0 Problem 13.20 : For hard-decision Viterbi decoding of the convolutional code, the error probability is Pb ≤ ∞ d=df ree βd P2 (d) where P2 (d) is given by (8.2.28) when d is odd and by (8.2.29) when d is even. Alternatively, we may use the Chernoff bound for P2 (d), which is : P2 (d) ≤ [4p(1 − p)]d/2 . In both cases, p = 1 exp(−γb Rc /2). 2 Problem 13.21 : For fast frequency hopping at a rate of L hopes/bit and for soft-decision decoding, the performance of the binary convolutional code is upper bounded as Pb ≤ ∞ d=df ree where P2 (Ld) = 1 22Ld−1 exp (−γb Rc d/2) βd P2 (Ld) Ld−1 n=0 1 n! γb Rc d 2 n Ld−1−n r =0 2Ld − 1 r Note that the use of L hops/coded bit represents a repetition of each coded bit by a factor of L. Hence, the convolutional code is in cascade with the repetition code. The overall code rate of Rc /L and the distance properties of the convolutional code are multiplied by the factor L, so that the binary event error probabilities are evaluated at distances of Ld, where df ree ≤ d ≤ ∞. Problem 13.22 : For fast frequency hopping at a rate of L hopes/bit and for hard-decision Viterbi decoding, the performance of the binary convolutional code is upper bounded as Pb ≤ ∞ d=df ree βd P2 (Ld) 276 where P2 (d) ≤ [4p(1 − p)]d/2 and p= 1 22L−1 −γb Rc /2 L−1 γb Rc e n 2 n=0 1 L−1−n 2L − 1 n! r=0 r On the other hand, if each of the L chips is detected independently, then : Pb ≤ ∞ d=df ree βd P2 (Ld) where P2 (Ld) ≤ [4p(1 − p)]Ld/2 and p= 1 exp (γb Rc /2) . 2 Problem 13.23 : There are 64 decision variables corresponding to the 64 possible codewords in the (7,2) ReedSolomon code. With dmin = 6, we know that the performance of the code is no worse than the performance of an M = 64 orthogonal waveform set, where the SNR per bit is degraded by the factor 6/7. Thus, an upper bound on the code word error probability is P64 ≤ (M − 1)P2 = 63P2 where P2 ≤ 1 22L−1 L−1 6 exp −γb k/2 7 n=0 3 kγb 7 cn n With L = 6 and k = 6, P2 becomes 5 1 18 γb P2 ≤ 11 exp (−18γb /7) cn 2 7 n=0 where n 1 5−n 11 cn = n! r=0 r Problem 13.24 : In the worst-case partial-band interference channel, the (7,2) Reed-Solomon code provides an effective order of diversity L = 6. Hence P64 ≤ 63P2 (6) = 63 ≤ 1.6×103 , 6 γb for 277 γb L 1.47 6 γ 7b = γb 6 6 ≥3 Problem 13.25 : 2aEb J0 P2 (a) = aQ +∞ 1 = a√ 2π 2 /2 2aEb J0 e−t dt Hence, the maximum occurs when +∞ 1 dP2 (a) =√ da 2π 2 /2 2aEb J0 +∞ 1 √ 2π 2aEb J0 e−t 2 /2 e−t dt − dt = 1 2 aEb − aJEb e 0 =0⇒ πJ0 1 2 aEb − aJEb e0 πJ0 The value of a that satisfies the above equation can be found numerically (or graphically) and 71 is equal to a = E0./J0 . Substitution of this result into P2 (a) yields (for Eb /J0 ≥ 0.71) b P2 = √ 0.71 0.083 Q 2 · 0.71 = Eb /J0 Eb /J0 Problem 13.26 : The problem is to determine E exp −v L k =1 βk |2Ec + N1k |2 − v L k =1 βk |N2k |2 where thee {βk } are fixed and the {N1k } , {N2k } are complex-valued Gaussian random variables 2 2 with zero-mean and variances equal to σk . We note that βk = 1/σk and, hence, 1 E 2 2 |N1k |2 = 1 E |N2k |2 = σk 2 1 βE 2k |N1k |2 = 1 βk E |N2k |2 = 1 2 Since the {N1k } , and {N2k } are all statistically independent E exp −v L βk |2Ec + N1k |2 L = k =1 E exp −vβk |2Ec + N1k |2 k =1 and similarly for E exp −v L=1 βk |N2k |2 . Now, we use the characteristic function for the k sum of the squares of two Gaussian random variables which is given by (2.1.114) of the text (the two Gaussian random variables are the real and imaginary parts of 2Ec + N1k ). That is ψY (ju) = E ejuY = j u m m2 1 i=1 i exp 1 − juσ 2 1 − juσ 2 278 2 2 where Y = X1 + X2 , mi is the mean of Xi and σ 2 is the variance of Xi . Hence, E exp −v βk 2Ec + 2 βk N1k = and 2 −4βk v Ec 1 exp 1 + 2v 1 + 2v 2 E exp −v βk N2k = 1 1 − 2v Consequently 2 1 −4βk v Ec exp 1 − 4v 2 1 + 2v k =1 L P 2 (β ) = Problem 13.27 : The function 2 a −2av Ec exp f (v, a) = 1 − 4v 2 J0 (1 + 2v ) L is to be minimized with respect to v and maximized with respect to a. Thus, 2aEc ∂ f (v, a) = 0 ⇒ 8v (1 + 2v ) − (1 − 2v ) = 0 ∂v J0 and 2av Ec ∂ f (v, a) = 0 ⇒ 1 − =0 ∂a J0 (1 + 2v ) The simultaneous solution of these two equations yields the result v = 1/4 and a = these values, the function f (v, a) becomes 1 3 J0 f , 4 Ec = 4 eγc L = 1.47 γc L for γc = 3J0 Ec ≤ 1. For Ec ≥3 J0 Problem 13.28 : The Gold code sequences of length n = 7 may be generated by the use of two feedback shift registers of length 4 as shown below 279 ✛✘ ✛ ✚✙ ✻ ✲ ❄ ✛✘ ✲ ✚✙ ✻ Gold code sequence ✲ ❄ ✛✘ ✛ ✚✙ æ These sequences have the following cross-correlation values Values of correlation Frequency of this value -5 1 3 3 -1 3 Problem 13.29 : The method of Omura and Levitt (1982) based on the cut-off rate R0 , which is described in Section 13.2.3, can be used to evaluate the error rate of the coded system with interleaving in pulse interference. This computational method yields results that are reasonably close to the results given by Martin and McAdam (1980) and which are illustrated in Fig. 13.2.12 for the rate 1/2 convolutional coder with soft-decision decoding. Problem 13.30 : (a) For the coded and interleaved DS binary PSK modulation with pulse jamming and softdecision decoding, the cutoff rate is R0 = 1 − log 2 1 + ae−aEc /N0 Hence, log 2 1 + ae−aEc /N0 = 1 − R0 ⇒ 1 + ae−aEc /N0 = 21−R0 ⇒ Ec 1 a = a ln 21−R0 −1 N0 280 and since Ec = Eb R a 1 Eb ln 1−R0 = N0 aR 2 −1 (b) d Eb da N0 =− Hence, the worst-case a is 1 a2 R ln a 21−R0 −1 + 1 =0 a2 R a∗ = 21−R0 − 1 e provided that 21−R0 − 1 e < 1, or equivalently : R0 > 1 − log 2 (1 + e−1 ) = 0.548. E If R0 ≤ 0.548, then a = 1 maximizes Nb0 and. hence : Eb 1 1 = ln 1−R0 , N0 R2 −1 a=1 which is the result for the AWGN channel. For R0 > 0.548 and a = a∗ we have e−1 Eb = , N0 R (21−R0 − 1) (c) The plot of 10 log Eb rN0 R0 > 0.548 versus R0 , is given in the following figure: 14 12 Worst−case pulse jamming 10log(Eb/rN) 10 8 6 4 AWGN 2 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 Cut−off rate R0 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Clearly, there is no penalty in SNR due to worst case pulse jamming for rates below 0.548. Even for R0 = 0.8 the SNR loss is relatively small. As R0 → 1, the relative difference between pulse jamming and AWGN becomes large. 281 Problem 13.31 : (a) R0 = log 2 q − log 2 [1 + (q − 1)a exp(−aEc /2N0 )] ⇒ 1 + (q − 1)a exp(−aEc /2N0 ) = q 2−R0 and since Ec = REb (q − 1)a Eb 2 ln −R0 = N0 aR q 2 −1 (b) d Eb da N0 =− 2 a2 R ∗ a= provided that becomes (q2−R0 −1)e q −1 (q − 1)a 2 + 2 =0⇒ −R0 − 1 q2 aR ln q 2−R0 − 1 e q−1 q < 1 or, equivalently, R0 > log 2 (q−1)/e+1 . For a = a∗ , the SNR/bit Eb 2(q − 1) = , N0 R [q 2−R0 − 1] e for R0 > log 2 q (q − 1)/e + 1 (c) The plots are given in the following figure 25 10log(Eb/rN) 20 15 10 q=2 5 q=4 q=8 q=32 0 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 R0/log2(q) 0.8 0.9 1 For low rates, the loss due to partial band jamming is negligible if coding is used. Increasing q reduces the SNR/bit at low rates. At very high rates, a large q implies a large SNR loss. For q = 2, there is a 3dB loss relative to binary PSK. As q → ∞, the orthogonal FSK approaches -1.6dB as R0 → 0. 282 CHAPTER 14 Problem 14.1 : Based on the info about the scattering function we know that the multipath spread is Tm = 1 ms, and the Doppler spread is Bd = 0.2 Hz. (a) (i) Tm = 10−3 sec (ii) Bd = 0.2 Hz 1 (iii) (∆t)c ≈ Bd = 5 sec (iv) (∆f )c ≈ T1 = 1000 Hz m (v) Tm Bd = 2 · 10−4 (b) (i) Frequency non-selective channel : This means that the signal transmitted over the channel has a bandwidth less that 1000 Hz. (ii) Slowly fading channel : the signaling interval T is T << (∆t)c . (iii) The channel is frequency selective : the signal transmitted over the channel has a bandwidth greater than 1000 Hz. (c) The signal design problem does not have a unique solution. We should use orthogonal M=4 FSK with a symbol rate of 50 symbols/sec. Hence T = 1/50 sec. For signal orthogonality, we select the frequencies with relative separation ∆f = 1/T = 50 Hz. With this separation we obtain 10000/50=200 frequencies. Since four frequencies are requires to transmit 2 bits, we have up to 50th −order diversity available. We may use simple repetition-type diversity or a more efficient block or convolutional code of rate ≥ 1/50. The demodulator may use square-law combining. Problem 14.2 : (a) where p = P2h = p3 + 3p2 (1 − p) 1 , 2+¯c γ and γc is the received SNR/cell. ¯ (b) For γc = 100, P2h ≈ 10−6 + 3 · 10−4 ≈ 3 · 10−4 ¯ For γc = 1000, P2h ≈ 10−9 + 3 · 10−6 ≈ 3 · 10−6 ¯ (c) Since γc >> 1, we may use the approximation : P2s ≈ ¯ 283 2L−1 L 1 γc ¯ L , where L is the order of diversity. For L=3, we have : P2s ≈ 10 ⇒ γc ¯3 P2s ≈ 10−5 , γc = 100 ¯ −8 ¯ P2s ≈ 10 , γc = 1000 (d) For hard-decision decoding : L P2h = k = L+1 2 Lk p (1 − p)L−k ≤ [4p(1 − p)]L/2 k where the latter is the Chernoff bound, L is odd, and p = 2L − 1 P2s ≈ L 1 γc ¯ 1 . 2+¯c γ For soft-decision decoding : L Problem 14.3 : 2 a 2E . We now average this (a) For a fixed channel, the probability of error is : Pe (a) = Q N0 conditional error probability over the possible values of α, which are a=0, with probability 0.1, and a=2 with probability 0.9. Thus : Pe = 0.1Q (0) + 0.9Q (b) As E N0 8E N0 = 0.05 + 0.9Q 8E N0 → ∞, Pe → 0.05 (c) When the channel gains a1 , a2 are fixed, the probability of error is : (a2 + a2 ) 2E 1 2 Pe (a1 , a2 ) = Q N0 Averaging over the probability density function p(a1 , a2 ) = p(a1 ) · p(a2 ), we obtain the average probability of error : Pe = (0.1)2 Q(0) + 2 · 0.9 · 0.1 · Q = 0.005 + 0.18Q (d) As E N0 8E N0 → ∞, Pe → 0.005 284 8E N0 + (0.9)2 Q + 0.81Q 16E N0 16E N0 Problem 14.4 : (a) Tm = 1 sec ⇒ (∆f )c ≈ Bd = 0.01 Hz ⇒ (∆t)c ≈ 1 Tm 1 Bd = 1 Hz = 100 sec (b) Since W = 5 Hz and (∆f )c ≈ 1 Hz, the channel is frequency selective. (c) Since T=10 sec < (∆t)c , the channel is slowly fading. (d) The desired data rate is not specified in this problem, and must be assumed. Note that with a pulse duration of T = 10 sec, the binary PSK signals can be spaced at 1/T = 0.1 Hz apart. With a bandwidth of W=5 Hz, we can form 50 subchannels or carrier frequencies. On the other hand, the amount of diversity available in the channel is W/ (∆f )c = 5. Suppose the desired data rate is 1 bit/sec. Then, ten adjacent carriers can be used to transmit the data in parallel and the information is repeated five times using the total number of 50 subcarriers to achieve 5-th order diversity. A subcarrier separation of 1 Hz is maintained to achieve independent fading of subcarriers carrying the same information. (e) We use the approximation : 2L − 1 P2 ≈ L 1 4¯c γ L where L=5. For P3 = 10−6 , the SNR required is : 1 (126) 4¯c γ 5 = 10−6 ⇒ γc = 10.4 (10.1 dB ) ¯ (f) The tap spacing between adjacent taps is 1/5=0.2 seconds. the total multipath spread is Tm = 1 sec . Hence, we employ a RAKE receiver with at least 5 taps. (g) Since the fading is slow relative to the pulse duration, in principle we can employ a coherent receiver with pre-detection combining. (h) For an error rate of 10−6 , we have : P2 ≈ 2L − 1 L 1 γc ¯ 5 = 10−6 ⇒ γc = 41.6 (16.1 dB ) ¯ 285 Problem 14.5 : (a) 2 2 2 1 p (n1 , n2 ) = 2πσ2 e−(n1 +n2 )/2σ U1 = 2E + N1 , U2 = N1 + N2 ⇒ N1 = U1 − 2E , N2 = U2 − U1 + 2E where we assume that s(t) was transmitted. Then, the Jacobian of the transformation is : J= and : p (u 1 , u 2 ) = = = 1 −1 =1 01 2 2 1 1 e− 2σ2 [(U1 −2E ) +(U2 −(U1 −2E )) ] 2πσ2 2 2 1 2 1 e− 2σ2 [(U1 −2E ) +U2 +(U1 −2E ) −2U2 (U1 −2E )] 2πσ2 212 1 1 e− σ2 [(U1 −2E ) + 2 U2 −U2 (U1 −2E )] 2πσ2 The derivation is exactly the same for the case when −s(t) is transmitted, with the sole difference that U1 = −2E + N1 . (b) The likelihood ratio is : Λ= 1 p(u1, u2 | + s(t)) = exp − 2 (−8E U1 + 4E U2 ) >+s(t) 1 p(u1 , u2| − s(t)) σ or : ln Λ = 1 1 8E U1 − U2 >+s(t) 0 ⇒ U1 − U2 >+s(t) 0 2 σ 2 2 Hence β = −1/2. (c) U = U1 − 1 U2 = 2E + 1 (N1 − N2 ) 2 2 2 2 2 E [U ] = 2E , σU = 1 (σn1 + σn2 ) = E N0 4 Hence: p (u ) = √ 2 1 e−(u−2E ) /2E N0 2π E N0 (d) Pe = P (U < 0) 2 0 = −∞ √2π1E N0 e−(u−2E ) /2E N0 du =Q √2E E N0 =Q 4E N0 (e) If only U1 is used in reaching a decision, then we have the usual binary PSK probability of 2E , hence a loss of 3 dB, relative to the optimum combiner. error : Pe = Q N0 286 Problem 14.6: (a) L U = Re βk Uk >1 0 k =1 where Uk = 2Eak e−jφk + vk and where vk is zero-mean Gaussian with variance 2EN0k . Hence, U is Gaussian with : E [U ] = Re L=1 βk E (Uk ) k = 2E · Re L=1 ak βk e−jφk k = 2E L=1 ak |βk | cos (θk − φk ) ≡ mu k where βk = |βk | ejθk . Also : 2 σu = 2E Hence : p (u ) = √ L k =1 |βk |2 N0k 2 1 2 e−(u−mu ) /2σu 2πσu (b) The probability of error is : P2 = 0 p(u)du = Q −∞ 2γ where : γ= E L k =1 ak |βk | cos (θk − φk ) L k =1 2 |βk |2 N0k (c) To maximize P2 , we maximize γ. It is clear that γ is maximized with respect to {θk } by selecting θk = φk for k = 1, 2, ..., L. Then we have : γ= Now : dγ =0⇒ d |βl | L E L k =1 L k =1 ak |βk | |βk |2 N0k |βk |2 N0k al − k =1 L k =1 Consequently : |βl | = 2 al N0l 287 ak |βk | |βl | Nol = 0 and : 2 a2 L k k =1 Nok E γ= =E a2 L k k =1 N 2 N0k ok a2 k Nok k =1 L The above represents maximal ratio combining. Problem 14.7 : (a) p (u1 ) = 1 2L (2σ1 ) p (u 2 ) = 2 (L − 1)! 1 2L (2σ2 ) 2 ¯ uL−1 e−u1 /2σ1 , σ1 = 2E N0 (1 + γc ) 1 2 (L − 1)! P2 = P (U2 > U1 ) = 2 uL−1 e−u2 /2σ2 , σ2 = 2E N0 2 ∞ 0 P (U2 > U1 |U1 )p(U1 )dU1 But : P (U2 > U1 |U1 ) = ∞ u1 = ( 2 1 uL−1 e−u2 /2σ2 du2 2 (L−1)! L ∞ 2L 2σ2 (L−1)! ) 2 uL−1e−u2 /2σ2 (−2σ2 ) 2 2 2 ∞ (−2σ2 )(L−1) L−2 −u2 /2σ2 ue du2 u1 2 L (L−1)! 2 (2σ2 ) − u1 2 1 ( 2 (2σ2 ) 2 1 = ∞ u1 p(u2 )du2 = 2 L−1 (L−1)! 2σ2 ) uL−1e−u1 /2σ2 + 1 ∞ u1 2 1 ( 2 L−1 (L−2)! 2σ2 ) uL−2e−u2 /2σ2 du2 2 Continuing, in the same way, the integration by parts, we obtain : 2 P (U2 > U1 |U1 ) = e−u1 /2σ2 Then : P2 = = ∞ 0 2 L−1 k =0 e−u1 /2σ2 L−1 k =0 2 k !(2σ2 ) k 1 2 (u1 /2σ2 ) L k =0 k ( ∞ 0 2 (u1 /2σ2 ) k! 1 k! 2 (2σ1 ) (L−1)! L−1 2L 2σ1 (L−1)! ) k 2 uL−1 e−u1 /2σ1 du1 1 2 The integral that exists inside the summation is equal to : ∞ 0 uL−1+k e−ua du = ∞ uL−1+k e−ua (−a) 0 L−1+k a ∞ 0 − L−1+k (−a) uL−2+k e−ua du 288 2 uL−1+k e−u1 (1/σ1 +1/σ2 )/2 du1 1 ∞ 0 uL−2+k e−ua du = 2 2 where a = (1/σ1 + 1/σ2 )/2 = ∞ 0 u L−1+k −ua e 2 2 σ1 +σ2 2 σ2 . 2σ1 2 du = Continuing the integration by parts, we obtain : 1 aL+k (L − 1 + k )! = L+k 22 2σ1 σ2 2 2 σ1 + σ2 (L − 1 + k )! Hence : ∞ 0 2 P2 = L−1 k =0 = L−1 k =0 = L−1 k =0 L−1+k k ( = L−1 k =0 L−1+k k (2EN0 (1+¯c ))k (2EN0 )L γ (2EN0 (2+¯c ))L+k γ 2 k !(2σ2 ) k 2k 2σ2 k !( 1 2 (2σ1 ) L (L−1)! 22 2σ1 σ2 L+k 2 +σ 2 σ1 2 1 )( 2L 2σ1 (L−1)! ) 2 2 σ1k σ2L 2 2 L+k σ1 +σ2 ) 2 uL−1+k e−u1 (1/σ1 +1/σ2 )/2 du1 1 L−1 k =0 = which is the desired expression (14-4-15) with µ = (L − 1 + k )! L−1+k k = 1 2+¯c γ (2EN0 (1+¯c ))k (2EN0 )L γ (2EN0 (1+¯c )+2EN0 )L+k γ L L−1 k =0 L−1+k k 1+¯c k γ 2+¯c γ γc ¯ . 2+¯c γ Problem 14.8 : T (D, N, J = 1) = J 3 ND 6 ND 6 |J =1 = 1 − JND 2 (1 + J ) 1 − 2ND 2 dT (D, N ) (1 − 2ND 2 ) D 6 − ND 6 (−2D 2 ) D6 |N =1 = |N =1 = dN (1 − 2ND 2 )2 (1 − 2D 2 )2 (a) For hard-decision decoding : Pb ≤ where p = 1 2 1− γc ¯ 1+¯c γ ∞ d=df ree βd P2 (d) = dT (D, N ) |N =1,D=√4p(1−p) dN for coherent PSK (14-3-7). Thus : Pb ≤ [4p(1 − p)]3 [1 − 8p(1 − p)]2 (b) For soft-decision decoding, the error probability is upper bounded as Pb ≤ ∞ d=df ree 289 βd P2 (d) where df ree = 6, {βd } are the coefficients in the expansion of the derivative of T(D,N) evaluated at N=1, and : 1 − µ d d−1 d − 1 + k 1+µ k P 2 (d ) = 2 k 2 k =0 γc ¯ where µ = 1+¯c , as obtained from (14-4-15). γ ¯ These probabilities Pb are plotted on the following graph, with SNR = γc . −2 10 −3 Pb − Probability of a bit error 10 Hard−dec. decoding −4 10 Soft−dec. decoding −5 10 −6 10 2 4 6 8 10 12 SNR (db) 14 16 18 20 Problem 14.9 : L U= k =1 Uk 2 (a) Uk = 2Eak + vk , where vk is Gaussian with E [vk ] = 0 and σv = 2EN0 . Hence, for fixed L L 2 2 {ak } , U is also Gaussian with : E [U ] = k=1 E (Uk ) = 2E k=1 ak and σu = Lσv = 2LEN0 . Since U is Gaussian, the probability of error, conditioned on a fixed number of gains {ak } is 2E Pb (a1 , a2 , ..., aL ) = Q √ L k =1 ak 2LEN0 = Q 2E L k =1 LN0 ak 2 (b) The average probability of error for the fading channel is the conditional error probability averaged over the {ak } . Hence : Pd = ∞ 0 da1 ∞ 0 da2 ... ∞ 0 daL Pb (a1 , a2 , ..., aL ) p(a1 )p(a2 )...p(aL ) 290 a where p(ak ) = σk exp(−a2 /2σ 2 ), where σ 2 is the variance of the Gaussian RV’s associated with 2 k the Rayleigh distribution of the {ak } (not to be confused with the variance of the noise terms). Since Pb (a1 , a2 , ..., aL ) depends on the {ak } through their sum, we may let : X = L=1 ak and, k 2EX/ (LN0 ) . The average error thus, we have the conditional error probability Pb (X ) = Q probability is : ∞ Pb = Pb (X )p(X )dX 0 The problem is to determine p(X ). Unfortunately, there is no closed form expression for the pdf of a sum of Rayleigh distributed RV’s. Therefore, we cannot proceed any further. Problem 14.10 : (a) The plot of g (¯c ) as a function of γc is given below : γ ¯ 0.22 0.21 g(gamma_c) 0.2 0.19 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 gamma_c The maximum value of g (¯c) is approximately 0.215 and occurs when γc ≈ 3. γ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯¯ ¯ (b) γc = γb /L. Hence, for a given γb the optimum diversity is L = γb /γc = γb /3. ¯ (c) For the optimum diversity we have : 1 γ γ γ γ P2 (Lopt ) < 2−0.215¯b = e− ln 2·0.215¯b = e−0.15¯b = e−0.15¯b +ln 2 2 For the non-fading channel :P2 = 1 e−0.5γb . Hence, for large SNR (¯b >> 1), the penalty in SNR γ 2 is: 0.5 = 5.3 dB 10 log 10 0.15 291 Problem 14.11 : The radio signal propagates at the speed of light, c = 3×108 m/ sec . The difference in propagation delay for a distance of 300 meters is Td = 300 = 1µ sec 3 × 108 The minimum bandwidth of a DS spread spectrum signal required to resolve the propagation paths is W = 1 MHz. Hence, the minimum chip rate is 106 chips per second. Problem 14.12 : (a) The dimensionality of the signal space is two. An orthonormal basis set for the signal space is formed by the signals 2 , T f1 (t) = 0, 0≤t< T 2 otherwise f2 (t) = (b) The optimal receiver is shown in the next figure tT ✎=2 ✲ r (t) ✲ ✲ ❅ ✂❅ f1 ( T − t) ❘ 2 f2 (T − t) ✎t ❅ ❅ ❘ ✂ =T 2 , T 0, r1 ✲ r2 ✲ ≤t<T otherwise T 2 Select the largest (c) Assuming that the signal s1 (t) is transmitted, the received vector at the output of the samplers is A2 T r=[ + n1 , n2 ] 2 where n1 , n2 are zero mean Gaussian random variables with variance error P (e|s1 ) is A2 T ) 2 P (e|s1) = P (n2 − n1 > 1 =√ 2πN0 ∞ A2 T 2 2 − 2x N0 e 292 A2 T dx = Q 2N0 N0 . 2 The probability of where we have used the fact the n = n2 − n1 is a zero-mean Gaussian random variable with 2 variance N0 . Similarly we find that P (e|s1) = Q ANT , so that 20 A2 T 1 1 P (e) = P (e|s1) + P (e|s2 ) = Q 2 2 2N0 (d) The signal waveform f1 ( T − t) matched to f1 (t) is exactly the same with the signal waveform 2 f2 (T − t) matched to f2 (t). That is, f1 ( T − t) = f2 (T − t) = f1 (t) = 2 2 , T 0, 0≤t< T 2 otherwise Thus, the optimal receiver can be implemented by using just one filter followed by a sampler which samples the output of the matched filter at t = T and t = T to produce the random 2 variables r1 and r2 respectively. (e) If the signal s1 (t) is transmitted, then the received signal r (t) is 1 T r (t) = s1 (t) + s1 (t − ) + n(t) 2 2 The output of the sampler at t = r1 = A r2 = A 2 T 2 and t = T is given by 3A 2T + T4 2 2T 5 + n1 = T4 2 A2 T + n1 8 A2 T + n2 8 2T 1 + n2 = T4 2 If the optimal receiver uses a threshold V to base its decisions, that is r1 − r2 s1 >V < s2 then the probability of error P (e|s1 ) is A2 T A2 T V − V ) = Q 2 P (e|s1) = P (n2 − n1 > 2 −√ 8 8N0 N0 If s2 (t) is transmitted, then 1 T r (t) = s2 (t) + s2 (t − ) + n(t) 2 2 293 The output of the sampler at t = T 2 and t = T is given by r1 = n1 r2 = A 2T 3A + T4 2 5 2 A2 T + n2 8 = 2T + n2 T4 The probability of error P (e|s2) is 5 P (e|s2 ) = P (n1 − n2 > 2 A2 T 5 + V ) = Q 8 2 A2 T V +√ 8N0 N0 Thus, the average probability of error is given by 1 1 P (e|s1) + P (e|s2 ) 2 2 2T V 1 5 1 A −√ +Q Q2 = 2 8N0 2 2 N0 P (e) = The optimal value of V can be found by setting differentiate definite integrals, we obtain ϑP (e) ϑV 2 V A2 T +√ 8N0 N0 equal to zero. Using Leibnitz rule to ϑP (e) A2 T 5 V = 0 = 2 − √ − ϑV 8N0 2 N0 2 A2 T V +√ 8N0 N0 or by solving in terms of V V =− 1 8 A2 T 2 (f) Let a be fixed to some value between 0 and 1. Then, if we argue as in part (e) we obtain P (e|s1 , a) = P (n2 − n1 > 2 A2 T − V (a)) 8 P (e|s2 , a) = P (n1 − n2 > (a + 2) A2 T + V (a)) 8 and the probability of error is 1 1 P (e|a) = P (e|s1 , a) + P (e|s2, a) 2 2 294 For a given a, the optimal value of V (a) is found by setting we find that a A2 T V (a) = − 4 2 The mean square estimation of V (a) is V= 1 0 V (a)f (a)da = − 1 4 A2 T 2 1 0 ϑP (e|a) ϑV (a) ada = − equal to zero. By doing so 1 8 A2 T 2 Problem 14.13 : (a) cos 2πf1 t ❄ ✲× ✲ ❧ M.F. 1 ( )2 ❄ ❤ + ✲× ✲ ❧ ✻ M.F. 1 ( )2 M.F. 2 ✻ ( )2 r1 (t) ✲ sin 2πf1 t cos 2πf2 t ❄ ✲× ✲ ❧ ❄ ❄ ❤ + ❧ ✲× ✲ ✻ sin 2πf2 t cos 2πf1 t ❄ ✲× ✲ ❧ M.F. 2 ( )2 ❧ +✲ ✻ ✻ ✻ sample at t = kT M.F. 1 ❄ () Detector ✲ select output the larger 2 ❄ ❤ + ✲× ✲ ❧ ✻ M.F. 1 ( )2 ✻ ❄ r2 (t) ✲ sin 2πf1 t cos 2πf2 t ❄ ✲× ✲ ❧ ❧ + M.F. 2 ✻ ( )2 ❄ ❤ + ✲× ✲ ❧ ✻ M.F. 2 ( )2 sin 2πf2 t 295 ✻ ✲ (b) The probability of error for binary FSK with square-law combining for L = 2 is given in Figure 14-4-7. The probability of error for L = 1 is also given in Figure 14-4-7. Note that an increase in SNR by a factor of 10 reduces the error probability by a factor of 10 when L = 1 and by a factor of 100 when D = 2. Problem 14.14 : (a) The noise-free received waveforms {ri (t)} are given by : ri (t) = h(t) ∗ si (t), i = 1, 2, and they are shown in the following figure : 4A r1 (t) 2T t -2A 4A ✲ r2 (t) 2A T/4 T 2T ✲ t -4A æ (b) The optimum receiver employs two matched filters gi (t) = ri (2T − t), and after each matched filter there is a sampler working at a rate of 1/2T. The equivalent lowpass responses gi (t) of the two matched filters are given in the following figure : 296 g1 (t) 4A T 2T t ✲ 2T T -2A ✲ t g2 (t) 4A -4A æ Problem 14.15 : Since a follows the Nakagami-m distribution : m m 2m−1 2 pa (a) = a exp −ma2 /Ω , Γ(m) Ω a≥0 where : Ω = E (a2 ) . The pdf of the random variable γ = a2 Eb /N0 is specified using the usual method for a function of a random variable : N0 dγ a= γ , = 2aEb /N0 = 2 γ Eb/N0 Eb da Hence : −1 pγ (γ ) = dγ pa γ Nb0 da E = √ 2 1 2 γ Eb /N0 Γ(m) = γ m−1 mm Γ(m) Ωm (Eb /N0 )m = mm γ m−1 Γ(m) γ m ¯ m Ω m γ Nb0 E 2m−1 0 exp −mγ Nb /Ω E exp (−mγ/ (Eb Ω/N0 )) exp (−mγ/γ ) ¯ 297 where γ = E (a2 ) Eb /N0 . ¯ Problem 14.16 : (a) By taking the conjugate of r2 = h1 s∗ − h2 s∗ + n2 2 1 r1 ∗ r2 = h1 h2 −h∗ h∗ 2 1 s1 s2 + n1 n∗ 2 Hence, the soft-decision estimates of the transmitted symbols (s1 , s2 ) will be −1 s1 ˆ s2 ˆ h1 h2 r1 = ∗ −h∗ h∗ r2 2 1 ∗ h∗ r1 − h2 r2 1 1 = h 2 +h 2 ∗ 1 2 h∗ r1 + h1 r2 2 which corresponds to dual-diversity reception for si . (b) The bit error probability for dual diversity reception of binary PSK is given by Equation γ ¯ E E ¯ (14.4-15), with L = 2 and µ = 1+cγ¯c (where the average SNR per channel is γc = N0 E [h2 ] = N0 ) Then (14.4-15) becomes P2 = = 1 (1 2 1 (1 2 − µ) 2 1 2 1 0 + [ 1 (1 + µ)] 2 2 1 − µ) [2 + µ] ¯ When γc >> 1, then 1 (1 − µ) ≈ 1/4γc and µ ≈ 1. Hence, for large SNR the bit error probability ¯ 2 for binary PSK can be approximated as 1 P2 ≈ 3 4γ c ¯ 2 (c) The bit error probability for dual diversity reception of binary PSK is given by Equation (14.4-41), with L = 2 and µ as above. Replacing we get P2 = 1 µ 1 − µ2 1− √ 1+ 2 2 − µ2 2 − µ2 Problem 14.17 : (a) Noting that µ < 1, the expression (14.6-35) for the binary event error probability can be 298 upperbounded by P 2 (w m ) < = 1−µ wm 2 1−µ wm 2 wm −1+k k w m −1 k =0 2wm −1 wm Hence, the union bound for the probability for a code word error would be: PM < (M − 1)P2 (dmin ) < 2k 2dmin −1 dmin 1−µ dmin 2 Now, taking the expression for µ for each of the three modulation schemes, we obtain the desired expression. Non-coherent FSK : µ= DPSK : µ= 1−µ 1 1 1 γc ¯ ⇒ < = = 2 + γc ¯ 2 2 + γc ¯ γc ¯ RC γb ¯ 1−µ 1 1 1 γc ¯ ⇒ = = < 1 + γc ¯ 2 2(1 + γc ) ¯ 2γ c ¯ 2RC γb ¯ γ ¯ BPSK : µ = 1+cγ¯c = 1 − (1 − x)1/2 ≈ 1 − x/2. Hence 1 . 1+γc ¯ Using Taylor’s expansion, we can approximate for large γc ¯ 1 1 1−µ 1 ≈ < = 2 4(1 + γc ) ¯ 4γ c ¯ 4RC γb ¯ (b) Noting that ¯¯ ¯ ¯¯ exp (−dmin Rc γb f (γc )) = exp (−dmin Rc γb ln(β γc )/γc ) ¯ = exp (−dmin ln(β γc )) = 1 β γc ¯ dmin = 1 βRc γb ¯ dmin we show the equivalence between the expressions of (a) and (b). The maximum is obtained with d β ln(β γc ) ¯ e f (γ ) = 0 ⇒ − = 0 ⇒ ln(β γc ) = 1 ⇒ γc = ¯ ¯ 2 dγ c ¯ β γc γc ¯¯ γ β By checking the second derivative, we verify that this extreme point is indeed a maximum. ¯ (c) For the value of γc found in (b), we have fmax (γc ) = β/e. Then ¯ ¯ ¯ exp (−k (βdmin γb /ne − ln 2)) = exp (k ln 2) exp (−Rc βdmin γb /e) ¯ ¯ = exp (k ln 2) exp (−Rc dmin γb fmax (γb )) = 2k exp (−dmin Rc γb fmax (γb )) ¯ ¯ 299 which shows the equivalence between the upper bounds given in (b) and (c). In order for the bound to go to zero, as k is increased to infinity we need the rest of the argument of the exponent to be negative, or (βdmin γb /ne − ln 2) > 0 ⇒ γb > ¯ ¯ ne dmin β ln 2 ⇒ γb min = ¯ 2e ln 2 β Replacing for the values of β found in part (a) we get: γb min,P SK ¯ = −0.96 dB γb min,DP SK ¯ = 2.75 dB γb min,non−coh.F SK = ¯ 5.76 dB As expected, among the three, binary PSK has the least stringent SNR requirement for asymptotic performance. 300 CHAPTER 15 Problem 15.1 : L−1 gk (t) = ejθk n=0 ak (n)p(t − nTc ) The unit energy constraint is : T 0 ∗ gk (t)gk (t)dt = 1 We also define as cross-correlation : ρij (τ ) = T 0 ∗ gi (t)gj (t − τ )dt (a) For synchronous transmission, the received lowpass-equivalent signal r (t) is again given by (15-3-9), while the log-likelihood ratio is : Λ(b) = T 0 r (t) − K k =1 √ 2 Ek bk gk (t) dt = √ |r (t)|2 dt + k j Ek Ej bj b∗ k √ ∗ −2Re K Ek bk 0T r (t)gk (t) k =1 = √ |r (t)|2 dt + k j Ek Ej bj bk ρjk (0) √ Ek bk rk −2Re K k =1 T 0 T 0 ∗ gj (t)gk (t)dt T 0 ∗ where rk = 0T r (t)gk (t)dt, and we assume that the information sequence {bk } is real. Hence, the correlation metrics can be expressed in a similar form to (15-3-15) : C (rk , bk ) = 2bt Re (rK ) − bt Rs bK K K The only difference from the real-valued case of the text is that the correlation matrix Rs uses the complex-valued cross-correlations given above : Rs [ij ] = ρ∗ (0), i ≤ j ij ρij (0), i > j and that the matched filters producing {rk } employ the complex-conjugate of the signature waveforms {gk (t)} . 301 (b) Following the same procedure as in pages 852-853 of the text, we see that the correlator outputs are : rk (i) = (i+1)T +τk iT +τk ∗ r (t)gk (t − iT − τk )dt and that these can be expressed in matrix form as : r = RN b + n where r,b,n are given by (15-3-20)-(15-3-22) and : Ra (0) Ra (−1) 0 ··· ··· R (1) R (0) R (−1) 0 ··· a a a . .. .. .. . . . . . RN = 0 ⇒ . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . ··· 0 Ra (1) Ra (0) 0 H Ra (0) Ra (1) 0 ··· ··· Ra (1) Ra (0) Ra H (1) 0 ··· . .. .. .. . . . . RN = 0 . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . 0 ··· 0 Ra (1) Ra (0) where Ra (m) is a K × K matrix with elements : Rkl (m) = ∞ −∞ ∗ gk (t − τk )gl (t + mT − τl )dt and we have exploited the fact (which holds in the real-valued case, too) that : Ra (m) = R∗t (−m) = RH (−m) a a Finally, we note that Ra (0) = Rs , the correlation matrix of the real-valued case. Problem 15.2 : The capacity per user CK is : CK = 1 P W log 2 1 + , K W N0 lim CK = 0 K →∞ and the total capacity : KCK = W log 2 1 + 302 P W N0 which is independent of K. By using the fact that : P = CK Eb we can rewrite the above equations as : Eb 1 CK = K W log 2 1 + CKN0 ⇒ W K CK = log 2 1 + W Eb N0 = (2K ) CK W CK Eb W N0 ⇒ −1 CK W which is the relationship between the SNR and the normalized capacity per user. The relationship between the normalized total capacity Cn = K CK and the SNR is : W Eb 2Cn − 1 =K N0 Cn The corresponding plots for these last two relationships are given in the following figures : 10 9 Capacity per user per Hertz C_K/W 8 7 6 K=1 5 4 3 2 K=3 1 0 −5 K=10 0 5 10 15 SNR/bit (dB) 20 25 30 25 30 10 9 Total bit rate per Hertz C_n 8 7 6 5 K=1 4 3 K=3 2 K=10 1 0 −5 0 5 10 15 SNR/bit (dB) 20 As we observe the normalized capacity per user CK /W decreases to 0 as the number of user increases. On the other hand, we saw that the total normalized capacity Cn is constant, independent of the number of users K . The second graph is explained by the fact that as the 303 number of users increases, the capacity per user CK , decreases and hence, the SNR/bit=P/CK increases, for the same user power P . That’s why the curves are shifted to the right, as K → ∞. Problem 15.3 : (a) P1 aW N0 P2 1+ (1 − a)W N0 C1 = aW log 2 1 + C2 = (1 − a)W log 2 C = C1 + C2 = W a log 2 1 + P1 P2 + (1 − a) log 2 1 + aW N0 (1 − a)W N0 As a varies between 0 and 1, the graph of the points (C1 , C2 ) is given in the following figure: W=1, P1/N0=3, P2/N0=1 2.5 2 R_2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 R_1 (b) Substituting P1 /a = P2 /(1 − a) = P1 + P2 , in the expression for C = C1 + C2 , we obtain : C = C1 + C2 = W a log 2 1 + P1 +P2 + (1 − a) log 2 1 + W N0 = W log 2 1 + P1 +P2 W N0 P 1 +P 2 W N0 which is the maximum rate that can be satisfied, based on the inequalities that the rates R1 , R2 must satisfy. Hence, the distribution of the bandwidth according to the SNR of each user, produces the maximum achievable rate. Problem 15.4 : (a) Since the transmitters are peak-power-limited, the constraint on the available power holds 304 for the allocated time frame when each user transmits. This is more restrictive that an averagepower limited TDMA system, where the power is averaged over all the time frames, so each user can transmit in his allocated frame with power Pi /ai , where ai is the fraction of the time that the user transmits. Hence, in the peak-power limited system : C1 = aW log 2 1 + P1 W N0 C2 = (1 − a)W log 2 1 + C = C1 + C2 = W a log 2 1 + P2 W N0 P1 P2 + (1 − a) log 2 1 + W N0 W N0 (b) As a varies between 0 and 1, the graph of the points (C1 , C2) is given in the following figure W=1, P1/N0=3, P2/N0=1 2.5 2 R_2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 R_1 We note that the peak-power-limited TDMA system has a more restricted achievable region (R1 , R2 ). compared to the FDMA system of problem 15.3. Problem 15.5 : (a) Since the system is average-power limited, the i-th user can transmit in his allocated timeframe with peak-power Pi /ai , where ai is the fraction of the time that the user transmits. Hence, in the average-power limited system : C1 = aW log 2 1 + C2 = (1 − a)W log 2 1 + 305 P1 /a W N0 P2 /(1 − a) W N0 C = C1 + C2 = W a log 2 1 + P1 P2 + (1 − a) log 2 1 + aW N0 (1 − a)W N0 (b) As a varies between 0 and 1, the graph of the points (C1 , C2) is given in the following figure W=1, P1/N0=3, P2/N0=1 2.5 2 R_2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 R_1 (c) We note that the expression for the total capacity is the same as that of the FDMA in Problem 15.2. Hence, if the time that each user transmits is proportional to the transmitter’s power : P1 /a = P2 /(1 − a) = P1 + P2 , we have : P 1 +P 2 W N0 C = C1 + C2 = W a log 2 1 + = W log 2 1 + + (1 − a) log 2 1 + P 1 +P 2 W N0 P 1 +P 2 W N0 which is the maximum rate that can be satisfied, based on the inequalities that the rates R1 , R2 must satisfy. Hence, the distribution of the time that each user transmits according to the respective SNR produces the maximum achievable rate. Problem 15.6 : (a) We have r1 = Since T 0 g1 (t)g1 (t) = 1, and T 0 T 0 r (t)g1 (t)dt g1 (t)g2 (t) = ρ r1 = E1 b1 + 306 E2 b2 ρ + n1 where n1 = T 0 n(t)g1 (t)dt. Similarly r2 = where n2 = T 0 E1 b1 ρ + E2 b2 + n2 n(t)g2 (t)dt (b) We have E [n1 ] (= m1 ) = E [n2 ] (= m2 ) = 0. Hence 2 σ1 = E [n2 ] = E 1 = N0 2 = N0 2 2 In the same way, σ1 = E [n2 ] = 1 N0 . 2 T 0 T 0 T 0 g1 (a)g1 (b)n(a)n(b)dadb g1 (a)g1 (a)da The covariance is equal to µ12 = E [n1 n2 ] − E [n1 ]E [n2 ] = E [n1 n2 ] = E 0T 0T g1 (a)g2 (b)n(a)n(b)dadb = N0 0T g1 (a)g2 (a)da 2 = N0 ρ 2 (c) Given b1 and b2 , then (r1 ,r2 ) follow the pdf of (n1 ,n2 ) which are jointly Gaussian with a pdf given by (2-1-150) or (2-1-156). Using the results from (b) p(r1 , r2 |b1 , b2 ) = p(n1 , n2 ) x2 −2ρx1 x +x2 1 √ exp − 1 2(1−ρ22) 2 = N0 2 2π where x1 = r1 − √ E1 b1 − √ 1−ρ 2 E2 b2 ρ and x2 = r2 − √ E2 b2 − √ E1 b1 ρ Problem 15.7 : We use the result for r1 , r2 from Problem 5.6 (a) (or the equivalent expression (15.3-40)). Then, assuming b1 = 1 was transmitted, the probability of error for b1 is P1 = P (error1|b2 = 1)P (b2 = 1) + P (error1|b2 = −1)P (b2 = −1) √ =Q 2( √ E1 +ρ E2 )2 N0 1 2 √ +Q 2( √ E1 −ρ E2 )2 N0 1 2 The same expression is obtained when b1 = −1 is transmitted. Hence √ √ √ √ 1 ( E 1 + ρ E 2 )2 1 ( E 1 − ρ E 2 )2 P1 = Q 2 + Q 2 2 N0 2 N0 307 Similarly √ √ √ √ 1 ( E 2 + ρ E 1 )2 1 ( E 2 − ρ E 1 )2 P2 = Q 2 + Q 2 2 N0 2 N0 Problem 15.8 : (a) p(r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T |b1 , b2 )P (b1 , b2 ) p(r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T ) But P (b1 , b2 ) = P (b1 )P (b2 ) = 1/4 for any pair of (b1 , b2 ) and p(r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T ) is independent of (b1 , b2 ). Hence P (b1 , b2 |r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T ) = arg max P (b1 , b2 |r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T ) = arg max p(r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T |b1 , b2 ) b1 ,b2 b1 ,b2 which shows the equivalence between the MAP and ML criteria, when b1 , b2 are equiprobable. (b) Sufficient statistics for r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T are the correlator outputs r1 , r2 at t = T . From Problem 15.6 the joint pdf of r1 , r2 given b1 , b2 is 1 x2 − 2ρx1 x2 + x2 2 √ exp − 1 p(r1 , r2 |b1 , b2 ) = N0 2) 2 2(1 − ρ 2π 2 1 − ρ √ √ √ √ where x1 = r1 − E1 b1 − E2 b2 ρ and x2 = r2 − E2 b2 − E1 b1 ρ The ML detector searches for the arguments b1 , b2 that maximize p(r1 , r2 |b1 , b2 ). We see that the term outside the exponent and the demoninator of the exponent do not depend on b1 , b2 . Hence : (b1 , b2 ) = arg max exp [−(x2 − 2ρx1 x2 + x2 )] 1 2 = arg max [−(x2 − 2ρx1 x2 + x2 )] 1 2 Expanding x1 , x2 and remembering that additive terms which are constant independent of b1 , b2 2 (e.g. ri , or b2 (= 1)) do not affect the argument of the maximum, we arrive at i √ √ √ (b1 , b2 ) = arg max 2(1 − ρ2 ) E1 b1 r1 + 2(1 − ρ2 ) E2 b2 r2 − 2(1 − ρ2 ) E1 E2 b1 b2 ρ √ √ √ = arg max E1 b1 r1 + E2 b2 r2 − E1 E2 b1 b2 ρ Problem 15.9 : (a) P (b1 |r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T ) = P (b1 |r1 , r2 ) = P (b1 , b2 = 1|r1, r2 ) + P (b1 , b2 = −1|r1 , r2 ) 308 But p(r1 , r2 |b1 , b2 = x) P (b1 , b2 = x) p (r 1 , r 2 ) and p(r1 , r2 ) and P (b1 , b2 = x) do not depend on the value of b1 . Hence P (b1 , b2 = x|r1 , r2 ) = arg max P (b1 |r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T ) = arg max (p(r1 , r2 |b1 , b2 = 1) + p(r1 , r2 |b1 , b2 = −1)) b1 b1 From Problem 15.6 the joint pdf of r1 , r2 given b1 , b2 is 1 x2 − 2ρx1 x2 + x2 2 √ exp − 1 N0 2) 2 2(1 − ρ 2π 2 1 − ρ √ √ √ √ where x1 = r1 − E1 b1 − E2 b2 ρ and x2 = r2 − E2 b2 − E1 b1 ρ . Expanding x1 , x2 and 2 remembering that additive terms which are constant independent of b1 , b2 (e.g. ri , or b2 (= 1)) i do not affect the argument of the maximum, we arrive at p(r1 , r2 |b1 , b2 ) = √ √ √ E1 b1 r1 + E2 r2 − E1 E2 b1 ρ √ √ √ N0 r + exp E1 b1 r1 − E2 02 + E1 E2 b1 ρ √N 1 arg max exp( ENb01 r1 ) √ √ √ √ × exp( E2 r2 −N0E1 E2 b1 ρ ) + exp( − E2 r2 + 0 E1 E2 b1 ρ ) N √ √ √ E2 r2 − E1 E2 b1 ρ E1 b1 r1 arg max exp( N0 ) · 2 cosh( ) √ √ N0 √ E2 r2 − E1 E2 b1 ρ E1 b1 r1 arg max + ln cosh( ) N0 N0 arg maxb1 P (b1 |r (t), 0 ≤ t ≤ T ) = arg max exp = = = (b) From part(a) b1 = 1 ⇔ ⇔ √ √ E E E1 r1 + ln cosh( √2 r2 − 0 √1 E2 ρ ) > N0 N √ − E1 r1 + ln cosh( E2 r2 + 0 E1 E2 ρ ) N0 N√ √ E2 r2 − E1 E2 ρ √ cosh( ) N0 E √ √ 2 N10r1 + ln E2 r2 + E1 E2 ρ cosh( ) N √ >0 0 Hence √ √ cosh( E2 r2 + 0 E1 E2 ρ ) N N r1 − √0 ln √ √ b1 = sgn E2 r2 − E1 E2 ρ 2 E1 cosh( ) N0 Problem 15.10 : As N0 → 0, the probability in expression (15.3-62) will be dominated by the term which has the smallest argument in the Q function. Hence √ 2 Ek + j =k Ej bj ρjk ef f ective SNR = min bj N0 309 The minimum over bj is achieved when all terms add destructively to the if the term inside the square is negative). Therefore √ Ek term (or, it is 0, 2 ηk = max 0, 1 − j =k Ej |ρjk | Ek Problem 15.11 : The probability that the ML detector makes an error for the first user is : P1 = = + + + ˆ b1 ,b2 P (b1 = b1 |b1 , b2 )(P (b1 , b2 ) 1 (P [++ → −+] + P [++ → −−]) 4 1 (P [−+ → ++] + P [−+ → +−]) 4 1 (P [+− → −−] + P [−+ → −+]) 4 1 (P [−− → +−] + P [−+ → ++]) 4 where P [b1 b2 → ˆ1ˆ2 ] denotes the probability that the detector chooses (ˆ1ˆ2 ) conditioned on bb bb (b1 , b2 ) having being transmitted. Due to the symmetry of the decision statistic, the above relationship simplifies to 1 (P [−− → +−] + P [−− → ++]) 2 1 + (P [−+ → ++] + P [−+ → +−]) 2 P1 = (1) From Problem 15.8 we know that the decision of this detector is based on (ˆ1 , ˆ2 ) = arg max S (b1 , b2 ) = bb E1 b1 r1 + E2 b2 r2 − E1 E2 b1 b2 ρ Hence, P [−− → +−] can be upper bounded as P [−− → +−] ≤ P [S (−−) < S (+−)|(−−) transmitted] This is a bound and not an equality since the if S (−−) < S (+−) then (−−) is not chosen, but not necessarily in favor of (+−); it may have been in favor of (++) or (−+). The last bound is easy to calculate : P [S (−−) < S (+−)|(−−)transmitted] √ √ √ √ √ √ = P [− E1 r1√ E2√ − E1 E2 ρ < E1 r1 − √ 2 r2 + E1 E2 ρ − r2 E √ |r1 = − E1 − E2 ρ + n1 ; r1 = − E1 − E2 ρ + n1 ] √ 2E1 = P [n1 > E1 ] = Q N0 310 Similarly, for the other three terms of (1) we obtain : P [−− → ++] ≤ P [S (−−) <√ (++)|(−−) transmitted] S √ √ = P [ E1 n1 + E2 n2 > E1 + E2 + 2 E1 E1 ρ] √ 2 E1 +E2 +20 N =Q E1 E2 ρ P [−+ → +−] ≤ P [S (−+) <√ (+−)|(−+) transmitted] S √ √ = P [ E1 n1 − E2 n2 > E1 + E2 − 2 E1 E1 ρ] √ 2 E1 +E2 −20 N =Q E1 E2 ρ P [−+ → ++] ≤ P [S (−+) < S (++)|(−+) transmitted] √ = P [n1 > E1 ] 2E1 =Q N0 By adding the four terms we obtain P1 ≤ Q 2E1 N0 + 1Q 2 √ √ 2 E1 +E2 +20 N +1Q 2 2 E1 +E2 −20 N E1 E2 ρ E1 E2 ρ But we note that if ρ ≥ 0, the last term is negligible, while if ρ ≤ 0, then the second term is negiligible. Hence, the bound can be written as P1 ≤ Q 2E 1 N0 √ 1 E1 + E2 − 2 E1 E2 |ρ| + Q 2 2 N0 Problem 15.12 : (a) We have seen in Prob. 15.11 that the probability of error for user 1 can be upper bounded by √ 2E 1 1 E1 + E2 − 2 E1 E2 |ρ| + Q 2 P1 ≤ Q N0 2 N0 As N0 → 0 the probability of error will be dominated by the Q function with the smallest argument. Hence √ 2 1 1 1 η1 = min ( 2E0 )/( 2E0 ), 2 E1 +E2 −N0 E1 E2 |ρ| /( 2E0 ) N N N = min 1, 1 + E2 E1 −2 E2 |ρ| E1 (b) The plot of the asymptotic efficiencies is given in the following figure 311 1.5 Conventional, rho = 0.1 Optimum, rho = 0.1 Conventional, rho = 0.2 Optimum, rho = 0.2 n 1 0.5 0 −20 −15 −10 −5 0 E /E (dB) 2 5 10 15 20 1 We notice the much better performance of the optimal detector especially when the interfearer (user 2) is much stronger than the signal. We also notice that the performance of the conventional detector decreases as |ρ| (i.e interference) increases, which agrees with the first observation. Problem 15.13 : ˆ The decision rule for the decorrelating detector is b2 = sgn(b0 ), where b0 is the output of the 2 2 decorrelating operation as given by equation (15.3-41). The signal component for the first term √ in the equation is E1 . The noise component is n= with variance 2 σ1 = E [n2 ] = = = = Hence n1 − ρn2 1 − ρ2 E [n1 −ρn2 ]2 (1−ρ2 )2 E [n2 ]+ρ2 E [n2 ]−2ρE [n1 n2 ] 1 2 (1−ρ2 )2 2 N0 1+ρ 2 (1−ρ2 )2 N0 1 2 (1−ρ2 ) P1 = Q 2E 1 (1 − ρ2 ) N0 P2 = Q 2E 2 (1 − ρ2 ) N0 Similarly, for the second user 312 Problem 15.14 : (a) The matrix Rs is 1ρ ρ1 Rs = Hence the linear transformation A0 for the two users will be A0 = Rs + N0 I 2 −1 = 1 + N0 ρ 2 ρ 1 + N0 2 −1 1 = 1+ N0 2 2 − ρ2 1 + N0 −ρ 2 −ρ 1 + N0 2 (b) The limiting form of A0 , as N0 → 0 is obviously A0 → 1 −ρ −ρ 1 1 1 − ρ2 which is the same as the transformation for the decorrelating detector, as given by expression (15.3-37). (c) The limiting form of A0 , as N0 → ∞ is A0 ≈ 1 N0 2 2 −ρ −ρ 1 + N0 2 N0 2 → 1 N0 2 10 01 which is simply a (scaled) form of the conventional single-user detector, since the decision for each user is based solely on the output of the particular user’s correlator. Problem 15.15 : (a) The performance of the receivers, when no post-processing is used, is the performance of the conventional multiuser detection. (1) (1) (b) Since : y1 (l) = b1 (l)w1 + b2 (l)ρ12 + b2 (l − 1)ρ21 + n, the decision variable z1 (l), for the first user after post-processing, is equal to : (1) (1) z1 (l) = b1 (l)w1 + n + ρ21 e2 (l − 1) + ρ12 e2 (l) where n is Gaussian with zero mean and variance σ 2 w1 and, by definition : e2 (l) ≡ b2 (l) − sgn [y2 (l)] . We note that e2 (l) is not orthogonal to e2 (l − 1), in general; however these two 313 quantities are orthogonal when conditioned on b1 (l). The distribution of e2 (l − 1), conditioned on b1 (l) is : (2) (2) (2) (2) P [e2 (l − 1) = +2|b1 (l)] = 1 Q 4 w2 +ρ12 +ρ21 b1 (l) √ σ w2 P [e2 (l − 1) = −2|b1 (l)] = 1 Q 4 w2 −ρ12 −ρ21 b1 (l) √ σ w2 P [e2 (l − 1) = 0|b1 (l)] (2) (2) (2) (2) + 1Q 4 w2 −ρ12 +ρ21 b1 (l) √ σ w2 + 1Q 4 w2 +ρ12 −ρ21 b1 (l) √ σ w2 = 1 − P [e2 (l − 1) = 2|b1 (l)] − P [e2 (l − 1) = −2|b1 (l)] (2) (2) The distribution of e2 (l), given b1 (l), is similar, just exchange ρ12 with ρ21 . Then, the probability of error for user 1 is : P ˆ1 (l) = b1 (l) = b 1 a ∈ {−2, 0, 2} 2 b ∈ {−1, +1} c ∈ {−2, 0, 2} P [e2 (l − 1) = a|b1 (l) = b] P [e2 (l) = c|b1 (l) = b] × (1) (1) w1 + ρ12 c+ρ21 a b1 (l) √ ×Q σ w1 The distribution of e2 (l − 1), conditioned on b1 (l), when σ → 0 is : P [e2 (l − 1) = a|b1 (l)] ≈ (2) (2) w2 − ρ12 +aρ21 b1 (l)/2 1 , √ Q 4 σ w2 a = ±2 P [e2 (l − 1) = 0|b1 (l)] = 1 − P [e2 (l − 1) = 2|b1 (l)] − P [e2 (l − 1) = −2|b1 (l)] This distribution may be concisely written as : (2) (2) a 1 |a| w2 − ρ12 + 2 ρ21 b1 (l) P [e2 (l − 1) = a|b1 (l)] ≈ Q √ 4 2 σ w2 which is exponentially tight. The limiting form of the probability of error is (dropping constants) P ˆ1 (l) = b1 (l) ≈ b a ∈ {−2, 0, 2} b ∈ {−1, +1} c ∈ {−2, 0, 2} (2) (2) c w − ρ21 + 2 ρ12 b c2 √ ×Q |2| σ w2 (c) Consider the special case : (2) (2) w2 − ρ12 + a ρ21 b 2 × √ Q |a| 2 σ w2 × (1) (2) sgn ρ12 = sgn ρ12 sgn ρ21 = sgn ρ21 (1) (2) 314 (1) (1) w1 + ρ12 c+ρ21 a b √ Q σ w1 as would occur for far-field transmission (this case is the most prevalent in practice ; other cases follow similarly). Then, the slowest decaying term corresponds to either : (1) (1) sgn bρ21 a = sgn bρ12 c = −1 for which the resulting term is : (2) (2) (1) (1) ρ12 + ρ21 ρ12 + ρ21 w1 √ w2 w1 · Q 2 −√√ 1−2 Q w1 σ2 w1 w2 σ2 w1 or the case when either ma or c = 0. In this case the term is : (2) (2) (1) (1) max ρ12 , ρ21 ρ12 + ρ21 w1 w2 w1 · Q −√√ 1−2 Q σ 2 w1 w1 w2 σ2 w1 or the case when a = c = 0 for which the term is : w1 Q σ2 Therefore, the asymptotic efficiency of this detector is : η1 = min 1, max2 0, 2 max2 0, (2) w2 w1 w2 w1 − − (2) ρ12 + ρ21 √√ w1 w2 (2) ρ12 √ (2) ρ21 + √ w1 w2 + max2 0, 1 − 2 + max2 0, 1 − 2 max (1) (1) ρ12 , ρ21 w1 max (1) ρ12 w1 , (1) ρ21 , Problem 15.16: 1 100 (a) The normalized offered traffic per user is : Guser = λ · Tp = 60 pack/ sec · 2400 sec = 1/1440. The maximum channel throughput Smax occurs when Gmax = 1/2; hence, the number of users that will produce the maximum throughput for the system is : Gmax /Guser = 720. (b) For slotted Aloha, the maximum channel throughput occurs when Gmax = 1; hence, the number of users that will produce the maximum throughput for the system is : Gmax /Guser = 1440. Problem 15.17 : A, the average normalized rate for retransmissions, is the total rate of transmissions (G) times the probability that a packet will overlap. This last probability is equal to the probability 315 that another packet will begin from Tp seconds before until Tp seconds after the start time of the original packet. Since the start times are Poisson-distributed, the probability that the two packets will overlap is 1 − exp(−2λTp ). Hence, A = G(1 − e−2G ) ⇒ G = S + G(1 − e−2G ) ⇒ S = Ge−2G Problem 15.18 : (a) Since the number of arrivals in the interval T, follows a Poisson distribution with parameter λT, the average number of arrivals in the interval T, is E [k ] = λT. (b) Again, from the well-known properties of the Poisson distribution : σ 2 = (λT )2 . (c) (d) P (k ≥ 1) = 1 − P (k = 0) = 1 − e−λT P (k = 1) = λT e−λT Problem 15.19 : (a) Since the average number of arrivals in 1 sec is E [k ] = λT = 10, the average time between arrivals is 1/10 sec. (b) P (at least one arrival within 1 sec) = 1 − e−10 ≈ 1 P (at least one arrival within 0.1 sec) = 1 − e−1 = 0.63 Problem 15.20 : (a) The throughput S and the normalized offered traffic G are related as S = Ge−G = 0.1. Solving numerically for G, we find G = 0.112. (b) The average number of attempted transmissions to send a packet, is : G/S = 1.12. 316 Problem 15.21 : (a) τd = (2 km) · 5 (b) Tp = µs = 10 µs km 1000 bits = 10−4 s 107 bits/ sec (c) a= τd 1 = Tp 10 Hence, a carrier-sensing protocol yields a satisfactory performance. (d) For non-persistent CDMA : S= Ge−aG G(1 + 2a) + e−aG The maximum bus utilization occurs when : dS =0 dG Differentiating the above expression with respect to G, we obtain : e−aG − aG2 (1 + 2a) = 0 which, when solved numerically, gives : Gmax = 2.54. Then , the maximum throughput will be : Smax = Ge−aG = 0.515 G(1 + 2a) + e−aG and the maximum bit rate : Smax · 107 bits/ sec = 5.15 Mbits/ sec 317 ...
View Full Document

This note was uploaded on 01/17/2012 for the course ECES 306 taught by Professor Kevinmurphy during the Summer '06 term at Drexel.

Ask a homework question - tutors are online